JP2017042498A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine executing a meaningful performance for a player.SOLUTION: When a value of a navigation stock counter is "1" or more in a number-of-ART-games determination state, the game machine notifies of the operation order of a left stop button 11, a middle stop button 12, and a right stop button 13 for continuing "the number-of-ART-games determination state" and, when the value of the navigation stock counter is "0", determines whether or not to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for continuing "the number-of-ART-games determination state". When the value of the navigation stock counter is "1" or more, a sub control board 400 executes a performance of suggesting a privilege to be provided to a player and, when the value of the navigation stock counter is "0", executes a performance of suggesting a possibility to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for continuing "the number-of-ART-games determination state".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 128

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (regular bonus)”, “BB (big bonus)”, “CB (challenge bonus)”, “MB (middle bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation More re-game the player is started to improve the probability that is determined as a winning combination "RT (replay time)", AT and RT is activated at the same time there is a such as "ART (assisted replay time)". Therefore, the player plays a game while desiring to shift to a specific state advantageous to the player.

  Recently, a gaming machine having a special state in which the number of games that can be played in a specific state is added in a plurality of games has been known (for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the number of games that can be played in a specific state is increased in a plurality of games, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since such a gaming machine is provided with a guaranteed number of times for guaranteeing the number of times of addition, it is possible to prevent the special state from ending without adding the number of games that can be played in a specific state. .

JP, 2014-073292, A

  However, since such a gaming machine will play a game without knowing whether or not the special state will continue after a guaranteed number of games are played in the special state, the special state always ends. There was a problem of having to play a game while caring about it. For such problems, it may be possible to produce an effect suggesting that it is decided to continue the special state, but it is confirmed that the special state will be continued within the guaranteed number of times. There is a problem that, when an effect suggesting that it is decided to continue the special state is performed, the effect is meaningless for the player.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that performs a meaningful effect for a player.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detection means, and the reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Reel rotation control means for performing rotation control, stop operation detection means provided for each of the plurality of reels to detect a stop operation by a player, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means And a stop control means for stopping the reel rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, , A special effect executing means for executing a special effect using the stop operation detecting means, a continuation operation order in which the special effect is continued, and a stop operation order in which an end operation order in which the special effect ends is defined Stop operation order data determining means for determining data, guaranteed number setting means for setting a guaranteed number of times that the continuous operation order is notified when the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and the special effect In a case where the special effect for the number of times of guarantee is executed, the special effect is determined to be continued, and the special effect for the number of times of guarantee is executed, When it is decided to continue the special effect by the special effect continuation determining unit that determines whether or not to continue the special effect and the special effect continuation determining unit , A continuation informing means for informing the continuation operation order, an end informing means for informing the ending operation order when the special effect continuation determining means decides to end the special effect, and the special effect continuation. When it is decided by the deciding means to continue the special effect, the privilege granting means for giving a privilege to the player, and until the execution of the special effect for the number of guarantees is completed, After the bonus suggestion effect executing means for executing the privilege suggestion effect suggesting the privilege granted by the privilege granting means and the special effect corresponding to the number of times of the guarantee are executed, the special effect continuation determining means performs the special effect. Continuation suggestion effect execution means for executing a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that it has been decided to continue.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which performs a meaningful effect for a player can be provided.

It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance perspective view of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet, and the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st RB gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd RB gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd RB gaming state winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by the main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of a reel lock production | presentation lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo game lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a spinning effect lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuation rate lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a distribution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART game number determination preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for pseudo game DE. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for ART game number determination states. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for rotation effect execution execution. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st ART addition state addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for 2nd ART addition states. It is a figure which shows an example of the addition lottery table for bonus completion. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special BB state addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a navigation stock addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of ART addition state acquisition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a security lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the information setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the push order lottery process in the pseudo | simulation game in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of pseudo game cancellation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st ART game number determination states at the time of cancellation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the continuation rate management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the spinning effect for state determination of the number of ART games in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd stop time process for the ART game number determination state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd ART game number determination states at the time of cancellation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd ART game number determination states at the time of cancellation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo | simulation game process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel operation management process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever detection process in the pseudo | simulation game in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of the start in pseudo | simulation game in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st ART game number determination states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd ART game number determination states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd ART game number determination states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of display in pseudo | simulation game in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st ART game number determination state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd ART game number determination states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd ART game number determination states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART shift determination states at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of a start in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the bonus first hit determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ceiling determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st bonus preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd bonus preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART addition state acquisition lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1BB states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd BB states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st special BB states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd special BB states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART game number determination preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st ART game number determination preparation state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd ART game number determination preparation state process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd ART game number determination preparation state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus states during ART in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st BB states in ART in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd BB states in ART in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART addition state in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st ART addition states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd ART addition states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART game number alerting | reporting states in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo game mode setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to the state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor completion | finish check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the bonus display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus preparation states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st bonus preparation states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd bonus preparation states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of bonus display during ART in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for a bonus state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st BB states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd BB states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st special BB states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd special BB states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display time ART game number determination preparation state process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st ART game number determination preparation state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd ART game number determination preparation state process at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd ART game number determination preparation state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for bonus state during ART at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1BB states during ART at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd BB states in ART at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART end warning end check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART state completion | finish check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART addition state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st ART addition state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd ART addition state at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the processing for ART game number alerting | reporting states at the time of a display in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main control board communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the conceptual diagram of execution start timing and completion | finish timing of a pseudo game. It is a figure which shows an example of each display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 in an ART game number determination preparation state. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation in an ART game number determination preparation state. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation in the case of canceling a pseudo game. It is a figure which shows an example of the icon which will be acquired in the ART game number determination state. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect of the effect performed by a light-guide plate in an ART game number determination state. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect at the time of pushing forward in the pseudo | simulation game D or the pseudo | simulation game E. FIG. In the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E, FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in an ART game number determination state. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect in a 1st ART addition state. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect at the time of operating a production | presentation button in an ART game number alerting | reporting state. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect at the time of operating a lever member in an ART game number alerting | reporting state. It is a figure which shows an example of a relationship between a spinning effect, a pseudo game, a left stop button, a middle stop button, and a right stop button. It is a figure which shows an example of a rotation effect suggestion effect determination table.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 in the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an external perspective view of the gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet and the back surface of the front door.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of a game store performs a maintenance operation or a change of a set value indicating a degree advantageous to the player, the unlocking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. Done. Specifically, the door is unlocked by inserting a door key (not shown) into the keyhole 5 and rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Then, the front door 3 is opened, and maintenance work and work such as setting value change are performed. In addition, when the maintenance work and the work such as the change of the set value are finished, the front door 3 is closed and the door is locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(Lever member 7)
The lever member 7 is provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 31 to be described later, and is provided for a player to operate when a predetermined effect is performed. The lever member 7 is provided in order to use “1” medals among the stored medals for the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the left side in front of the effect button 21 described later, and uses the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game ("1" game) among the stored (credit) medals for the game. Is provided. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The checkout button 9 is provided on the left side of the MAXBET button 8 and is provided to checkout a medal stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the MAXBET button 8. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 (to be described later) acquires a random number value and determines the winning combination, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right to be described later. A process for starting the rotation of the reel 20 is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping rotation of the left reel 18 described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided to detect a stop operation that triggers stopping the rotation of the right reel 20 described later.

(Selector 14)
The selector 14 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 14 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Storage number indicator 15)
The stored number indicator 15 is provided above the settlement button 9. The stored number display 15 is provided to display the number of stored medal (credit) of the player stored (credited) in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number display 16)
The payout number display 16 is provided below the stored number display 15. The payout number display 16 displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player, or displays that the game machine 1 is in an error state when the game machine 1 is in an error state. Is provided.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. Here, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected.

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 when viewed from the front. The cross key 22 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for a player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. Then, the sub control board 400 described later performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like described later via the effect control board 500 described later when the operation of the cross key 22 is detected.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23. In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the visual recognition of the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the symbols displayed on the display window 23 are irradiated by emitting a backlight (not shown). .

(Tray unit 24)
The saucer unit 24 is provided below the front face of the front door 3. In addition, the tray unit 24 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout opening 25 described later.

(Medal payout exit 25)
The medal payout opening 25 is provided below the front door 3 and is provided for discharging a medal paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medal payout is performed. The medal payout opening 25 is inserted when the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal by the selector sensor 14s or when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided for discharging the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 when a medal is inserted into the slot 6.

(Liquid crystal display device 31)
The liquid crystal display device 31 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, in a case where a state managed by the main control board 300 described later is an “ART state”, the sub control board 400 described later performs “push order bell A” and “push order bell B” by an internal lottery process described later. ”,“ Push order bell C ”,“ push order bell D ”,“ push order bell E ”, etc., etc., the left stop button 11, middle stop via the effect control board 500 described later Processing for displaying the operation order of the button 12 and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed.

(LED32)
The LED 32 is provided on the peripheral edge of the front surface of the front door 3 and is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs an effect of visually appealing to the player by performing a process of turning on and blinking the LED 32.

(Speaker 33)
The speaker 33 is provided below the back side of the front door 3 and is provided for outputting BGM, sound, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33, thereby performing an effect appealing to the player.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 also includes a lever member switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right switch described later. A stop switch 13sw, a selector sensor 14s described later, a stored number display 15, a payout number display 16, a door open / close sensor 17s, and a main control board 300 described later are connected.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected to a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, a main control board 300, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line, and gives a medal to the player. Process to pay out.

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. "Right downward line" connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row with a straight line, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the left reel 18, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the middle reel 19, and the middle row of the right reel 20. The “middle line” connecting the displayed symbols with a straight line, the symbol displayed at the bottom of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed at the bottom of the middle reel 19, and the symbol displayed at the bottom of the right reel 20 are straight lines. A total of “3” lines of “lower line” connected in the above become effective lines.

  In the present embodiment, the “lower right line”, “middle line”, and “lower line” are effective lines, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of effective lines and the number of effective lines The type can be set as appropriate. For example, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, the “upper line” connecting the symbols displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 20 with a straight line, and the left reel 18 The “right-up line” obtained by connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row, the symbols displayed in the middle row of the middle reel 19 and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the right reel 20 with a straight line may be used as the effective line.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the external control terminal board 30, the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400, which will be described later, are connected to the main control board 300.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Furthermore, a later-described effect button sensor 21s, a later-described cross key sensor 22s, a power supply board 200, a main control board 300, and a later-described effect control board 500 are connected to the sub-control board 400.

(Production control board 500)
The effect control board 500 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing an effect. The effect control board 500 includes an effect control CPU 501 described later, an effect control ROM 502 described later, an effect control RAM 503 described later, a CGROM 504 described later, a sound source IC 505 described later, a sound source ROM 506 described later, and a VDP 507 described later. Further, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, the speaker 33, and the sub control board 400 are connected to the effect control board 500.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power board 200, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(Lever member switch 7sw)
The lever member switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the lever member 7. Here, when the operation of the lever member 7 is detected by the lever member switch 7sw, the status board 100 transmits a lever member switch input signal to the main control board 300. The main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of the lever member switch input signal from the status board 100.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, the status board 100 transmits a MAXBET switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw. Then, based on the reception of the MAXBET switch input signal from the status board 100, the main control board 300 performs a process of using “3” medals from the stored medals.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a settlement switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected by the settlement switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of the adjustment switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a start switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of the start switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a left stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of the left stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits an intermediate stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the intermediate stop button 12 is detected by the intermediate stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of the middle stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a right stop switch input signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs processing for stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of the right stop switch input signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 14s)
The selector sensor 14 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a selector sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when an appropriate medal passage is detected by the selector sensor 14s. Then, the main control board 300 receives the selector sensor input signal from the status board 100, and adds “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or the number of medals used in the game. A process of adding “1” is performed.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And a main control board 300 to be described later are connected.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after a reel index is detected by a left reel sensor 154s described later. .

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after the reel index is detected by the middle reel sensor 155s described later. .

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after a reel index is detected by a right reel sensor 156s described later. .

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Hopper sensor 202s)
The hopper sensor 202s is a sensor for detecting that a medal to be paid out by driving the hopper 202 has passed. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a hopper sensor input signal to the main control board 300 when the hopper sensor 202s detects the payout of medals. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of subtracting the payout number based on the reception of the hopper sensor input signal from the status board 100.

(External concentration terminal board 30)
The external concentrated terminal board 30 is managed by the main control board 300, a medal insertion signal that can specify the number of medals used in the game, a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, That can identify the fact that has moved to the “ART state” described later, the BB signal that can be identified that “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed, and the fact that an illegal act has been performed Is provided for transmitting a security signal to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown).

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 4) to be described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 5) to be described later, a winning combination determination table for a non-RT gaming state (see FIG. 7) to be described later, First RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 8), second RT gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 9) described later, first RB gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 10) described later, and later The second RB gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 11), a third RB gaming state winning combination determination table (see FIG. 12) described later, a reel lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 15) described later, and a pseudo game described later. A lottery table (see FIG. 16), a later-described spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 17), a continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 18), a distribution lottery table (see FIG. 19), Art game number determination preparation state transition lottery table described above (see FIG. 20), pseudo game DE additional lottery table (see FIG. 21) described later, ART game number determination state additional lottery table (see FIG. 22) described later, and later described An extra lottery table (see FIG. 23) for performing the spinning effect of the first stage, an extra lottery table for the first ART extra state (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, an extra lottery table for the second ART extra state (see FIG. 25), which will be described later. Bonus end extra lottery table (see FIG. 26), second special BB state extra lottery table (see FIG. 27) described later, navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, and ART extra state acquisition lottery described later. A table (see FIG. 29), a later-described promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30), a later-described security lottery table (see FIG. 31), etc. are stored. That.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various counters such as a later-described input number counter and various storage areas such as a setting value storage area described later.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production button sensor 21s)
The effect button sensor 21 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect an operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 21 s transmits an effect button sensor input signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the effect button sensor input signal.

(Cross key sensor 22s)
The cross key sensor 22 s is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect an operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key sensor 22 s transmits a cross key sensor input signal to the sub-control board 400 based on detecting the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the cross key sensor input signal.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. Further, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and performs predetermined processing based on command information received from the main control board 300 and signals input from the effect button sensor 21s and the cross key sensor 22s. It is provided for performing calculations and supplying the results of the calculations to the effect control board 500 and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 stores an effect determination table (see FIG. 32) described later.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random value used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Production control CPU 501)
The effect control CPU 501 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control CPU 501 is provided to read a program stored in an effect control ROM 502 described later and create a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The effect control CPU 501 performs control for causing the liquid crystal display device 31 to display image data stored in a CGROM 504 described later.

(Production control ROM 502)
The effect control ROM 502 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control ROM 502 is provided for storing a control program executed by the effect control CPU 501, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the effect control ROM 502 is a program for control processing of the effect control CPU 501, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying animations, and a display order of animation scenes. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Production control RAM 503)
The effect control RAM 503 is provided on the effect control board 500. The effect control RAM 503 functions as a data work area during the calculation process of the effect control CPU 501, and is provided for temporarily storing data read from the effect control ROM 502.

(CGROM504)
The CGROM 504 is provided on the effect control board 500. The CGROM 504 includes color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels), and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC505)
The sound source IC 505 is provided on the effect control board 500. The sound source IC 505 is provided for reading a program and data relating to sound stored in a sound source ROM 506, which will be described later, and generating a sound signal for driving the speaker 33.

(Sound source ROM 506)
The sound source ROM 506 is provided on the effect control board 500. Further, the sound source ROM 506 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when an effect is executed.

(VDP507)
The VDP 507 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 501. Then, control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed by generating a video signal (for example, LVDS signal or RGB signal) based on the read image data. The VDP 507 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Light guide plate 34)
The light guide plate 34 is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 31 and is provided for performing an effect appealing to the player's vision. The light guide plate 34 includes a connector connected to the light guide plate 34, a guide part for fitting the light guide plate 34, a fixing part for fixing the light guide plate 34 fitted to the guide part, and the like. It is fitted into a unitized unit member (not shown).

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the array data table includes “a symbol related to red seven”, “a symbol related to white seven”, “a symbol related to black seven”, “a symbol related to BAR”, and “ "Replay Game", "Bell Design", "Bell Design", "Bell Design", "Watermelon Design", and "Cherry Design" "Design" is arranged.

(Design combination table)
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and defines the symbol bit name, symbol combination name, symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player.

  Here, when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the medal payout, the re-game operation, the bonus operation, the gaming state Control which grants the privilege of transfer is performed. If the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, the game is “lost”.

  Also, the symbol combination table includes a symbol bit name “BB01” “a combination of symbols related to the same color black Seven BB”, a symbol bit name “BB02” “a combination of symbols related to the same color white seven BB”, and a symbol bit. The name “BB03” “combination of the same color red Seven BB”, the symbol bit name “BB04” “the combination of different color white Seven BB”, the symbol bit name “BB05” “different color red seven BB” "Combination of symbols related to the first general replay" of the symbol bit name "REP01", "combination of symbols related to the first general replay" of the symbol bit name "BB06" “Combination of symbols related to second general replay” of name “REP02” and “Third of symbol bit name“ REP03 ” “Combination of symbols related to general replay”, “Combination of symbols related to fourth general replay” of symbol bit name “REP04”, and “Combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay A” of symbol bit name “REP05” ", A combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay B" of the symbol bit name "REP06", a "combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay C" of the symbol bit name "REP07", and a symbol “Combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay A” with the bit name “REP08”, “Combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay B” of the symbol bit name “REP09”, and symbol bit name “REP10” "" Combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay C "and the symbol bit The symbol “NML01” “the symbol combination relating to the first bell”, the symbol bit name “NML02” “the symbol combination relating to the second bell”, and the symbol bit name “NML03” “the symbol relating to the third bell” Of the symbol bit name “NML04”, “the combination of symbols related to the fourth bell”, “the combination of symbols related to the fifth bell” of the symbol bit name “NML05”, and the symbol bit name “NML06” “Combination of symbols related to the 6th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to the 7th bell” of the design bit name “NML07”, “Combination of symbols related to the 8th bell” of the design bit name “NML08”, "Combination of symbols relating to the 9th bell" of the symbol bit name "NML09" and "Combination of symbols relating to the 10th bell" of the symbol bit name "NML10" "The combination of symbols related to the eleventh bell" of the symbol bit name "NML11", "The combination of symbols related to the twelfth bell" of the symbol bit name "NML12", and "13th of the symbol bit name" NML13 " "Bell symbol combination", symbol bit name "NML14" "14th bell symbol combination", symbol bit name "NML15" "15th bell symbol combination", and symbol bit name “Combination of symbols relating to 16th bell” of “NML16”, “Combination of symbols relating to 17th bell” of symbol bit name “NML17”, and “Combination of symbols relating to 18th bell” of symbol bit name “NML18” “Combination”, “combination of symbols related to the 19th bell” of symbol bit name “NML19”, and “bit of symbol bit name“ NML20 ” "Combination of symbols related to 20 bells", "Combination of symbols related to 21st bell" of design bit name "NML21", "Combination of symbols related to 22nd bell" of design bit name "NML22", and design bit The symbol “NML23” “the combination of symbols relating to the 23rd bell”, the symbol bit name “NML24” “the combination of symbols relating to the 24th bell”, and the symbol bit name “NML25” “the symbol relating to the 25th bell” Of the symbol bit name “NML26”, the symbol combination of the 26th bell, the symbol bit name “NML27” of the symbol combination of the 27th bell, and the symbol bit name “NML28”. "Combination of symbols related to 28th bell" and "Combination of symbols related to 29th bell" of design bit name "NML29" The symbol bit name “NML30” “the symbol combination relating to the 30th bell”, the symbol bit name “NML31” “the symbol combination relating to watermelon”, and the symbol bit name “NML32” “the symbol relating to the first cherry” ”Combination of symbols related to the second cherry” of the symbol bit name “NML33”, “combination of symbols related to the third cherry” of the symbol bit name “NML34”, and symbol bit name “NML35” “A combination of symbols related to the fourth cherry”, “a combination of symbols related to the fifth cherry” of the symbol bit name “NML36”, “a combination of symbols related to the weak chance” of the symbol bit name “NML37”, The symbol bit name “NML38” “the combination of symbols related to the middle chance” and the symbol bit name “NML39” "A combination of symbols relating to the strong chance eye", "A combination of symbols relating to the 31st bell" of the symbol bit name "NML40", and "A combination of symbols relating to the first blank" of the symbol bit name "BLK01". “A combination of symbols related to the second blank” of the symbol bit name “BLK02”, “a combination of symbols related to the third blank” of the symbol bit name “BLK03”, and “fourth of the symbol bit name“ BLK04 ”. “Combination of symbols relating to blank”, “Combination of symbols relating to fifth blank” of symbol bit name “BLK05”, and “Combination of symbols relating to sixth blank” of symbol bit name “BLK06” are defined. .

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB”, “a combination of symbols related to the same color white seven BB”, “a combination of symbols related to the same color red seven BB”, “a combination of different colors white seven BB” When ”Combination of Symbols”, “Combination of Symbols of Different Color Red Seven BB”, or “Combination of Symbols of Different Color Black Seven BB” is displayed on the active line, Such an accessory continuous operation device) is operated, and BB is operated. When the operation of BB is performed, it is advantageous for the player as compared to before the operation of BB is performed.

  The “combination of symbols related to the same color Black Seven BB” and the “combination of symbols related to the different color Black Seven BB” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the Black Seven BB”, and “the combination of the same color Red Seven BB” “Combination of symbols” and “Combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB” are collectively called “Combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB”, “Combination of symbols related to White Seven BB”, and “White Seven The “combination of symbols related to BB” is collectively referred to as “combination of symbols related to white seven BB”. In this embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to Black Seven BB”, “the combination of symbols related to White Seven BB”, and “the combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB”. "Combination" or "Combination of symbols related to bonus".

  In the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to the first general replay”, “the combination of symbols related to the second general replay”, “the combination of symbols related to the third general replay”, “the fourth general replay” "Combination of symbols related to", "Combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay A", "Combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay B", "Combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay C" , “Combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay A”, “Combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay B”, or “Combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay C” is on the effective line When displayed on the screen, the replay operation is performed. When the re-game operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

  In this embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to the first general replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the second general replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the third general replay”, “a combination of symbols related to the fourth general replay” The “combination of symbols” is collectively referred to as “combination of symbols related to general replay”, “combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay A”, and “combination of symbols related to second RT gaming state transition replay B”. , “The combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay C” is collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay”, and “the combination of symbols relating to the first RT gaming state transition replay A”. , “Combination of symbols related to first RT gaming state transition replay B”, “Combination of symbols related to first RT gaming state transition replay C” Together "are collectively referred to as" the combination of symbols according to a 1RT game state transition Replay ".

  Further, in the present embodiment, “the combination of symbols related to the general replay”, “the combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay”, and “the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay” are collectively referred to as “ It is called “combination of symbols related to replay”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols relating to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third bell”, and “a combination of symbols relating to the fourth bell” “Combination of symbols”, “Combination of symbols related to Bell 5”, “Combination of symbols of Bell 6”, “Combination of symbols related to Bell 7”, and “Combination of symbols related to Bell 8” "Combination of symbols related to the 9th bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 10th bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 11th bell", and "Combination of symbols related to the 12th bell" “A combination of symbols related to the 13th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 14th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 15th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 16th bell”, "In charge of the 17th bell "Combination of symbols", "Combination of symbols according to 18th bell", "Combination of symbols according to 19th bell", "Combination of symbols according to 20th bell", and "Combination of symbols according to 21st bell" "Combination of symbols related to the 22nd bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 23rd bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 24th bell", and "Combination of symbols related to the 25th bell" And “a combination of symbols related to the 26th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 27th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 28th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 29th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 30th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 31st bell”, “Combination of symbols related to watermelon”, “Combination of symbols related to 1st cherry”, “No. “Combination of symbols related to cherry”, “Combination of symbols related to third cherry”, “Combination of symbols related to fourth cherry”, “Combination of symbols related to fifth cherry”, “ When the symbol combination, the symbol combination related to the medium chance, and the symbol combination related to the strong chance are displayed on the active line, the medal is paid out.

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols relating to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the second bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the third bell”, and “a symbol relating to the fourth bell”. Combination of symbols "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 5 "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 6 "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 7 ", and" Combination of symbols related to Bell 8 " "," Combination of symbols related to the 9th bell "," combination of symbols related to the 10th bell "," combination of symbols related to the 11th bell ", and" combination of symbols related to the 12th bell " , “A combination of symbols relating to the 13th bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the 14th bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the 15th bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the 16th bell”, “ According to the 17th bell “Combination of symbols”, “Combination of symbols related to 18th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 19th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 20th bell”, and “Combination of symbols related to 21st bell” "Combination of symbols related to the 22nd bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 23rd bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 24th bell", and "Combination of symbols related to the 25th bell" And “a combination of symbols related to the 26th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 27th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 28th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 29th bell”, The “combination of symbols relating to the 30th bell” and the “combination of symbols relating to the 31st bell” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols relating to the bell”.

  In addition, “a combination of symbols related to the first cherry”, “a combination of symbols related to the second cherry”, “a combination of symbols related to the third cherry”, “a combination of symbols related to the fourth cherry”, “The combination of symbols relating to the fifth cherry” is collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols relating to the cherry”.

  In addition, “the combination of symbols related to the chance chance”, “the combination of symbols related to the medium chance”, and “the combination of symbols related to the strong chance” are collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the chance opportunity”. .

  In the present embodiment, “a combination of symbols related to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the second bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the third bell”, and “a symbol combination related to the fourth bell”. Combination of symbols "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 5 "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 6 "," Combination of symbols related to Bell 7 ", and" Combination of symbols related to Bell 8 " "," Combination of symbols related to the 9th bell "," combination of symbols related to the 10th bell "," combination of symbols related to the 11th bell ", and" combination of symbols related to the 12th bell " , “A combination of symbols relating to the 13th bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the 14th bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the 15th bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the 16th bell”, “ According to the 17th bell “Combination of symbols”, “Combination of symbols related to 18th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 19th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 20th bell”, and “Combination of symbols related to 21st bell” "Combination of symbols related to the 22nd bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 23rd bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 24th bell", and "Combination of symbols related to the 25th bell" And “a combination of symbols related to the 26th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 27th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 28th bell”, “a combination of symbols related to the 29th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 30th bell”, “Combination of symbols related to 31st bell”, “Combination of symbols related to watermelon”, “Combination of symbols related to 1st cherry”, “2nd "Combination of symbols related to the third cherry", "Combination of symbols related to the third cherry", "Combination of symbols related to the fourth cherry", "Combination of symbols related to the fifth cherry", and " The “combination of symbols relating to medium chance”, the “combination of symbols relating to medium chance”, and the “combination of symbols relating to strong chance” are collectively referred to as “combination of symbols related to winning”.

  In addition, “a combination of symbols related to the first blank”, “a combination of symbols related to the second blank”, “a combination of symbols related to the third blank”, “a combination of symbols related to the fourth blank”, “The combination of symbols related to the fifth blank” is collectively referred to as “the combination of symbols related to the blank”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 6, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 6, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as a winning combination, a left stop button 11, a middle stop button 12, The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed on an active line by the operation order of the right stop button 13 is shown.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, if the “first replay A during RT” of the winning number “01” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP01” to “REP07”. That is, when the winning number “01” “Replay A during the first RT” is determined as the winning combination, “Combination of symbols related to the first general replay”, “Combination of symbols related to the second general replay”, “No. "Combination of symbols related to 3 general replays", "Combination of symbols related to 4th general replay", "Combination of symbols related to 2nd RT gaming state transition replay A", "Combination of symbols related to 2nd RT gaming state transition replay B" ”And“ a combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay C ”are allowed to be displayed on the active line.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “first replay A during RT” of the winning number “01” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP01” to “REP07”. In this case, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in this order, “a combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. Become. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in another order, the “combination of symbols related to normal replay” is displayed on the active line.

  Further, in the present embodiment, winning combinations having different “combination of symbols related to winnings” on the active line are provided depending on the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. ing. For example, when the “first push order bell” of the winning number “20” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “NML01”, “NML05”, “NML09” ”,“ NML11 ”,“ NML15 ”,“ NML16 ”,“ NML21 ”,“ NML22 ”,“ NML26 ”,“ NML28 ”,“ NML29 ”, and“ NML30 ”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is first operated, then the middle stop button 12 is operated, and the right stop button 13 is operated last, the “combination of symbols relating to the 28th bell”, “ "Combination of symbols related to 29 bells" or "Combination of symbols related to 30th bell" is displayed on the active line, and "9" medals are paid out. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in another order, “the combination of symbols related to the first bell”, “the combination of symbols related to the fifth bell”, “ "Combination of symbols related to 9th bell", "Combination of symbols related to 11th bell", "Combination of symbols related to 15th bell", "Combination of symbols related to 16th bell", "Design combination of 21st bell" "Combination of symbols", "Combination of symbols related to the 22nd bell", or "Combination of symbols related to the 26th bell" is displayed on the active line, and "9" medals are paid out. However, “a combination of symbols relating to the first bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the fifth bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the ninth bell”, “a combination of symbols relating to the eleventh bell”, “15th bell” "Combination of symbols related to the 16th bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 21st bell", "Combination of symbols related to the 22nd bell", or "Combination of symbols related to the 26th bell" When the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not performed at a timing at which “can be displayed”, “the combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line. Become.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when “same color black BB” of the winning number “35” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition device that is activated is “BB01”. In this case, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in any order, the “combination of symbols related to the same color black seven” can be displayed on the effective line. If the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at a proper timing, “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven” is displayed on the effective line.

  In the present embodiment, when the condition device related to the bonus and the other condition device are operated simultaneously, the combination of symbols related to the other condition device is preferentially displayed on the effective line. It will be. For example, when “same color white BB + watermelon” with a winning number “37” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the condition devices that are activated are “BB02” and “NML31”. . In this case, the control is performed so that the “combination of symbols related to watermelon” is given priority over the “combination of symbols related to white seven BB”.

  Similarly, in the game in which “same color white BB + watermelon” with the winning number “37” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is not displayed on the active line. For example, when the “normal replay” of the winning number “06” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process of the next game, the condition devices that are activated are “BB02”, “REP01”, “ REP02 "," REP03 ", and" REP04 ". In this case, the control is performed so that the “combination of symbols related to normal replay” is given priority over the “combination of symbols related to white seven BB”.

(Non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “non-RT gaming state” described later. In addition, the non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table defines a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value. Here, in this embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes the “normal replay” of the winning number “06”, the “common bell” of the winning number “13”, the “watermelon” of the winning number “14”, and the winning number. “15” “weak cherry”, winning number “16” “strong cherry”, winning number “17” “weak chance”, winning number “18” “medium chance” and winning number “19” “strong chance role”, winning number “20” “first pushing order bell”, winning number “21” “second pushing order bell” and winning number “22” “third” “Push order bell”, “fourth push order bell” with winning number “23”, “fifth push order bell” with winning number “24”, “sixth push order bell” with winning number “25” , Winning number “26” “seventh pressing order bell”, winning number “27” “eighth pressing order bell”, winning number “2” "9th pushing order bell" of winning number "29", "10th pushing order bell" of winning number "29", "11th pushing order bell" of winning number "30" and "12th of winning number" 31 " “Push order bell”, “No. 13 push order bell” with winning number “32”, “14 th push order bell” with winning number “33”, “15th push order bell” with winning number “34”, The winning number “35” “same color black BB”, the winning number “36” “same color white BB”, the winning number “37” “same color white BB + watermelon”, and the winning number “38” “same color white”. BB + weak cherry, "same color white BB + strong cherry" with winning number "39", "same color white BB + weak chance role" with winning number "40", and "same color white BB + medium chance role" with winning number "41" ”,“ Same color white BB + strong chance role ”with winning number“ 42 ”and“ same color with winning number “43” BB, winning number “44” “same color red BB + watermelon”, winning number “45” “same color red BB + weak cherry”, winning number “46” “same color red BB + strong cherry”, winning number “47” “same color red BB + weak chance role”, “48” “same color red BB + medium chance role”, “49” “unique white BB” and “50” win number “50” "Different white BB + watermelon", "Different white BB + weak cherry" with winning number "51", "Different white BB + strong cherry" with winning number "52", and "Different white BB + weak chance" with winning number "53" ”,“ Different white BB + Middle chance ”with winning number“ 54 ”,“ Different white BB + strong chance ”with winning number“ 55 ”,“ Different red BB ”with winning number“ 56 ”, and winning number “57” “different color red BB + watermelon” and winning number “ 58 ”“ different color red BB + weak cherry ”, winning number“ 59 ”“ different color red BB + strong cherry ”, winning number“ 60 ”“ different color red BB + weak chance role ”, and winning number“ 61 ”“ “Different red BB + medium chance”, “Different black BB + watermelon” with winning number “62”, “Different black BB + strong cherry” with winning number “63”, “Different black BB + weak chance” with winning number “64” The lottery values are defined for “combination”, “different color black BB + medium chance combination” with winning number “65”, and “different color black BB + strong chance combination” with winning number “66”.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the “replay A during the first RT” of the winning number “01” and the winning number “Replay B during the first RT” of “02”, “Replay C during the first RT” of the winning number “03”, “Replay D during the first RT” of the winning number “04”, and “Replay D during the first RT” of “05” “Replay E during the first RT”, “Replay A during the second RT” with the winning number “07”, “Replay B during the second RT” with the winning number “08”, and “Replay C during the second RT” with the winning number “09” ”,“ Replay D during 2nd RT ”with the winning number“ 10 ”,“ Replay E during the 2nd RT ”with the winning number“ 11 ”, and“ RB in operation ”with the winning number“ 12 ”are determined as the winning combination It will never be done.

  In this embodiment, “Replay A during the first RT”, “Replay B during the first RT”, “Replay C during the first RT”, “Replay D during the first RT”, and “Replay E during the first RT”. Are collectively referred to as “Replay during 1st RT”, “Replay during 2nd RT”, “Replay during 2nd RT”, “Replay during 2nd RT”, “Replay during 2nd RT”, “Replay E during 2nd RT” is generically called “Replay during 2nd RT”, “Replay during 1st RT”, “Replay during 2nd RT”, and “Replay during normal RT” are collectively called “Replay”. .

  Also, “weak cherry” and “strong cherry” are collectively called “cherry”, “weak chance role”, “medium chance role”, and “strong chance role” are collectively called “chance role”. "

  In addition, “first push order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, “fifth push order bell”, and “sixth push order bell” "Push order bell", "seventh push order bell", "eighth push order bell", "ninth push order bell", "tenth push order bell", and "eleventh push order bell" , “12th push order bell”, “13th push order bell”, “14th push order bell”, and “15th push order bell” are collectively referred to as “push order bell”, “RB The “operating bell”, “common bell”, and “push order bell” are collectively referred to as “bell”.

  Also, “same color white BB”, “same color white BB + watermelon”, “same color white BB + weak cherry”, “same color white BB + strong cherry”, “same color white BB + weak chance role”, and “same color white BB + medium” The “chance role” and “same color white BB + strong chance role” are collectively referred to as “same color white BB”, “same color red BB”, “same color red BB + watermelon”, “same color red BB + weak cherry”, “ “Same color red BB + strong cherry”, “same color red BB + weak chance role”, and “same color red BB + medium chance role” are collectively referred to as “same color red BB”.

  Also, “different color white BB”, “different color white BB + watermelon”, “different color white BB + weak cherry”, “different color white BB + strong cherry”, “different color white BB + weak chance role”, and “different color white BB + medium” The “chance role” and “different color white BB + strong chance role” are collectively called “different color white BB”, “different color red BB”, “different color red BB + watermelon”, “different color red BB + weak cherry”, “ “Different red BB + strong cherry”, “different color red BB + weak chance role”, and “different color red BB + medium chance role” are collectively referred to as “different color red BB”.

  Also, “different color black BB”, “different color black BB + watermelon”, “different color black BB + weak cherry”, “different color black BB + strong cherry”, “different color black BB + weak chance”, and “different color black BB + medium” The “chance role” and “different color black BB + strong chance role” are collectively referred to as “different color black BB”.

  Further, “same color black BB” and “different color black BB” are collectively referred to as “black BB”, “same color red BB” and “different color red BB” are collectively referred to as “red BB”, “Same color white BB” and “different color white BB” are collectively referred to as “white BB”, and “black BB”, “red BB”, and “white BB” are collectively referred to as “BB”, or This is called “bonus”.

(First RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “first RT gaming state” described later. In the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the first RT gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes “replay A during the first RT” with the winning number “01”, “replay B during the first RT” with the winning number “02”, and “03” with the winning number “03”. "Replay C during 1RT", "Replay D during 1RT" with winning number "04", "Replay E during 1RT" with winning number "05", "Normal replay" with winning number "06", The winning number “13” “common bell”, the winning number “14” “watermelon”, the winning number “15” “weak cherry”, the winning number “16” “strong cherry”, and the winning number “ 17 "weak chance role", winning number "18" "medium chance role", winning number "19" "strong chance role", winning number "20" "first push order bell" , “No. 2 push order bell” with winning number “21” and “22” with winning number “22” “3 push order bell”, “4th push order bell” with winning number “23”, “5th push order bell” with winning number “24”, and “6th push order bell” with winning number “25” The winning number “26” “seventh pushing order bell”, the winning number “27” “eighth pushing order bell”, the winning number “28” “the ninth pushing order bell”, and the winning number “ 29 ”“ 10th pushing order bell ”, winning number“ 30 ”“ 11th pushing order bell ”, winning number“ 31 ”“ 12th pushing order bell ”, and winning number“ 32 ” “13 push order bell”, win number “33” “14 th push order bell”, win number “34” “15 th push order bell”, win number “35” “same color black BB”, Winning number “36” “same color white BB”, winning number “37” “same color white BB + watermelon”, winning number “38” “same color white BB + weak check” “-”, “Same color white BB + strong cherry” with winning number “39”, “same color white BB + weak chance role” with winning number “40”, “same color white BB + medium chance role” with winning number “41” , Winning number “42” “same color white BB + strong chance role”, winning number “43” “same color red BB”, winning number “44” “same color red BB + watermelon” and winning number “45” “Same color red BB + weak cherry”, “same color red BB + strong cherry” with winning number “46”, “same color red BB + weak chance” with winning number “47”, and “same color red BB +” with winning number “48” “Middle Chance”, “Unique White BB” with the winning number “49”, “Unique White BB + Watermelon” with the winning number “50”, “Unique White BB + Weak Cherry” with the winning number “51”, and the winning number “52” “Different white BB + strong cherry” and winning number “53” “White-colored white BB + weak chance role”, “No. white-colored BB + medium chance role” with winning number “54”, “No. white-white BB + strong chance role” with winning number “55”, and winning number “56” "Different red BB" with winning number "57", "Different red BB with weak cherry" with winning number "58", and "Different red BB with strong cherry" with winning number "59" ”,“ Different red BB + weak chance role ”with winning number“ 60 ”,“ Different red BB + medium chance role ”with winning number“ 61 ”,“ Different black BB + watermelon ”with winning number“ 62 ” The number “63” “different color black BB + strong cherry”, the winning number “64” “different color black BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “65” “different color black BB + medium chance role”, and the winning number “66” ”Is a lottery value for“ Black Black BB + Strong Chance ” It is constant.

  In other words, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Replay A during 2nd RT” with the winning number “07” and the winning number “Replay B during 2nd RT” of “08”, “Replay C during 2nd RT” of winning number “09”, “Replay D during 2nd RT” of winning number “10”, and “Replay D during RT 2” of winning number “11” The “second replay E during RT” and the “RB active bell” with the winning number “12” are not determined as the winning combination.

(2nd RT gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The second RT gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “second RT gaming state” described later. In addition, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table defines a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value. Here, in the present embodiment, the second RT gaming state winning combination determination table exemplifies the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “normal replay” of the winning number “06”, “replay A during second RT” of the winning number “07”, and “during second RT” of the winning number “08”. “Replay B”, “Replay C during 2nd RT” with winning number “09”, “Replay D during 2nd RT” with winning number “10”, “Replay E during 2nd RT” with winning number “11”, The winning number “13” “common bell”, the winning number “14” “watermelon”, the winning number “15” “weak cherry”, the winning number “16” “strong cherry”, and the winning number “ 17 "weak chance role", winning number "18" "medium chance role", winning number "19" "strong chance role", winning number "20" "first push order bell" , “No. 2 push order bell” with winning number “21” and “22” with winning number “ “3 push order bell”, “4th push order bell” with winning number “23”, “5th push order bell” with winning number “24”, and “6th push order bell” with winning number “25” The winning number “26” “seventh pushing order bell”, the winning number “27” “eighth pushing order bell”, the winning number “28” “the ninth pushing order bell”, and the winning number “ 29 ”“ 10th pushing order bell ”, winning number“ 30 ”“ 11th pushing order bell ”, winning number“ 31 ”“ 12th pushing order bell ”, and winning number“ 32 ” “13 push order bell”, win number “33” “14 th push order bell”, win number “34” “15 th push order bell”, win number “35” “same color black BB”, Winning number “36” “same color white BB”, winning number “37” “same color white BB + watermelon”, winning number “38” “same color white BB + weak check” “-”, “Same color white BB + strong cherry” with winning number “39”, “same color white BB + weak chance role” with winning number “40”, “same color white BB + medium chance role” with winning number “41” , Winning number “42” “same color white BB + strong chance role”, winning number “43” “same color red BB”, winning number “44” “same color red BB + watermelon” and winning number “45” “Same color red BB + weak cherry”, “same color red BB + strong cherry” with winning number “46”, “same color red BB + weak chance” with winning number “47”, and “same color red BB +” with winning number “48” “Middle Chance”, “Unique White BB” with the winning number “49”, “Unique White BB + Watermelon” with the winning number “50”, “Unique White BB + Weak Cherry” with the winning number “51”, and the winning number “52” “Different white BB + strong cherry” and winning number “53” “White-colored white BB + weak chance role”, “No. white-colored BB + medium chance role” with winning number “54”, “No. white-white BB + strong chance role” with winning number “55”, and winning number “56” "Different red BB" with winning number "57", "Different red BB with weak cherry" with winning number "58", and "Different red BB with strong cherry" with winning number "59" ”,“ Different red BB + weak chance role ”with winning number“ 60 ”,“ Different red BB + medium chance role ”with winning number“ 61 ”,“ Different black BB + watermelon ”with winning number“ 62 ” The number “63” “different color black BB + strong cherry”, the winning number “64” “different color black BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “65” “different color black BB + medium chance role”, and the winning number “66” ”Is a lottery value for“ Black Black BB + Strong Chance ” It is constant.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the winning number “01” “Replay A during the first RT” and the winning number “Replay B during the first RT” of “02”, “Replay C during the first RT” of the winning number “03”, “Replay D during the first RT” of the winning number “04”, and “Replay D during the first RT” of “05” The “replay E during the first RT” and the “RB active bell” with the winning number “12” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First RB gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the first RB gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RB gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “first RB gaming state” described later. In the first RB gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the first RB gaming state winning combination determination table exemplifies a lottery value when the setting value is “1” and a lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Further, in the first RB gaming state winning combination determination table, a lottery value is defined only for “RB in operation bell” of the winning number “12”.

  That is, the lottery value other than “RB in operation bell” of the winning number “12” is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the first RB gaming state, the winning number “01” “Replay A during the first RT”, “Replay B during the first RT” with the winning number “02”, “Replay C during the first RT” with the winning number “03”, and “Replay during the first RT” with the winning number “04”. D ”,“ Replay E during 1RT ”with a winning number“ 05 ”,“ Normal Replay ”with a winning number“ 06 ”,“ Replay A during 2nd RT ”with a winning number“ 07 ”, and a winning number“ 08 ” "Replay B during 2nd RT", "Replay C during 2nd RT" with winning number "09", "Replay D during 2nd RT" with winning number "10", and "2nd RT with winning number" 11 " “Middle Replay E” and “Common Bell” with winning number “13” “Watermelon” with winning number “14”, “Weak cherry” with winning number “15”, “Strong cherry” with winning number “16”, “Weak chance role” with winning number “17”, Winning number “18” “medium chance role”, winning number “19” “strong chance role”, winning number “20” “first push order bell” and winning number “21” “second” “Push order bell”, “third push order bell” with winning number “22”, “fourth push order bell” with winning number “23”, “fifth push order bell” with winning number “24” The winning number “25” “sixth pressing order bell”, the winning number “26” “seventh pressing order bell”, the winning number “27” “eighth pressing order bell”, and the winning number “28”. "9th push order bell" of winning number "29", "10th push order bell" of winning number "30", "11th push order bell" of winning number "30" Winning number “31” “12th pushing order bell”, winning number “32” “13th pushing order bell”, winning number “33” “14th pushing order bell”, and winning number “34” “Same color black BB” with winning number “35”, “same color white BB” with winning number “36”, “same color white BB + watermelon” with winning number “37”, Winning number “38” “same color white BB + weak cherry”, winning number “39” “same color white BB + strong cherry”, winning number “40” “same color white BB + weak chance” and winning number “41” "Same color white BB + medium chance role", winning number "42" "same color white BB + strong chance role", winning number "43" "same color red BB" and winning number "44" "same color red" "BB + watermelon", winning number "45", "same color red BB + weak cherry" and winning number “46” “same color red BB + strong cherry”, winning number “47” “same color red BB + weak chance role”, winning number “48” “same color red BB + medium chance role” and winning number “49” “Different white BB” with winning number “50”, “Different white BB + watermelon” with winning number “51”, “Different white BB + weak cherry” with winning number “51”, and “Different white BB + strong cherry” with winning number “52” And, the winning number “53” “different color white BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “54” “different color white BB + medium chance role”, the winning number “55” “different color white BB + strong chance role”, “No. red BB” with winning number “56”, “No. red BB + watermelon” with winning number “57”, “No. red BB + weak cherry” with winning number “58”, “No. "Red BB + strong cherry" and the winning number "60" BB + weak chance combination, winning number “61” “different color red BB + medium chance role”, winning number “62” “different color black BB + watermelon”, and winning number “63” “different color black BB + strong cherry” The winning number “64” “different color black BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “65” “different color black BB + medium chance role”, and the winning number “66” “different color black BB + strong chance role” are won. It is not determined as a role.

(2nd RB gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the second RB gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The second RB gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when a winning combination is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the “second RB gaming state” described later. In the second RB gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the winning combination determination table for the second RB gaming state illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  In addition, the winning combination determination table for the second RB gaming state includes the “RB active bell” with the winning number “12”, the “common bell” with the winning number “13”, the “watermelon” with the winning number “14”, “Weak cherry” with winning number “15”, “Strong cherry” with winning number “16”, “Weak chance role” with winning number “17”, “Medium chance role” with winning number “18”, A lottery value is defined for the “strong chance combination” of the winning number “19”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the second RB gaming state, “Replay A during 1st RT” with the winning number “01” and the winning number “Replay B during the first RT” of “02”, “Replay C during the first RT” of the winning number “03”, “Replay D during the first RT” of the winning number “04”, and “Replay D during the first RT” of “05” “Replay E during the first RT”, “Normal Replay” with the winning number “06”, “Replay A during the second RT” with the winning number “07”, “Replay B during the second RT” with the winning number “08”, “Replay C during 2nd RT” with winning number “09”, “Replay D during 2nd RT” with winning number “10”, “Replay E during 2nd RT” with winning number “11”, and winning number “20” "First push order bell" and winning number "21" "2nd push order bell", "3rd push order bell" with winning number "22", "4th push order bell" with winning number "23", and "5th push order bell" with winning number "24" ”,“ 6th push order bell ”with a winning number“ 25 ”,“ 7th push order bell ”with a win number“ 26 ”,“ 8th push order bell ”with a win number“ 27 ”, and a win number “28” “9th pushing order bell”, winning number “29” “10th pushing order bell”, winning number “30” “11th pushing order bell”, and winning number “31” “ "12th push order bell", win number "32" "13th push order bell", win number "33" "14th push order bell", win number "34" "15th push order bell" ”,“ Same color black BB ”with winning number“ 35 ”,“ same color white BB ”with winning number“ 36 ”, and“ same color white BB + watermelon ”with winning number“ 37 ” The winning number “38” “same color white BB + weak cherry”, the winning number “39” “same color white BB + strong cherry”, the winning number “40” “same color white BB + weak chance” and the winning number “ 41 ”“ same color white BB + medium chance role ”, winning number“ 42 ”“ same color white BB + strong chance role ”, winning number“ 43 ”“ same color red BB ”and winning number“ 44 ”“ same color ” "Red BB + watermelon", winning number "45" "same color red BB + weak cherry", winning number "46" "same color red BB + strong cherry", winning number "47" "same color red BB + weak chance role" The winning number “48” “same color red BB + medium chance role”, the winning number “49” “different colored white BB”, the winning number “50” “different colored white BB + watermelon”, and the winning number “51”. And “No. White BB + Weak Cherry” and the winning number “52 "Different white BB + strong cherry", "No. white BB + weak chance role" with winning number "53", "Unique white BB + medium chance role" with winning number "54" and "No. “Different white BB + strong chance role”, “Different red BB” with winning number “56”, “Different red BB + watermelon” with winning number “57”, “Different red BB + weak cherry” with winning number “58” The winning number “59” “different color red BB + strong cherry”, the winning number “60” “different color red BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “61” “different color red BB + medium chance role”, and the winning number “Different black BB + watermelon” of “62”, “Different black BB + strong cherry” of winning number “63”, “Different black BB + weak chance” of winning number “64” and “65” of winning number “65” “Black color BB + medium chance” and winning number “66” "Unique black BB + strong chance auditors" will not be determined as a winning combination of.

(3rd RB gaming state winning combination determination table)
Next, the winning combination determination table for the third RB gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.

  The third RB gaming state winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the “third RB gaming state” described later. In the third RB gaming state winning combination determination table, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value for each set value are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the third RB gaming state winning combination determination table illustrates the lottery value when the setting value is “1” and the lottery value when the setting value is “6”. A drawing of a lottery value when the value is “2”, a lottery value when the setting value is “3”, a lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and a lottery value when the setting value is “5” Omitted.

  Also, in the third RB gaming state winning combination determination table, lottery values are defined for “RB active bell” with a winning number “12” and “common bell” with a winning number “13”.

  That is, the lottery value other than the “RB active bell” with the winning number “12” and the “common bell” with the winning number “13” is “0”, and the lottery is performed using the winning combination determination table for the third RB gaming state. In the case of performing, the “replay A during the first RT” with the winning number “01”, the “replay B during the first RT” with the winning number “02”, and the “replay C during the first RT” with the winning number “03”. , “Replay D during the first RT” of the winning number “04”, “Replay E during the first RT” of the winning number “05”, “Normal replay” of the winning number “06”, and “Replay D of the winning number“ 07 ”. "Replay A during 2RT", "Replay B during 2RT" with winning number "08", "Replay C during 2RT" with winning number "09", and "Replay D during 2RT" with winning number "10" ”And“ Replay E during 2nd RT ”with winning number“ 11 ” “Watermelon” with winning number “14”, “Weak cherry” with winning number “15”, “Strong cherry” with winning number “16”, “Weak chance role” with winning number “17”, Winning number “18” “medium chance role”, winning number “19” “strong chance role”, winning number “20” “first push order bell” and winning number “21” “second” “Push order bell”, “third push order bell” with winning number “22”, “fourth push order bell” with winning number “23”, “fifth push order bell” with winning number “24” The winning number “25” “sixth pressing order bell”, the winning number “26” “seventh pressing order bell”, the winning number “27” “eighth pressing order bell”, and the winning number “28”. "9th push order bell" of winning number "29", "10th push order bell" of winning number "30", "11th push order bell" of winning number "30" Winning number “31” “12th pushing order bell”, winning number “32” “13th pushing order bell”, winning number “33” “14th pushing order bell”, and winning number “34” “Same color black BB” with winning number “35”, “same color white BB” with winning number “36”, “same color white BB + watermelon” with winning number “37”, Winning number “38” “same color white BB + weak cherry”, winning number “39” “same color white BB + strong cherry”, winning number “40” “same color white BB + weak chance” and winning number “41” "Same color white BB + medium chance role", winning number "42" "same color white BB + strong chance role", winning number "43" "same color red BB" and winning number "44" "same color red" "BB + watermelon", winning number "45", "same color red BB + weak cherry" and winning number “46” “same color red BB + strong cherry”, winning number “47” “same color red BB + weak chance role”, winning number “48” “same color red BB + medium chance role” and winning number “49” “Different white BB” with winning number “50”, “Different white BB + watermelon” with winning number “51”, “Different white BB + weak cherry” with winning number “51”, and “Different white BB + strong cherry” with winning number “52” And, the winning number “53” “different color white BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “54” “different color white BB + medium chance role”, the winning number “55” “different color white BB + strong chance role”, “No. red BB” with winning number “56”, “No. red BB + watermelon” with winning number “57”, “No. red BB + weak cherry” with winning number “58”, “No. "Red BB + strong cherry" and the winning number "60" BB + weak chance combination, winning number “61” “different color red BB + medium chance role”, winning number “62” “different color black BB + watermelon”, and winning number “63” “different color black BB + strong cherry” The winning number “64” “different color black BB + weak chance role”, the winning number “65” “different color black BB + medium chance role”, and the winning number “66” “different color black BB + strong chance role” are won. It is not determined as a role.

  The non-RT gaming state winning combination determination table, the first RT gaming state winning combination determining table, the second RT gaming state winning combination determining table, the first RB gaming state winning combination determining table, and the second RB gaming state. The winning combination determination table for use and the winning combination determination table for the third RB gaming state are collectively referred to as “winning combination determination table”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, when the current gaming state is the “non-RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line, the “first RT gaming state” is changed from the “non-RT gaming state”. " In addition, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state” and “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the “first RB” from the “non-RT gaming state” is displayed. “Game state” is entered. In addition, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state”, when “a combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to White Seven BB” is displayed on the active line , “Non-RT gaming state” is shifted to “second RB gaming state”. In addition, when the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, “non-RT gaming state” to “third RB” “Game state” is entered.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state”, when the “combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the “first RT gaming state” to “ Transition to “second RT gaming state”. Further, when “bonus” is won by an internal lottery process to be described later, the “first RT gaming state” is shifted to the “non-RT gaming state”.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state”, “the combination of symbols relating to the blank” or “the combination of symbols relating to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line In addition, the “second RT gaming state” is shifted to the “first RT gaming state”. In addition, when “bonus” is won by an internal lottery process to be described later, the “second RT gaming state” is shifted to the “non-RT gaming state”.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “first RB gaming state”, the transition from the “first RB gaming state” to the “non-RT gaming state” is made when the bonus is ended.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “second RB gaming state”, the transition from the “second RB gaming state” to the “non-RT gaming state” is made when the bonus is ended.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the “third RB gaming state”, the transition from the “third RB gaming state” to the “non-RT gaming state” is made when the bonus ends.

  The “first RT gaming state” and the “second RT gaming state” are collectively referred to as “RT gaming state”, and the “first RB gaming state”, “second RB gaming state”, and “third RB gaming state” are collectively referred to. This is referred to as “RB gaming state”.

(State transition diagram managed by the main control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the main control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the main control board 300 are provided separately from the gaming states such as “RT gaming state” and “RB gaming state”. Specifically, in this embodiment, “normal state”, “first bonus preparation state”, “first BB state”, “second BB state”, “first special BB state”, “second special BB state” ”,“ ART transition determination state ”,“ first ART game number determination preparation state ”,“ first ART game number determination state ”,“ ART preparation state ”,“ ART state ”,“ second bonus preparation state ”,“ ART in progress ” "First BB state", "Second BB state during ART", "Second ART game number determination preparation state", "Second ART game number determination state", "Third ART game number determination preparation state", "Third ART game number determination state" A total of “22” states are defined: “first ART added state”, “second ART added state”, “third ART added state”, and “ART game number notification state”. Therefore, in the following, each state managed by the main control board 300 and each transition will be described.

(Normal state)
The “normal state” is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the “normal state”, when “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and a condition for notifying the player that “bonus” has been won is satisfied. Then, control for shifting from the “normal state” to the “first bonus preparation state” is performed. Also, in the “normal state”, “different color black BB” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, and before the transition to the “first bonus preparation state”, the “combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” "Is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the" normal state "to the" first BB state ". In the “normal state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “first bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the control to shift from the “normal state” to the “second BB state” is performed.

  Further, in the “normal state”, “same color black BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and it is determined to shift to the “first special BB state” by lottery, Before the transition to the “first bonus preparation state”, when the “combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the transition is made from the “normal state” to the “first special BB state”. Control is performed. Further, in the “normal state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and it is determined to shift to the “second special BB state” by lottery, Before the transition to the “first bonus preparation state”, when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the transition is made from the “normal state” to the “second special BB state”. Control is performed.

  In the “normal state”, when a specific winning combination such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, “chance combination” or the like is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “Preparation for determining the number of first ART games” In the case where it is determined whether or not to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” by the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “state”, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” from the “normal state” To shift to "". In the “normal state”, when a specific winning combination such as “watermelon”, “cherry”, “chance combination” or the like is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “Preparation for determining the number of third ART games” In the case where it is determined whether or not to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” by the lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the “state”, the “third ART game number determination preparation state” from the “normal state” To shift to "".

(First bonus ready state)
The “first bonus preparation state” is a state in which the player is notified that “bonus” has been determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Here, in the “first bonus preparation state”, when “the combination of symbols relating to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts from the “first bonus preparation state” to the “first BB state”. Control is performed. In addition, in the “first bonus preparation state”, when “a combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to the white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the “first bonus preparation state” ”To“ second BB state ”is performed.

  Further, in the “first bonus preparation state”, it is determined that the transition to the “first special BB state” is made by lottery, and “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is on the active line. When displayed, control for shifting from the “first bonus preparation state” to the “first special BB state” is performed. Further, in the “first bonus preparation state”, it is determined that the transition to the “second special BB state” is made by lottery, and “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is on the active line. When displayed, control for shifting from the “first bonus preparation state” to the “second special BB state” is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first bonus preparation state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button for displaying “combination of symbols related to”, “combination of symbols related to 29th bell”, “combination of symbols related to 30th bell” on the active line Thirteen operation orders are notified.

(First BB state)
The “first BB state” is an advantageous state for the player compared to the “normal state”. Here, in the “first BB state”, when it is determined to execute the pseudo game at the timing when the termination condition of “different color black seven BB” is satisfied, the “ART transition determination state from the“ first BB state ”is determined. To shift to "".

  In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state”, the “ART transition determination state” is determined when “RB operating bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. ", The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for executing the pseudo game is notified.

(2nd BB state)
The “second BB state” is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the “normal state”. Here, in the “second BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the end condition of “Red Seven BB” or “White Seven BB” is satisfied In addition, control for shifting from the “second BB state” to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. In the “second BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing of “red seven BB” or “white seven BB”, the “second BB state” Is then transferred to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Further, in the “second BB state”, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or the “third ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the termination condition of “red seven BB” or “white seven BB” is satisfied. If it is not determined to shift to any of the above, control to shift from the “second BB state” to the “normal state” is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state”, the “second BB state” is determined when “RB operating bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. Alternatively, at the end of the “second BB state”, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for executing the pseudo game is notified. By this pseudo game, control for notifying the player of the transition to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed.

(First special BB state)
The “first special BB state” is an advantageous state for the player compared to the “first BB state” and the “second BB state”. Here, in the “first special BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the termination condition of “same color black seven BB” is satisfied, Control for shifting from the “1 special BB state” to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Further, in the “first special BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” at a timing when the end condition of “same color black seven BB” is satisfied, Control to shift from the “special BB state” to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed.

(Second special BB state)
Similar to the “first special BB state”, the “second special BB state” is an advantageous state for the player compared to the “first BB state” and the “second BB state”. Here, in the “second special BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the termination condition of “same color black seven BB” is satisfied, Control to shift from “2 special BB state” to “first ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Further, in the “second special BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the termination condition of “same color black seven BB” is satisfied, Control for shifting from the “special BB state” to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Also, in the “second special BB state”, when it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the termination condition of “same color black seven BB” is satisfied, Control to shift from the “special BB state” to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed.

  In addition, although specifically described later, when the “second special BB state” is shifted from the “normal state” or the “first bonus preparation state” to the “second special BB state”, “ When the control to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed and the state shifts to the “second special BB state” from another state, After completion of the “state”, control for shifting to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” or the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed.

(ART transition judgment state)
The “ART transition determination state” is a state for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART state”. Specifically, the “ART transition determination state” is configured by a pseudo game of “1” game, and according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player, This is a state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the “ART state”. Here, as will be described in detail later, in the “ART transition determination state”, the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that shifts to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” , The operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right that shift to the “normal state” An operation order of the stop button 13 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the “ART transition determination state” refers to the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 when the player transitions to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, or “ The operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed in anticipation of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that shift to the “third ART game number determination ready state”. It has become a game.

(First ART game number determination ready state)
The “first ART game number determination preparation state” is a state in which the transition is made before the transition to the “first ART game number determination state”. Here, in the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, “different color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “first ART game number determination preparation state” to the “first BB state during ART”. In the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the transition to the “second bonus preparation state”, When “a combination of symbols relating to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols relating to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, “from the first ART game number determination preparation state” to “the second BB state during ART” Control to shift to is performed.

  Further, in the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and it is determined to shift to the “second special BB state” by lottery. In this case, when “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line before the transition to the “second bonus preparation state”, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is started. Control to shift to the “second special BB state” is performed.

  In addition, in the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, when the execution condition of the pseudo game is satisfied, control is performed to shift from the “first ART game number determination preparation state” to the “first ART game number determination state”. . In the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and the conditions for notifying the player that “bonus” has been won are satisfied. In the case where the game has been performed, the control for shifting from the “first ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second bonus preparation state” is performed.

  In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state” and the “first RT game state” or the “second RT game state”, the internal lottery process described later is performed. When “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, “the combination of symbols relating to the 28th bell”, “the combination of symbols relating to the 29th bell”, and “the combination of symbols relating to the 30th bell” are valid The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 to be displayed on the line is notified. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state” and the “first RT game state”, an internal lottery process, which will be described later, performs “ When “Replay” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying “the combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” on the active line is notified. Is done. Further, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state” and the “second RT game state”, the internal lottery process to be described later will be used as “winning second RT” When “Replay” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols related to general replay” on the active line is notified.

(First ART game number determination state)
The “first ART game number determination state” is a state for determining the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Specifically, the “first ART game number determination state” is configured by a pseudo game, and the “ART state” is determined according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. In this state, the number of games that can be played is added. When the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is detected in the operation order in which the pseudo game is finished, the state is changed from the “first ART game number determination state” to the “ART game number notification state”. Control to shift is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “first ART game number determination state” is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the pseudo game based on the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Is called. Then, based on the result of the lottery, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game continues, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right in which the pseudo game ends. Control for notifying the operation order of the stop button 13 is performed.

(ART ready state)
The “ART ready state” is a state that is shifted to before the “ART state”. Here, in the “ART ready state”, when the “combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, the control to shift from the “ART ready state” to the “ART state” is performed. Is called. In addition, “different color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before “second bonus preparation state” is entered, “a combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is on the active line. When displayed, the control to shift from the “ART ready state” to the “1st BB state during ART” is performed. In the “ART ready state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus ready state” is entered, the “red seven BB” When the “combination of symbols related to” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the control to shift from the “ART ready state” to the “second BB state during ART” is performed.

  In the “ART ready state”, “same color black BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus ready state” is entered, the “same color black seven BB” When “combination” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “ART ready state” to the “second special BB state”. In the “ART ready state”, when “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, and a condition for notifying the player that “bonus” has been won is satisfied. Then, control for shifting from the “ART ready state” to the “second bonus ready state” is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART ready state” and is the “first RT gaming state” or the “second RT gaming state”, the winning combination is performed by an internal lottery process described later. When “push order bell” is determined, “combination of symbols relating to 28th bell”, “combination of symbols relating to 29th bell”, and “combination of symbols relating to 30th bell” are displayed on the active line The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified. Further, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART ready state” and the “first RT gaming state”, “replay during the first RT” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. In this case, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” on the active line is notified.

(ART state)
“ART state” indicates that when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “the combination of symbols related to the 28th bell”, “the combination of symbols related to the 29th bell”, This is a state in which the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying “a combination of symbols relating to the 30th bell” on the active line is notified. The “ART state” is a left stop button for displaying “general symbol combination” on the active line when “replay during 2nd RT” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. 11, the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is informed.

  Here, in the “ART state”, when the end condition of the “ART state” such as the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the “ART state” is satisfied. Control to shift from “normal state” to “normal state” is performed. In addition, when “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later and the conditions for notifying the player that “bonus” has been won are satisfied, Control for shifting to the “second bonus preparation state” is performed.

  In addition, in the “ART state”, when “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line before the transition to the “second bonus preparation state”, the “ART state” to the “ART state” are displayed. Control to shift to the “middle first BB state” is performed. In the “ART state”, “Red BB” or “White BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “ART state” to the “second BB state during ART”. In addition, in the “ART state”, when the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” is won, control for shifting from the “ART state” to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Done.

  Further, in the “ART state”, when the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more, control for shifting from the “ART state” to the “first ART added state” is performed. Is called. In the “ART state”, the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, and the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. In the case described above, control for shifting from the “ART state” to the “second ART added state” is performed. In the “ART state”, the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 are “0”, and the main RAM 303 When the value of the third ART added state stock counter provided in is equal to or greater than “1”, control for shifting from the “ART state” to the “third ART added state” is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, Of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the "combination of symbols", "combination of symbols related to the 29th bell", and "combination of symbols related to the 30th bell" on the active line. The order is announced. In addition, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” and the “second RT gaming state”, the “second RT replay” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later. In this case, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols related to general replay” on the active line is notified.

(Second bonus ready state)
The “second bonus preparation state” is a state in which, in a state other than the “normal state”, the player is notified that “bonus” has been determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Here, in the “second bonus preparation state”, when “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the “second bonus preparation state” is changed to the “first BB state during ART”. Control to shift is performed. In the “second bonus preparation state”, when “a combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to the white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the “second bonus preparation state” ”To“ the second BB state during ART ”is performed. In addition, in the “second bonus preparation state”, when “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts from the “second bonus preparation state” to the “second special BB state”. Control is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second bonus preparation state”, when “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, Left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button for displaying “combination of symbols related to”, “combination of symbols related to 29th bell”, “combination of symbols related to 30th bell” on the active line Thirteen operation orders are notified.

(1st BB state during ART)
The “1st BB state during ART” is transferred when “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line in a state other than the “normal state” and the “first bonus preparation state”. State. Further, in the “first BB state during ART”, a lottery for determining whether to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” and a lottery for determining whether to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” are performed. Is called. Here, in the “first BB state during ART”, when it is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the completion condition of “different color black seven BB” is satisfied, “ART Control is performed to shift from the “middle first BB state” to the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. Also, in the “1st BB state during ART”, when it is determined to shift to the “3rd ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the end condition of “different color black seven BB” is satisfied, Control to shift from the “first BB state” to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. In addition, in the “first BB state during ART”, the “second ART game number determination preparation state” or the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is reached at the timing when the termination condition of “different color black seven BB” is satisfied. When it is not determined to shift, control is performed to shift from the “first BB state during ART” to the “ART ready state”.

(2nd BB state during ART)
For “2nd BB state during ART”, “Combination of symbols related to Red Seven BB” or “Combination of symbols related to White Seven BB” is effective in states other than “Normal state” and “First bonus preparation state” It is a state that is transferred when displayed on the line. Also, in the “2nd BB state during ART”, a lottery for determining whether to shift to the “second ART game number determination ready state” or a lottery for determining whether to shift to the “third ART game number determination ready state” is performed. Is called. Here, in the “second BB state during ART”, it is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” at the timing when the end condition of “red seven BB” or “white seven BB” is satisfied. If there is, control for shifting from the “second BB state during ART” to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Further, in the “second BB state during ART”, it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination ready state” at the timing when the end condition of “red seven BB” or “white seven BB” is satisfied. In this case, a control for shifting from the “second BB state during ART” to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Also, in the “second BB state during ART”, the “second ART game number determination preparation state” or “third ART game number determination preparation state” is satisfied at the timing when the termination condition of “red seven BB” or “white seven BB” is satisfied. If it is not determined to shift to any of the “states”, control is performed to shift from the “second BB state during ART” to the “ART ready state”.

(Second ART game number determination ready state)
The “second ART game number determination preparation state” is a state in which the state is shifted to the “second ART game number determination state”. Here, in the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, “different color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “second ART game number determination preparation state” to the “first BB state during ART”. In the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the transition to the “second bonus preparation state”, When “a combination of symbols relating to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols relating to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the “second ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second BB state during ART” Control to shift to is performed. Also, in the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, “same color black BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, “same color black seven BB” When the “combination of symbols related to” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “second ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second special BB state”.

  In addition, in the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, when the execution condition of the pseudo game is satisfied, control is performed to shift from the “second ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second ART game number determination state”. . In the “2nd ART game number determination preparation state”, “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, and the conditions for notifying the player that “bonus” has been won are satisfied. If it is, control for shifting from the “second ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second bonus preparation state” is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination preparation state” and is the “first RT game state” or the “second RT game state”, an internal lottery process described later is performed. When “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, “the combination of symbols relating to the 28th bell”, “the combination of symbols relating to the 29th bell”, and “the combination of symbols relating to the 30th bell” are valid The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 to be displayed on the line is notified. In addition, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination preparation state” and the “first RT game state”, an internal lottery process, which will be described later, performs “ When “Replay” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying “the combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” on the active line is notified. Is done. Further, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination preparation state” and the “second RT game state”, an internal lottery process, which will be described later, performs “ When “Replay” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols related to general replay” on the active line is notified.

(Second ART game number determination state)
The “second ART game number determination state” is a state for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Specifically, the “second ART game number determination state” is configured by a pseudo game, and according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player, In this state, the number of games that can be played is added. When the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is detected in the operation order in which the pseudo game is finished, the state is changed from the “second ART game number determination state” to the “ART game number notification state”. Control to shift is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “second ART game number determination state” is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the pseudo game based on the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Is called. Then, based on the result of the lottery, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game continues, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right in which the pseudo game ends. Control for notifying the operation order of the stop button 13 is performed.

(3rd ART game number determination preparation state)
The “third ART game number determination preparation state” is a state in which the state is shifted to the “third ART game number determination state”. Here, in the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, “different color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the transition to the “second bonus preparation state”, “different color black seven When the “combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “third ART game number determination preparation state” to the “first BB state during ART”. In the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the transition to the “second bonus preparation state”, When “a combination of symbols relating to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols relating to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the “second art state determination second BB state” from the “third ART game number determination ready state” Control to shift to is performed. In the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, “same color black seven BB” is determined. When the “combination of symbols related to” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “third ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second special BB state”.

  Further, in the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, when the execution condition of the pseudo game is satisfied, control is performed to shift from the “third ART game number determination preparation state” to the “third ART game number determination state”. . In the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process, which will be described later, and the conditions for notifying the player that “bonus” has been won are satisfied. In the case where the game has been performed, the control for shifting from the “third ART game number determination preparation state” to the “second bonus preparation state” is performed.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination preparation state” and is the “first RT gaming state” or the “second RT gaming state”, an internal lottery process described later is performed. When “push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, “the combination of symbols relating to the 28th bell”, “the combination of symbols relating to the 29th bell”, and “the combination of symbols relating to the 30th bell” are valid The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying on the line is notified. Further, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination preparation state” and the “first RT game state”, an internal lottery process, which will be described later, performs “ When “Replay” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying “the combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” on the active line is notified. Is done. Further, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination preparation state” and the “second RT game state”, an internal lottery process, which will be described later, performs “ When “Replay” is determined, the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 for displaying the “combination of symbols related to general replay” on the active line is notified.

(3rd ART game number determination state)
The “third ART game number determination state” is a state for determining or adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Specifically, the “third ART game number determination state” is configured by a pseudo game, and according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player, In this state, the number of games that can be played is added. When the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is detected in the operation order in which the pseudo game is finished, the state is changed from the “third ART game number determination state” to the “ART game number notification state”. Control to shift is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the “third ART game number determination state” is a lottery to determine whether or not to continue the pseudo game based on the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Is called. Then, based on the result of the lottery, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game continues, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right in which the pseudo game ends. Control for notifying the operation order of the stop button 13 is performed. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the “third ART game number determination state”, the spinning effect is executed as compared with the “first ART game number determination state” and the “second ART game number determination state”. The probability is high. And when a spinning effect is performed, a privilege will be provided with respect to a player. Therefore, the “third ART game number determination state” is an advantageous state for the player compared to the “first ART game number determination state” and the “second ART game number determination state”.

(First ART on top)
The “first ART added state” is a state in which the number of games that can be played is added in the “ART state”. Here, in the “first ART added state”, “unusual black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “first ART added state” to the “first BB state during ART”. Further, in the “first ART added state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus ready state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols related to BB” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “first ART added state” to the “second BB state during ART”. Is called.

  Further, in the “first ART added state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, “symbols related to the same color black seven BB” When “combination of” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “first ART added state” to the “second special BB state”. In addition, in the “first ART added state”, when the end condition of the “first ART added state” is satisfied, the control to shift from the “first ART added state” to the “ART state” is performed.

  The “first ART added state” continues for “5” games, and when “replay during RT2” is determined between the “5” games by an internal lottery process described later, The lottery of whether or not to add the number of games that can be played is performed. In addition, in the “first ART added state”, when “cherry”, “watermelon”, “chance combination”, or “bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, a game can be played in the “ART state”. Processing to add the number of games is performed. That is, in the “first ART added state”, when “replay during RT2” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added. As a result, if it is decided to increase the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”, or “cherry”, “watermelon”, “chance role”, or “bonus” is decided by the internal lottery process described later In such a case, the number of games equal to or greater than “100” is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. On the other hand, if it is not determined to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” between the “5” games in the “first ART added state”, the “10” game is determined as the minimum additional game number. The Rukoto.

(Second ART on top)
The “second ART added state” is a state in which the number of games that can be played is added in the “ART state”. Here, in the “second ART added state”, “different color black BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “second ART added state” to the “first BB state during ART”. Further, in the “second ART added state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, “red seven When the “combination of symbols related to BB” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “second ART added state” to the “second BB state during ART”. Is called.

  In the “2nd ART added state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When "combination of" is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the "second ART added state" to the "second special BB state". Further, in the “second ART added state”, when the end condition of the “second ART added state” is satisfied, the control to shift from the “second ART added state” to the “ART state” is performed.

  Note that the “second ART added state” continues for “4” games, and “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “Chance role” are performed between the “4” games by an internal lottery process described later. ”Or“ bonus ”is determined, a process of adding the number of games that can be played in the“ ART state ”is performed, and“ 4 ”game between games can be played again in the“ second ART added state ”. ing. That is, in the “ART state”, the number of games that can be played continues to be added unless the “replay” is won for “4” times in succession.

(3rd ART added state)
The “third ART added state” is a state in which the number of games that can be played is added in the “ART state”. Specifically, the “third ART added state” is composed of a first half part composed of a “3” game and a second half part composed of a “2” game after the end of the first half part. Here, in the “ART state”, the first half part determines a reference value serving as a reference value to be added to the number of games that can be played, and the second half part performs a process of determining a multiplication value to be multiplied by the reference value. . A value obtained by multiplying the reference value determined by the first half part and the multiplication value determined by the second half part is the number of games to be added to the value of the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”.

  Here, in the “third ART added state”, “unusual black BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “third ART added state” to the “first BB state during ART”. In the “3rd ART added state”, “Red BB” or “White BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus ready state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols related to BB” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “third ART added state” to the “second BB state during ART”. Is called.

  In the “3rd ART added state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When “combination of” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “third ART added state” to the “second special BB state”. Further, in the “third ART added state”, when the end condition of the “third ART added state” is satisfied, the control to shift from the “third ART added state” to the “ART state” is performed.

  In the “third ART added state”, the number of additional games as a reference in the first half “3” game is determined, and the magnification is determined in the second half “2” game. Here, the reference number of games to be added and the magnification are determined based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later.

(Art game number notification state)
The “ART game number notification state” can be played in the “ART state” acquired by the player in the “first ART game number determination state”, the “second ART game number determination state”, or the “third ART game number determination state” The number of games, whether or not the “first ART added state”, “second ART added state”, and “third ART added state” have been acquired. Here, in the “ART game number notification state”, “unusual black BB” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift from the “ART game number notification state” to the “first BB state during ART”. In the “ART game number notification state”, “red BB” or “white BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, Control that shifts from "ART game number notification state" to "2nd BB state during ART" when "Combination of symbols related to Seven BB" or "Combination of symbols related to White Seven BB" is displayed on the active line Is done.

  In the “ART game number notification state”, “same color black BB” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and before the “second bonus preparation state” is entered, When the “combination of symbols” is displayed on the active line, a control for shifting from the “ART game number notification state” to the “second special BB state” is performed. In addition, when the “1” game is played in the “ART game number notification state”, a control to shift from the “ART game number notification state” to the “ART state” is performed.

  In this embodiment, the “first bonus preparation state” and the “second bonus preparation state” are collectively referred to as “bonus preparation state”, “first BB state”, “second BB state”, and “ The “first special BB state” and the “second special BB state” are collectively referred to as “bonus state”. Also, the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, and the “third ART game number determination preparation state” are collectively referred to as “ART game number determination preparation state”. The “1 ART game number determination state”, the “second ART game number determination state”, and the “third ART game number determination state” are collectively referred to as an “ART game number determination state”. In addition, the “first BB state during ART” and the “second BB state during ART” are collectively referred to as “bonus state during ART”, “first ART added state”, “second ART added state”, and “third ART. The “added state” is collectively referred to as “ART added state”.

(Reel lock production lottery table)
Next, the reel lock effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The reel lock effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the reel lock effect. In the reel lock effect lottery table, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, an effect type, and a lottery value corresponding to the effect type for each winning combination are defined. For example, when “strong cherry” with a winning number “16” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, “reel lock effect SFZ1” is determined with a probability of “9/256” and “1 / It is determined to execute the “reel lock effect SFZ2” with a probability of “256” and not to execute the reel lock effect with a probability of “246/256”.

  Here, “reel lock effect SFZ1”, “reel lock effect SFZ2”, “reel lock effect SFZ3”, and “reel lock effect LFZ” will be described below.

(Reel lock production SFZ1)
In the reel lock effect SFZ1, the winning number “19” is determined when the “strong cherry” with the winning number “16” is determined or the “weak chance” with the winning number “17” is determined by the internal lottery process described later. ”Is determined,“ same color black BB ”of the winning number“ 35 ”is determined,“ same color white BB + watermelon ”of the winning number“ 37 ”is determined, the winning number When “38” “same color white BB + weak cherry” is determined, “same color white BB + strong cherry” with winning number “39” is determined, “same color white BB + weak chance role” with winning number “40” If the winning number “42” “same color white BB + strong chance role” is determined, if the winning number “44” “same color red BB + watermelon” is determined, the winning number “45” "Same color red BB + weak cheri ”Is determined,“ same color red BB + strong cherry ”of the winning number“ 46 ”is determined, or“ same color red BB + weak chance role ”of the winning number“ 47 ”is determined, the winning number“ 50 ”is determined. ”Is determined,“ unsaturated white BB + strong cherries ”of the winning number“ 52 ”is determined. If the winning number “53” is “different color white BB + weak chance combination”, the winning number “55” is determined to be “different color white BB + strong chance combination”, the winning number “57” is “different color”. If “Red BB + Watermelon” is determined, “Distinct red BB + Weak cherry” with winning number “58” is determined, “Distinct red BB + Strong cherry” with winning number “59” is determined, Winning number “60” When “B + weak chance combination” is determined, “unusual black BB + watermelon” with winning number “62” is determined, “unusual black BB + strong cherry” with winning number “63” is determined, winning number This is a reel-lock effect that can be determined when “64” “different color black BB + weak chance combination” is determined, and “different color black BB + strong chance combination” with winning number “66” is determined. Here, in this embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute the “reel lock effect SFZ1”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are reversed in the “1” pattern. Execute the process of rotating by the minute.

  Here, the “reverse direction” means that a symbol visible from the front when the gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front rotates from the lower direction to the upper direction. On the other hand, the “forward direction” means that a symbol that is visible from the front of the gaming machine 1 and visible through the display window 23 rotates from the upper direction to the lower direction.

(Reel lock production SFZ2)
In the reel lock effect SFZ2, the winning number “35” is determined when the “strong cherry” of the winning number “16” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, or the “weak chance” of the winning number “17” is determined. "Same color black BB" is determined, "same color white BB + watermelon" of winning number "37" is determined, "same color white BB + weak cherry" of winning number "38" is determined, When the winning number “39” “same color white BB + strong cherry” is determined, when the winning number “40” “same color white BB + weak chance role” is determined, the winning number “42” “same color white BB + strong” If “chance combination” is determined, “same color red BB + watermelon” of winning number “44” is determined, “same color red BB + weak cherry” of winning number “45” is determined, winning number “46” "Same color red BB" When “strong cherry” is determined, when “same color red BB + weak chance role” of winning number “47” is determined, “unsaturated white BB + watermelon” of winning number “50” is determined, winning number “ 51 ”“ different color white BB + weak cherry ”is determined, or“ different color white BB + strong cherry ”of winning number“ 52 ”is determined,“ different color white BB + weak chance role ”of winning number“ 53 ”is determined. If the winning number “55” is determined to be “different color white BB + strong chance role”, the winning number “57” is determined to be “different color red BB + watermelon”, the winning number “58” is “ When “different color red BB + weak cherry” is decided, when “different color red BB + strong cherry” of winning number “59” is decided, “different color red BB + weak chance role” of winning number “60” is decided , Winning number "62 When “unusual black BB + watermelon” is decided, “unusual black BB + strong cherry” of winning number “63” is decided, “unusual black BB + weak chance role” of winning number “64” is decided In this case, the reel lock effect can be determined when the winning number “66” “unusual black BB + strong chance combination” is determined. Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute the “reel lock effect SFZ2”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are set to “1” in the reverse direction. After the predetermined amount of time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotated in the reverse direction by "1" symbols.

(Reel lock production SFZ3)
The reel lock effect SFZ3 is a reel lock effect that can be determined when “same color black BB” of the winning number “35” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 300 decides to execute the “reel lock effect SFZ3”, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are set to “1” in the reverse direction. After the predetermined amount of time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 and the right reel 20 are rotated in the opposite direction by "1" symbols, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19 Then, a process of rotating the right reel 20 in the reverse direction by “1” symbols is executed.

(Reel lock production LFZ)
The reel lock effect LFZ is a reel lock effect that can be determined when “same color black BB” of the winning number “35” is determined by an internal lottery process described later. Here, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 300 determines to execute the “reel lock effect LFZ”, the process of rotating the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time. Execute.

(Pseudo game lottery table)
Next, the pseudo game lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pseudo game lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the pseudo game to be executed by lottery. In the pseudo game lottery table, an effect type and a lottery value corresponding to the effect type are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the pseudo game lottery table is an ART transition determination for determining the effect type of the pseudo game executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART transition determination state”. A state pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 16A) and a state managed by the main control board 300 for determining the effect type of the pseudo game to be executed when the state is the “ART game number determination state”. This is executed when the ART game number determination state pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 16B) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are the “second BB state” or “the second BB state during ART”. BB state pseudo game lottery table (refer to FIG. 16C) for determining the effect type of the pseudo game. Therefore, hereinafter, the ART transition determination state pseudo game lottery table, the ART game number determination state pseudo game lottery table, and the BB state pseudo game lottery table will be described.

(Pseudo game lottery table for ART transition determination state)
The ART transition determination state pseudo game lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and determines the effect type of the pseudo game to be executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART transition determination state”. It is provided for. Here, when the lottery is performed using the ART transition determination state pseudo game lottery table, the production types are “single BAR uniform A”, “single BAR uniform B”, “single BAR uniform C”, “double”. BAR Align A ”,“ Double BAR Align B ”, and“ Double BAR Align C ”may be determined.

  Here, in the pseudo game in which “single BAR uniform A” is determined as the production type, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, the “symbol related to BAR” is “right-down line” or “right-up” While it is allowed to be displayed in line with the “line”, when the middle stop button 12 or the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “symbol relating to BAR” is not aligned. In addition, in the pseudo game in which “Single BAR Match B” is determined as the production type, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, “the symbol related to BAR” is “Right Down Line” or “Right Up Line” "When the left stop button 11 or the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time," the symbol related to BAR "is not aligned. In addition, in the pseudo game in which “single BAR uniform C” is determined as the production type, when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, the “symbol related to BAR” is “right-down line” or “right-up line” ”Are allowed to be displayed together. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 or the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time,“ the symbols related to the BAR ”are not aligned.

  On the other hand, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time in the pseudo game in which “double BAR uniform A” is determined as the production type, “the symbol related to BAR” is “downward line” and “middle line” Or when the middle stop button 12 or the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, it is allowed to be displayed in line with the “upward right line” and the “middle line”. "Will not be complete. In addition, in the pseudo game in which “double BAR uniform B” is determined as the production type, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, “the symbol related to BAR” is “downward line” and “middle line”. Alternatively, when the left stop button 11 or the right stop button 13 is first operated, it is allowed to be displayed along with the “upward right line” and the “middle line”. "Will not be complete. In addition, in the pseudo game in which “double BAR uniform C” is determined as the production type, when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, “the symbol related to BAR” is “downward-right line” and “middle line” Or when the left stop button 11 or the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, it is allowed to be displayed together with the “upward right line” and the “middle line”. "Will not be complete.

  It should be noted that any production type of “Single BAR uniform A”, “Single BAR uniform B”, “Single BAR uniform C”, “Double BAR uniform A”, “Double BAR uniform B”, or “Double BAR uniform C” is determined. Even in such a case, the game will be completed in “1” times of the pseudo game.

(Pseudo game lottery table for ART game number determination state)
The ART game number determination state pseudo game lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and indicates the type of effect of the pseudo game executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”. Provided to determine. Here, when the lottery is performed using the ART game number determination pseudo game lottery table, the production types are “pseudo game A”, “pseudo game B”, “pseudo game C”, “pseudo game D”, “Pseudo game E” may be determined.

  Here, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game A” is determined as the production type, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, the “symbol relating to BAR” is the “right falling line” or the “right rising line”. When the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, the symbol related to BAR is “Right-down line” and “Middle line” or “Right-up line”. When the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, the symbols related to BAR are not prepared and the pseudo game is ended.

  In addition, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game B” is determined as the production type, when the middle stop button 12 is first operated, the “symbol related to BAR” is the “lower right line” or the “up right line”. When the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, “the symbol related to BAR” is changed to “lower right line” and “middle line” or “upward line” and It is allowed to be displayed on the “middle line” and when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, the “symbols related to BAR” are not prepared, and the pseudo game is ended.

  Further, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game C” is determined as the effect type, when the right stop button 13 is operated first, “the symbol related to BAR” is “downward right line” or “upward right line”. When the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, “the symbol related to BAR” is “right-down line”, “middle line”, or “right-up line” and When the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, it is allowed to be displayed on the “middle line”, and the “symbol relating to BAR” is not arranged, and the pseudo game is ended.

  Further, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game D” is determined as the production type, when the left stop button 11 or the middle stop button 12 is first operated, “the symbol related to BAR” is set to “downward line”, Alternatively, it is allowed to be displayed in line with the “upward right line”, and when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, the “pattern related to BAR” is set to “downward right line” and “middle line”, It is allowed to be displayed in line with “upward right line” and “middle line”.

  In addition, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game E” is determined as the production type, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, “the symbol related to BAR” is “downward right line” or “upward right line”. When the left stop button 11 or the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, the “pattern related to the BAR” is changed to the “lower right line” and the “middle line”, or It is allowed to be displayed in line with “upward right line” and “middle line”.

(Pseudo game lottery table for BB state)
The pseudo game lottery table for the BB state is provided in the main ROM 302 and is executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state” or the “second BB state during ART”. It is provided to determine the production type. Here, when a lottery is performed using the BB state pseudo game lottery table, “pseudo game F”, “pseudo game G”, “pseudo game H”, and “pseudo game I” are determined as the production types. Can be done.

  Here, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game F” is determined as the production type, when the left stop button 11 is operated first, “the symbol related to BAR” is “right falling line” or “right rising line” When the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, the symbol related to BAR is “Right-down line” and “Middle line” or “Right-up line”. And “middle line” are allowed to be displayed together, and when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, “designs related to BAR” are not aligned.

  In addition, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game G” is determined as the production type, when the middle stop button 12 is first operated, the “symbol related to BAR” is the “lower right line” or the “up right line”. When the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, “the symbol related to BAR” is changed to “lower right line” and “middle line” or “upward line” and It is allowed to be displayed in alignment with the “middle line”, and when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, “designs related to BAR” are not aligned.

  In addition, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game H” is determined as the production type, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, “the symbol related to BAR” is “downward right line” or “upward right line”. When the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, “the symbol related to BAR” is “right-down line”, “middle line”, or “right-up line” and It is allowed to be displayed together on the “middle line”, and when the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, the “symbols related to BAR” are not arranged.

  Further, in the pseudo game in which “pseudo game I” is determined as the production type, a specific stop is performed regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated. It is allowed to stop in a manner. Here, in the present embodiment, the specific stop mode means that the “design related to BAR” stops at the “upper” and “middle” of the left reel 18, and the “design related to BAR” appears on the “lower” of the middle reel 19. "Stops and" designs related to BAR "stop at" upper "and" middle "of the right reel 20. Note that the specific stop mode does not have to be such a mode and can be set as appropriate.

(Cylinder production lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 17, a spinning effect lottery table will be described.

  The reeling effect lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the rotating effect to be executed. In addition, in the spinning effect lottery table, an effect type and a lottery value corresponding to the effect type are defined. Here, in this embodiment, the rotation effect drawing lottery table determines whether or not to execute the rotation effect when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “3rd ART game number determination state”, the first execution time of the ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (see FIG. 17A). The third ART game number determination state rotation effect lottery table (first time) (see FIG. 17B) for determining the effect type of the body effect and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “third ART game. In the “number determination state”, the number of third ART games for determining whether or not to execute the rotation effect in the pseudo game after the rotation effect is executed is determined. In the case where the state's spinning effect lottery table (second and subsequent times) (see FIG. 17C) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are the “third ART game number determination state”, “pseudo game D” Or, when “pseudo game E” is executed, it is constituted by a spinning effect lottery table for selecting a pseudo game DE for determining a spinning effect to be executed (see FIG. 17D). Therefore, in the following, the ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table, the third ART game number determination state rotation effect lottery table (first time), and the third ART game number determination state rotation effect lottery table (2 And subsequent) and the spinning effect lottery table for pseudo game DE selection will be described.

(Rotation effect lottery table for ART game number determination state)
The ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is “first ART game number determination state” or “second ART game number determination state”. In some cases, it is provided in order to determine by lottery whether or not to perform the spinning effect. Here, in the case of performing lottery using the ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table, it is determined that the first trunk effect is executed with a probability of “28/256”, and “14/256”. The execution of the second body effect is determined with the probability of.

(3rd ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (first time))
The third ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (first time) is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”, it is still It is provided to determine the spinning effect to be executed by lottery when the spinning effect is not executed. Here, when performing a lottery using the third ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (first time), it is determined to execute the first trunk effect with a probability of “152/256”. The execution of the second body effect is determined with a probability of “104/256”. That is, when the lottery is performed using the third ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (first time), it is determined to execute either the first or the second drum effect. It will be.

(3rd ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (second and later))
The third ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (second and subsequent times) is provided in the main ROM 302, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”. It is provided in order to determine by lottery whether or not to execute the rotation effect after the rotation effect is executed. Here, when the lottery is performed using the third ART game number determination state spinning effect lottery table (second and subsequent times), it is determined that the first trunk effect is executed with a probability of “77/256”. , It is determined to execute the second body effect with a probability of “51/256”.

(Rotation effect lottery table for pseudo game DE selection)
The spinning effect lottery table for selecting a pseudo game DE is provided in the main ROM 302 and is executed when it is determined to execute “pseudo game D” or “pseudo game E”. It is provided to determine the spinning effect. Here, when the lottery is performed using the pseudo-game DE selection-time spinning effect lottery table, it is determined to execute the second spinning effect with a probability of “256/256”. In other words, when the lottery is performed using the pseudo game DE selection timepiece production lottery table, it is determined to execute the second body production effect.

(Continuation rate lottery table)
Next, the continuation rate lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The continuation rate lottery table is stored in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the “design related to the BAR” is displayed together. It is provided to determine a continuation rate for determining whether or not to continue reporting the investigation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Specifically, the continuation rate lottery table defines a continuation rate and a lottery value corresponding to the continuation rate. Here, when a lottery is performed using the continuation rate lottery table, the continuation rate of “1%” is determined with the probability of “32768/65536” and the continuation of “50%” with the probability of “16384/65536”. Determine the rate, determine the continuation rate of “60%” with the probability of “8192/65536”, determine the continuation rate of “70%” with the probability of “4096/65536”, and the probability of “2048/65536” Thus, the continuation rate of “80%” is determined, and the continuation rate of “90%” is determined with the probability of “2048/65536”. The lottery value in the continuation rate lottery table can be set as appropriate.

(Distribution lottery table)
Next, the distribution lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The distribution lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 for displaying the “symbol relating to the BAR” aligned with the “lower right line” or the “up right line”. In this case, the operation order of the right stop button 13 is notified, or the “symbol relating to the BAR” is displayed along with the “lower right line” and the “middle line” or the “upward line” and the “middle line” It is provided to determine whether to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for the purpose. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution lottery table is a first ART game number determination state distribution lottery table (used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state”). FIG. 19A) and a second ART game number determination state allocation lottery table used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state” (FIG. 19B). And a third ART game number determination state distribution lottery table (see FIG. 19C) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”. ing. Therefore, the first ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, the second ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, and the third ART game number determination state distribution lottery table will be described below.

(First ART game number determination state distribution lottery table)
The first ART game number determination state distribution lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state”, “the symbol related to BAR” Is notified of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 to be displayed in alignment with the “lower right line” or the “upward right line”, or “the symbol related to the BAR”. Of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 for displaying the “right-down line” and “middle line” or “right-up line” and “middle line” Is provided to determine whether to perform the notification. Further, in the first ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, notification contents and lottery values corresponding to the notification contents are defined. Here, when the lottery is performed using the first ART game number determination state allocation lottery table, the symbol related to BAR is “Right-down line” or “Right-up line” with a probability of “57344/65536”. ”Is determined to be notified of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and the symbol“ BAR ”is displayed with a probability of“ 8192/65536 ”. The operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 to be displayed in alignment with the "downward right line" and "middle line" or "upward line" and "middle line" It is decided to perform notification. In the following, the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for displaying the “symbol relating to the BAR” aligned with the “lower right line” or “upward right line” will be described. The notification is referred to as “1” line alignment. In addition, in the following, the left stop button 11 for displaying the “symbol relating to the BAR” together with the “lower right line” and the “middle line” or the “upward line” and the “middle line”. Reporting the operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is referred to as “2” line alignment.

(Second ART game number determination state distribution lottery table)
The distribution lottery table for the second ART game number determination state is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state”, “1” lines are aligned. , “2” is provided to determine whether the line is aligned. Further, in the second ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, notification contents and lottery values corresponding to the notification contents are defined. Here, when the lottery is performed using the second ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, the “1” line alignment is determined with the probability of “57344/65536”, and the probability of “8192/65536” is “ 2 ”Line alignment is determined.

(3rd ART game number determination state distribution lottery table)
As described above, the third ART game number determination state distribution lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”, “1 It is provided to determine whether the line is aligned or “2”. In addition, in the third ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, notification contents and lottery values corresponding to the notification contents are defined. Here, when the lottery is performed using the third ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, the “2” line alignment is determined with a probability of “65536/65536”.

  The lottery values of the first ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, the second ART game number determination state distribution lottery table, and the third ART game number determination state distribution lottery table can be set as appropriate.

(ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table)
Next, the ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is provided for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Here, in this embodiment, the ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table transitions to the “ART game number determination preparation state” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “bonus state”. A winning combination other than “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by a bonus state ART game number determination ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20A) for determining whether or not and an internal lottery process described later. In this case, a bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20B) for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” and an internal lottery described later When “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by processing, a bonus winning A for determining whether or not to shift to “ART game number determination ready state” When the state managed by the T game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20C) and the main control board 300 is the “second special BB state”, the “ART game number determination preparation state” is set. The second special BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20D) for determining whether or not to transition, and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “first BB during ART”. When the state is “ART”, the ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table for the first BB state during ART for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” (see FIG. 20E). It is configured. Therefore, in the following, a bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table, a bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table, a bonus winner ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table, The second special BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table and the first BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table during ART will be described.

(Bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table)
The bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the "bonus state", the "ART game number determination preparation state" is set. It is provided to determine whether or not to migrate. Here, the bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table includes the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or “second ART game number determination preparation state”. The lottery value to be shifted to and the lottery value to be shifted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or the “second ART game number determination preparation state” with a probability of “512/65536” ”And a transition to the“ third ART game number determination preparation state ”with a probability of“ 256/65536 ”.

(Art game number determination lottery table for bonus non-winning)
The bonus game non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302. When a winning combination other than “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “ART” It is provided to determine whether or not to shift to the “game number determination ready state”. Here, the ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table for the bonus non-winning state includes the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, or the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. The lottery value to be shifted to “status” and the lottery value to be shifted to “third ART game number determination preparation status” are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or the “second ART game number determination preparation state” with a probability of “512/65536” ”And a transition to the“ third ART game number determination preparation state ”with a probability of“ 256/65536 ”.

(ART game number determination lottery table for bonus winning)
The ART game number determination preparation state shift lottery table for bonus winning is provided in the main ROM 302, and when “bonus” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, “ART game number determination preparation state” Is provided to determine whether or not to shift to "." Here, the lottery table for the transition to the ART game number determination preparation state for bonus winning is the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, or the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. ”And a lottery value to be shifted to the“ third ART game number determination preparation state ”. For example, when “same color black BB” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the “first ART game number determination ready state” or “second ART game number determination” is determined with a probability of “16384/65536”. Transition to the “preparation state” is determined, and transition to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is determined with a probability of “16384/65536”.

  Here, although not shown, the bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table, the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table, and the bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state transition In the lottery table, lottery values corresponding to modes managed by the main control board 300 are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table includes a lottery value when the mode managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal mode”, and the main control board. The lottery value when the mode managed by 300 is the “high probability mode”, the lottery value when the mode managed by the main control board 300 is the “super high probability mode”, and the main control board 300 The lottery value when the mode to be played is “ceiling mode” is defined. In the present embodiment, when the probability of shifting to the “ART game number determination ready state” is arranged in ascending order, “normal mode”, “high probability mode”, “super high probability mode”, and “ceiling mode” are obtained. . Therefore, among the modes managed by the main control board 300, the most disadvantageous mode for the player is the “normal mode”, and the most advantageous mode for the player is the “ceiling mode”.

(Second special BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table)
The second special BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the "second special BB state", the "ART game" It is provided to determine whether or not to shift to the “number determination ready state”. Here, the second special BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table is a lottery value that will be transferred to the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, a lottery value to be shifted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is defined for each lottery number described later. For example, in a case where “RB in operation bell” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, and the number of lotteries is “2” or less, the probability of “16384/65536” is “2nd ART game” Transition to the “number determination ready state” is determined, and transition to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is determined with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table for the first BB state during ART)
The ART game first BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is "the first BB state during ART", the "ART game" It is provided to determine whether or not to shift to the “number determination ready state”. Here, the ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table for the first BB state during ART is the lottery value that will be shifted to the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. And a lottery value to be shifted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” is defined.

(Pseudo game DE extra lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 21, the pseudo lotion DE extra lottery table will be described.

  The extra lottery table for the pseudo game DE is provided in the main ROM 302, and when it is determined to execute the “pseudo game D” or “pseudo game E”, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to. Here, the extra lottery table for the pseudo game DE is added to the number of games that can be added in the “ART state” and the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when “1” lines are aligned. A lottery value corresponding to the number of games to be played is defined. In addition, the pseudo lotion DE extra lottery table is added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when “2” lines are aligned. A lottery value corresponding to the number of games is defined. For example, in the case of “1” lines, the probability that “50” games are added to the number of games that can be played in “ART state” is “57344/65536”.

(Additional lottery table for ART game number determination state)
Next, the ART game number determination state extra lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The extra lottery table for the ART game number determination state is provided in the main ROM 302. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the game that can be played in the “ART state” It is provided to determine whether to add the number of games to the number, or to acquire the “first ART added state”, “second ART added state”, and “third ART added state”. Here, in this embodiment, the extra lottery table for the ART game number determination state is a privilege to be given to the player when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state”. In the first ART game number determination state addition lottery table (see FIG. 22A) and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state”. The second ART game number determination state addition lottery table (see FIG. 22 (B)) for determining the privilege to be given to the game and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “third ART game number determination state”. In some cases, an additional lottery table for determining the number of third ART games for determining a privilege to be given to the player (see FIG. Is composed of 2 (C) see). Therefore, in the following, the first ART game number determination state addition lottery table, the second ART game number determination state addition lottery table, and the third ART game number determination state addition lottery table will be described.

  In this embodiment, the ART game number determination state extra lottery table specifies that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added as a privilege, but is not limited to this. Other benefits may be prescribed.

(First ART game number determination state extra lottery table)
The first ART game number determination state addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is given to the player when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state”. It is provided to determine benefits. Here, in the first ART game number determination state addition lottery table, when “1” lines are aligned, a privilege to be given to the player and a lottery value corresponding to the privilege are defined. In addition, in the first lottery table for determining the number of ART games, when a “2” line is aligned, a privilege to be given to the player and a lottery value corresponding to the privilege are defined.

(Additional lottery table for second ART game number determination state)
The second ART game number determination state addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is given to the player when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state”. It is provided to determine benefits. Here, in the second ART game number determination state addition lottery table, when “1” lines are aligned, a privilege to be given to the player and a lottery value corresponding to the privilege are defined. In addition, in the second lottery table for determining the number of second ART games, a privilege to be given to the player and a lottery value corresponding to the privilege when the “2” line is aligned are defined.

(Additional lottery table for 3rd ART game number determination state)
The third ART game number determination state addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is given to the player when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”. It is provided to determine benefits. Here, in the third lottery table for determining the number of games for determining the number of ART games, in the case of “2” lines, a privilege to be given to the player and a lottery value corresponding to the privilege are defined.

(Additional lottery table for performing the spinning effect)
Next, the extra lottery table for executing the spinning effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  The extra lottery table for executing the spinning effect is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the first special spinning effect is executed and when the second special spinning effect is executed, in the “ART state”. It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. Here, in this embodiment, the extra lottery table for executing the spinning effect is added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when it is determined to execute the first special spinning effect. In the “ART state” when it is determined to execute the first special spinning effect addition lottery table for determining the number (see FIG. 23A) and the second special spinning effect execution. It is composed of an extra lottery table (see FIG. 23 (B)) for executing the second special spinning effect for determining the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. Therefore, in the following description, the extra lottery table for executing the first special spinning effect and the extra lottery table for executing the second special spinning effect will be described.

(Additional lottery table for the execution of the first special lap effect)
As described above, the extra lottery table for execution of the first special spinning effect is provided in the main ROM 302 and can be played in the “ART state” when it is determined to execute the first special spinning effect. It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the correct number of games. Here, the extra lottery table for execution of the first special spinning effect is calculated based on the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Corresponding lottery values are defined. For example, the probability that “50” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “57344/65536”.

(Additional lottery table for the execution of the second special spinning performance)
As described above, the extra lottery table for executing the second special spinning effect is provided in the main ROM 302 and can be played in the “ART state” when it is determined to execute the second special spinning effect. It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the correct number of games. Here, the extra lottery table for the execution of the second special spinning effect is calculated based on the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. Corresponding lottery values are defined. In the present embodiment, when the lottery is performed using the extra lottery table for execution of the second special spinning effect, the number of lotteries is “7”. The extra lottery table for execution of the second special spinning effect in the present embodiment is used for the lottery value used in the lottery from the “1” to the “6” lottery and the “7” lottery. It is defined that the lottery values are different. For example, when the number of lotteries is from “1” to “6”, the probability that “50” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in “ART state” is “1024/65536 Is. On the other hand, when the number of lotteries is “7”, the probability that the “50” game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “57344/65536”.

  Note that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the lottery value corresponding to the number of games are defined in the extra lottery table for executing the spinning effect, but this is not limitative. In other words, a lottery value for acquiring the “ART added state” may be defined.

(Additional lottery table for the first ART addition state)
Next, the extra lottery table for the first ART extra state will be described with reference to FIG.

  The first ART added state additional lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number added state”, a game that can be played in the “ART state” It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the number. Here, the first ART extra state addition lottery table includes the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” corresponding to the winning combination, and “ART A lottery value corresponding to the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “state” is defined. For example, when “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the probability that “100” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “ 6520/65536 ".

(Additional lottery table for the second ART extra state)
Next, the extra lottery table for the second ART extra state will be described based on FIG.

  The second ART extra state extra lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the "second ART game number extra state", a game that can be played in the "ART state" It is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the number. Here, the 2nd ART additional state addition lottery table includes the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” corresponding to the winning combination, and “ART A lottery value corresponding to the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “state” is defined. For example, when “common bell” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the probability that “10” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “ 49152/65536 ".

(Bonus end addition lottery table)
Next, the bonus end addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The bonus end addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided to determine the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when the “bonus” ends. . Here, in the present embodiment, the bonus end addition lottery table is the same color black for determining the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” after the “same color black seven BB” is completed. Number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” after the “Red Seven BB” or “White Seven BB” is completed after completion of the Seven BB end addition lottery table (see FIG. 26A) The red / white seven BB end addition lottery table (see FIG. 26 (B)) and “the different color black seven BB” are completed, and then added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. It is composed of an extra lottery table (see FIG. 26C) for the end of the different color black Seven BB for determining the number of games. Therefore, in the following, the same color black seven BB end addition lottery table, the red / white seven BB end addition lottery table, and the different color black seven BB end addition lottery table will be described.

(Additional lottery table for the same color black Seven BB end)
The same color black seven BB end addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 to determine the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” after the “same color black seven BB” ends. Is provided. Here, the same color black Seven BB end addition lottery table corresponds to the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. A lottery value is defined. For example, the probability that “50” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “65000/65536”.

(Red / white Seven BB end addition lottery table)
The extra lottery table for the end of red / white seven BB is provided in the main ROM 302 and is added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” after “red seven BB” or “white seven BB” ends. It is provided to determine the number of games to play. Here, the extra lottery table for red / white seven BB end corresponds to the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. A lottery value is specified. For example, the probability that “50” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “30/65536”.

(Additional lottery table at the end of the different color Black Seven BB)
The extra lottery table for the end of the different color black BB is provided in the main ROM 302 to determine the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” after the end of the “different color black seven BB”. Is provided. Here, the extra color lottery table at the end of the different color black BB corresponds to the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. A lottery value is defined. For example, the probability that “50” games are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “2048/65536”.

(Additional lottery table for 2nd special BB state)
Next, the extra lottery table for the second special BB state will be described based on FIG.

  The extra lottery table for the second special BB state is provided in the main ROM 302 and is added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second special BB state”. It is provided to determine the number of games to play. Here, in the extra lottery table for the second special BB state, a value corresponding to the value of the light pointer and the value of the light pointer are defined.

(Navistock addition lottery table)
Next, the navigation stock addition lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for drawing whether or not navigation stock is to be added. Here, the Navistock addition lottery table is used for winning a bonus used to draw whether or not to add the value of the Navistock counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “Bonus” is won. Navi stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28A) and used when lottery whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “bonus” is not won. Bonus stock non-winning navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28B) and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state”, the ART game provided in the main RAM 303 When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the number determination preparation state winning flag storage area is ON, the main R A first BB state navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28C) used for lottery of whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in M303 and the main control board 300 are managed. Provided in the main RAM 303 when the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. The second BB state navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28D) used when lottering whether or not to add the values of the navigation stock counters that are added, and the state managed by the main control board 300 In the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the data provided in the main RAM 303 is The first ART game number determination ready state navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28E) used when lottering whether or not to add the value of the stock counter and the state managed by the main control board 300 are shown. In the case of the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, the second ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition used for drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 In the case where the lottery table (see FIG. 28F) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is added. Navi stock addition lottery for 3rd ART game number determination preparation state used when lottery is performed When the selection table (see FIG. 28G) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are the “first BB state during ART”, the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag stored in the main RAM 303 is stored. The navigation provided in the main RAM 303 when the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the area is ON and the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF. By the navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF) (see FIG. 28 (H)) used when the stock counter value is added or not, and the main control board 300 When the state to be managed is “the second BB state during ART”, it is provided in the main RAM 303. When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area is ON, the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF. In this case, a second BB state navigation stock addition lottery table (special BB flag = OFF) used when a lottery for determining whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 (FIG. 28 ( I))), and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state during ART”, the number of ART games in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. When the preparation state winning flag is ON, provided in the main RAM 303 When the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area is ON, the navigation stock for the first BB state during the ART used when the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is lottered is selected. When the addition lottery table (special BB flag = ON) (see FIG. 28 (J)) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are the “second BB state during ART”, the ART provided in the main RAM 303 When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area is ON and the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON, Used for lottery of whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 This is composed of a navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON) (see FIG. 28 (K)). Here, the navigation stock addition lottery table includes the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the value of the navigation stock counter to be added, and the lottery value corresponding to the value of the navigation stock counter to be added. Is stipulated. Therefore, in the following, a navigation stock addition lottery table for bonus winning time, a navigation stock addition lottery table for bonus non-winning, a navigation stock addition lottery table for first BB state, and a navigation stock addition lottery table for second BB state, The first ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table, the second ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table, the third ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table, and the first BB state during ART Navigation stock addition lottery table (special BB flag = OFF), navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF), and navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART (special BB flag) = ON) and 2nd BB state during ART A description of the navigation stock addition lottery table (special BB flag = ON).

(Navistock addition lottery table for bonus winning)
The navigation stock addition lottery table for bonus winning is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the “bonus” is won, it is determined whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is added. Used when Specifically, the Navistock addition lottery table for bonus winning includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and a lottery value corresponding to the added value. It is prescribed.

(Navistock addition lottery table for bonus non-winning)
Navi stock addition lottery table for bonus non-winning is provided in the main ROM 302, and whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is added when “bonus” is not won. Used when drawing lots. Specifically, the Navistock addition lottery table for non-winning bonuses includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and a lottery value corresponding to the value to be added. Is stipulated.

(Navistock addition lottery table for 1BB state)
The first BB state navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. In addition, it is used when drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and a lottery value corresponding to the value to be added. It is prescribed.

(2nd BB state navigation stock addition lottery table)
The second BB state navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. In addition, it is used when drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and a lottery value corresponding to the value to be added. It is prescribed.

(First ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table)
The first ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is stored in the main RAM 303 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the "first ART game number determination preparation state". It is used when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the provided navigation stock counter. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the first ART game number determination preparation state corresponds to the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the value to be added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and the value to be added. A lottery value is specified.

(Navistock addition lottery table for second ART game number determination preparation state)
The second ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and stored in the main RAM 303 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. It is used when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the provided navigation stock counter. Specifically, the second ART game number determination ready state navigation stock addition lottery table corresponds to the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the value added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and the value to be added A lottery value is specified.

(Navistock addition lottery table for 3rd ART game number determination preparation state)
The third ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the "third ART game number determination preparation state", it is stored in the main RAM 303. It is used when a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the provided navigation stock counter. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the third ART game number determination preparation state corresponds to the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, the value added to the value of the navigation stock counter, and the value to be added A lottery value is specified.

(Navistock addition lottery table for 1st BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF))
The navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF) is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state during ART” When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON and the special BB in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 When the flag is OFF, it is used when drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF) includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value to be added to the value of the navigation stock counter, A lottery value corresponding to the value to be added is defined.

(Navistock addition lottery table for 2nd BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF))
The navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF) is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “the second BB state during ART” When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON and the special BB in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 When the flag is OFF, it is used when drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART (special BB flag = OFF) includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value to be added to the value of the navigation stock counter, A lottery value corresponding to the value to be added is defined.

(Navistock addition lottery table for 1st BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON))
The navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON) is provided in the main ROM 302, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is “the first BB state during ART”. When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON and the special BB in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 When the flag is ON, it is used when drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON) includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value to be added to the value of the navigation stock counter, A lottery value corresponding to the value to be added is defined.

(Navistock addition lottery table for 2nd BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON))
The navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON) is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “the second BB state during ART” When the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag in the ART game number determination preparation state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON and the special BB in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 When the flag is ON, it is used when drawing whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Specifically, the navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART (special BB flag = ON) includes a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, a value to be added to the value of the navigation stock counter, A lottery value corresponding to the value to be added is defined.

(ART addition status acquisition lottery table)
Next, the ART added state acquisition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART added state acquisition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302 and is provided for determining whether or not to acquire the “ART added state”. Here, the ART added state acquisition lottery table determines whether to acquire the “ART added state” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second bonus preparation state”. 2. Obtain an “ART extra state” if the bonus preparation state ART extra state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29A) and the state managed by the main control board 300 are the “second special BB state”. The second special BB state ART additional state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29B) for determining whether or not to do so. Therefore, in the following, the second bonus preparation state ART additional state acquisition lottery table, the first ART game number determination state ART additional state acquisition lottery table, the second ART game number determination state ART additional state acquisition lottery table, The ART added state acquisition lottery table for the 3 ART game number determination state and the second special BB state ART additional state acquisition lottery table will be described.

(Second bonus preparation state ART extra state acquisition lottery table)
The second bonus preparation state ART additional state acquisition lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the "second bonus preparation state", "ART additional state" is displayed. It is provided to decide whether or not to acquire. Specifically, the ART addition state acquisition lottery table for the second bonus preparation state acquires the winning number, the winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and the “ART added state” to be acquired. A lottery value corresponding to “ART added state” is defined.

(2nd special BB state ART addition state acquisition lottery table)
The ART extra state acquisition lottery table for the second special BB state is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second special BB state”, the “ART extra state” is displayed. It is provided to decide whether or not to acquire. Specifically, the second special BB state ART additional state acquisition lottery table corresponds to the value of the write pointer, the “ART additional state” to be acquired, and the “ART additional state” to be acquired. A lottery value is defined.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. In order to determine whether or not to be promoted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Here, in the present embodiment, the promotion lottery table draws whether or not to promote to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “normal state” or the like. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second bonus preparation state” or the like, the “third ART game number determination preparation state” It is configured by an ART-time promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30B) for lottery of whether or not to be promoted. Therefore, hereinafter, the normal time promotion lottery table and the ART time promotion lottery table will be described.

(Normal promotion lottery table)
The normal-time promotion lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” or not, whether or not it is promoted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. It is provided to draw lots. Here, the regular promotion lottery table defines a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to be promoted to the “third ART game number determination state” with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Art promotion promotion lottery table)
The ART-time promotion lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is promoted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second bonus preparation state”. It is provided to draw whether or not to do. Here, in the promotion lottery table for ART, a winning number, a winning combination corresponding to the winning number, and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to be promoted to the “third ART game number determination state” with a probability of “16384/65536”.

(Security lottery table)
Next, the security lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The security lottery table is provided in the main ROM 302, and is provided for lottery whether or not to acquire the navigation stock when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. It has been. Here, in the present embodiment, the guaranteed lottery table includes the number of ART games provided in the main RAM 303 when the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “32”. A first security lottery table (see FIG. 31 (A)) for lottery whether or not to acquire navigation stock when the value of the determination preparation state game number counter is “16” and a main RAM 303 are provided. The second guaranteed lottery table for determining the navigation stock to be acquired by lottery in the game after the value of the number-of-art counters for determining the number of ART games is “0” (see FIG. 31B) It is comprised by. Therefore, the first security lottery table and the second security lottery table will be described below.

(First security lottery table)
The first guaranteed lottery table is provided in the main RAM 303. When the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “32”, and the ART provided in the main RAM 303. When the value of the game number determination preparation state game number counter is “16”, it is provided for drawing whether or not to acquire navigation stock. Here, in the first guaranteed lottery table, when the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “32”, the lottery value corresponding to the value of the navigation stock to be acquired When the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “16”, a lottery value corresponding to the navigation stock value to be acquired is defined. For example, when the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “32”, the probability of acquiring “3” for the navigation stock is “1024/65536”.

(Second security lottery table)
The second security lottery table is provided in the main RAM 303, and the navigation stock to be acquired in the game after the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes "0". Is provided to determine by lottery. Here, the second guaranteed lottery table corresponds to the value of the navigation stock to be acquired when the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. In the game after the lottery value and the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 become “0”, the navigation stock to be acquired when it becomes a specific value A lottery value corresponding to the value is defined. For example, when the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the probability of acquiring “3” for the navigation stock is “4192/65536”.

(Direction decision table)
Next, an effect determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the main control board 300 are defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 32A) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, and the main control. The normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 32B) used when the state managed by the board 300 is the “first bonus preparation state”, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state”. ”Effect determination table for normal conditions (see FIG. 32C) and effect determination table for normal conditions used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the“ second BB state ”(FIG. 32 (D)) and the normal state effect determination table (FIG. 5) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first special BB state”. 2 (E)), a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 32F) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second special BB state”, and the main control board 300 And the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state” and the state managed by the main control board 300 used when the state managed by the “ART transition determination state” is The normal state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case and the normal state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state”. ), A normal state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART ready state”, When the state managed by the control board 300 is the “ART state”, the normal state effect determination table (not shown), and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second bonus preparation state” A normal-state effect determination table (not shown) used for the normal state, and a normal-state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state during ART”. The normal state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state during ART” and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “second ART game”. The state determination table for normal state (not shown) used in the case of “number determination ready state” and the state managed by the main control board 300 A normal state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case of the “second ART game number determination state” and a state managed by the main control board 300 are used in the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Normal state effect determination table (not shown), normal state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”, the main The normal state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the control board 300 is “first ART added state”, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is “second ART added state”. The normal state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “on the third ART. Normal state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case of “settled state” and a normal state effect determination table (in the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number notification state”) (Not shown).

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change. If it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S4, and if it is determined that the setting change key switch is not ON (step S3). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer. When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first acquires the current setting value based on the value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and determines whether the setting value range is normal. If the result of the determination is normal, the current setting value is displayed on a setting display section (not shown). On the other hand, when the above-described determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 performs a process of switching the set value based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button (not shown) by the setting change switch (not shown), and the start lever 10 by the start switch 10sw. Based on the detected operation, a process for determining the set value is performed. Then, the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the key hole for setting change, and has been turned a predetermined angle in the counterclockwise direction from the state rotated in the clockwise direction by a predetermined angle. When it is detected, processing for storing the set value in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S4 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 34).

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when a later-described re-game operation flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S <b> 103, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a timing when the MAXBET switch 8sw detects an operation of the MAXBET button 8. More specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for detecting the on-edge of the input port of the MAXBET button 8. If it is determined that the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected (step S103 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S104, and if it is determined that the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is not detected ( Step S103 = No), the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game cancel timer setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value set in the pseudo game cancel timer can be set as appropriate. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when the medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. In addition, it is determined whether or not the processing for adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 or the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected. When the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected, the main RAM 303 stores A process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided is performed. Further, it is determined whether or not an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and when an operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, a process of returning the stored medal to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S <b> 106, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S102 and the medal management process in step S105. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107, and it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In this case (step S106 = No), the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not an operation of the start lever is detected by the start switch 10sw. When the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw, the main CPU 301 is provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for turning off the re-game operating flag in the re-game operating flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, when the operation of the start lever 10 is not detected by the start switch 10sw, the start lever check process is terminated. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch 10sw is ON (step S108 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109. If it is determined that the start switch 10sw is not ON (step S108 = No) ), And the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs information setting processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process related to the pseudo game. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a start-time state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the state managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation start preparation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a spinning effect based on information stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a reel lock effect based on information stored in a reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed as a result of the determination, the minimum game time has elapsed in the next game. In order to determine whether or not it has been performed, a process of setting a value of a timer counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed, the main CPU 301 performs a process of waiting until the minimum game time has elapsed. In addition, the main CPU 301 transmits the reel rotation start command having information indicating that the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started to the sub control board 400. Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the reel rotation start command has information related to the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and information related to the acquired “ART added state”.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing during reel rotation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed, and the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed. In the case of pressing, among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the operated stop button. Then, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, the pressing reference position is acquired and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 has a stop table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the value of the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop. Based on the operation order of the button 13, etc., a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” to “4” frames is performed, and the determined number of sliding frames is determined as a sliding frame provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the number storage area. The main CPU 301 rotates based on the value stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of stopping the middle left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all stopped by the reel rotation process in step S115. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S115 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S116. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S115 = No), The process proceeds to step S114, and the reel rotation process is repeatedly executed until all reels are stopped.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sends the display determination command to the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a display determination command having information on the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line to the sub-control board 400. Is set in the production transmission data storage area. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line, and determines that “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. In the case of a game, a process for calculating the number of medals to be paid out to the player is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to winning” is not displayed on the active line, a process is performed to determine whether or not the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to replay” is displayed on the active line, a process of turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs medal payout processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the fact that “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. Do. Further, the main CPU 301 displays a value corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out to the player when the “combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. A process of adding to the counter value is performed. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S118 ends, the process proceeds to step S119.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to display state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the combination of the state managed by the main control board 300 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S101.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 34 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery count initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of the number of lotteries when determining the winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “66” as the initial value of the number of lotteries and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the carry flag is “ON”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the carry flag in the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “ON”. When it is determined that the carry flag is “ON” (step S109-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-4, and when it is determined that the carry flag is not “ON”. (Step S109-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S109-5.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs an inter-flag lottery number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of rewriting the value stored in the register to “34” by the lottery count initial value acquisition process in step S109-2. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs a winning combination determination table setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses the winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 7 to 12) provided in the main ROM 302 based on the information related to the gaming state acquired in the gaming state acquisition process of step S109-5. Perform the setting process. Then, when the process of step S109-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 7 to 12) set by the winning combination determination table setting process in step S109-6 and the number of lotteries stored in the register. A process of acquiring data related to the winning combination corresponding to the number of lotteries is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the currently selected winning combination based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value of the number of lotteries stored in the register. The lottery value of the table (see FIGS. 7 to 12) is acquired and stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process in step S109-8 from the random number value stored in the register, and subtracts the register value in which the random number value is stored. The process of updating to the value after storage and storing it is performed. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process of step S109-8 from the random number value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S109-9. Then, a process for determining whether or not the value is negative is performed. If it is determined that the winning combination is made (step S109-10 = Yes), the winning combination is determined based on the winning number stored in the register, and then the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated to execute the main loop processing. The process proceeds to step S110. On the other hand, when it is determined that it has not been won (step S109-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of lotteries stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the lottery count has become “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the lottery count value stored in the register by the process of step S109-11. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “0” (step S109-12 = Yes), after “losing” is determined as the winning combination, the internal lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop The process proceeds to step S110 of the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S109-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Information setting process)
Next, based on FIG. 36, the information setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 34 is demonstrated. FIG. 36 shows a subroutine for information setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a winning combination command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the winning combination command in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit a winning combination command having information related to the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S109 to the sub-control board 400. Processing for setting in the transmission data storage area for performance is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game table setting process for setting a pseudo game table provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a push order command during pseudo game play. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the pseudo game mid-push order command having information related to the pseudo game set by the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process in step S110-2 to the sub-control board 400. A process of setting the pseudo-in-game push order command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “3” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “3” or more based on the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value stored in the effect storage area is “3” or more (step S110-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-8 and is stored in the effect storage area. If it is determined that the current value is not “3” or more (step S110-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-5.

  Here, when the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, it corresponds to a reservation number “0” described later, and the effect provided in the main RAM 303. When the value stored in the storage area is “1”, it corresponds to a reservation number “1” described later, and the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “2”. ”Corresponds to a reservation number“ 2 ”which will be described later. When the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is“ 4 ”, a reservation number which will be described later. When the value corresponding to “4” and stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “5”, it corresponds to a reservation number “5” described later, and the main RAM 303 Production provided in When the value stored in the storage area is “6”, it corresponds to the reservation number “6” described later, and the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “7”. ”Corresponds to a reservation number“ 7 ”which will be described later. “3” in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is an unused area.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game cancel flag is “ON”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game cancel flag in the pseudo game cancel flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “ON”. If it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is “ON” (step S110-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-6, and it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is not “ON”. If it is determined (step S110-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-8.

(Step S110-6)
In step S110-6, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game cancel process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing “0” in the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. By this processing, the pseudo game is canceled. Then, when the process of step S110-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7.

(Step S110-7)
In step S110-7, the main CPU 301 performs pseudo game cancellation state-specific processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that the states managed by the main control board are “first ART game number determination state”, “second ART game number determination state”, and “third ART game number determination state”, respectively. Process according to the state of. Then, when the process of step S110-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-8.

(Step S110-8)
In step S110-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “1” or more based on the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value stored in the effect storage area is “1” or more (step S110-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9 and is stored in the effect storage area. If it is determined that the current value is not “1” or more (step S110-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-9)
In step S110-9, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 rotates the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 when the start lever 10 is operated, and moves the left reel 18 when the left stop button 11 is operated. Temporarily stopping, when the middle stop button 12 is operated, the middle reel 19 is temporarily stopped, and when the right stop button 13 is operated, a process of executing a pseudo game for temporarily stopping the right reel 20 is executed. Do. Then, when the process of step S110-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-10.

(Step S110-10)
In step S110-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “35” or more, thereby winning the “bonus”. Processing to determine whether or not has been performed. If it is determined that “bonus” has been won (step S110-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-11, and if it is determined that “bonus” has not been won ( Step S110-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-13.

(Step S110-11)
In step S110-11, the main CPU 301 performs a carry flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information related to the selected “bonus” in the game in a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-12.

(Step S110-12)
In step S110-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for changing the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 to a “non-RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to the “non-RT gaming state” in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-13.

(Step S110-13)
In step S110-13, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sends the reel rotation start acceptance command to the main control board 400 in order to transmit a reel rotation start acceptance command having information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. Processing for setting in the transmission data storage area for rendering in the RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-14.

(Step S110-14)
In step S110-14, the main CPU 301 performs a reel lock effect lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 executes the reel lock effect based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S109 and the reel lock effect lottery table (see FIG. 15) provided in the main ROM 302. Whether or not is determined by lottery. Further, when it is determined that the reel lock effect is to be executed, the main CPU 301 performs a process of storing the reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-15.

(Step S110-15)
In step S110-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the reel effect command having information related to the reel lock effect determined by the reel lock effect lottery process in step S110-14 to the sub control board 400 in order to transmit the reel effect command. Processing for setting the command in the transmission data storage area for rendering in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-16.

(Step S110-16)
In step S110-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “0” based on the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Process. If it is determined that the value stored in the effect storage area is “0” (step S110-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-20 and is stored in the effect storage area. If it is determined that the existing value is not “0” (step S110-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-17.

(Step S110-17)
In step S110-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the execution effect storage area is “3” or less. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value stored in the execution effect storage area is “3” or less based on the value stored in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the value stored in the execution effect storage area is “3” or less (step S110-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-20 to enter the execution effect storage area. If it is determined that the stored value is not “3” or less (step S110-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-18.

(Step S110-18)
In step S110-18, the main CPU 301 performs a reel lock effect setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel lock effect to be executed in the game based on a value stored in a reel lock effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-19.

(Step S110-19)
In step S110-19, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value stored in the effect storage area. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-20.

(Step S110-20)
In step S110-20, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a spinning effect to be executed in the game based on a value stored in an effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-20 ends, the information setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Pseudo game middle push order lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 37, the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process performed by the process of step S110-2 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process.

(Step S110-2-1)
In step S110-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus type acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in a register. Then, when the process of step S110-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-2.

(Step S110-2-2)
In step S110-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won based on the value set in the register by the bonus type acquisition process of step S110-2-1. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S110-2-2 = Yes), the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the information setting process proceeds to step S110-3. To migrate. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “bonus” is not won (step S110-2-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-2-3.

(Step S110-2-3)
In step S110-2-3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not “same color black seven BB” is in operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not “same color black seven BB” is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the “same color black seven BB” is in operation (step S110-2-3 = Yes), the pseudo game mid-push order lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the information setting process step S110- The processing is shifted to 3. On the other hand, if it is determined that “same color black seven BB” is not in operation (step S110-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-2-4.

(Step S110-2-4)
In step S110-2-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S110-2-4 = Yes), the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-3 of the information setting process. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the “bonus” is not won (step S110-2-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-2-5.

(Step S110-2-5)
In step S110-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a random value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a soft random number and setting the acquired random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S110-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-2-6.

(Step S110-2-6)
In step S110-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “1” to the offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “1” in the register as an initial value of the offset value. Then, when the process of step S110-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-7.

(Step S110-2-7)
In step S110-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “losing”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is “losing” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “losing” (step S110-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2-8, and it is determined that the winning combination is not “losing”. If it is determined (step S110-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-2-10.

(Step S110-2-8)
In step S110-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a lost game state transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to shift the pseudo gaming state depending on whether the random number value set in the register is an odd number or an even number in the random value acquisition process of step S110-2-5. Perform the decision process. Here, in this embodiment, if the random value set in the register is an odd number, it is won, and if the random value set in the register is an even number, it is not won. Then, when the process of step S110-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-15.

(Step S110-2-9)
In step S110-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won as a result of the lottery process by the lost game state transition lottery process in step S110-2-8. When it is determined that the winning is made (step S110-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2-16, and when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S110-2). -9 = No), the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-3 of the information setting process.

(Step S110-2-10)
In step S110-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “replay”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “replay” based on a value stored in a winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “replay” (step S110-2-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2-11, and it is determined that the winning combination is not “replay”. If it is determined (step S110-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-2-12.

(Step S110-2-11)
In step S110-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the offset value set in the register. Then, when the process of step S110-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-16.

(Step S110-2-12)
In step S110-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “2” to the offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “2” to the offset value set in the register. Then, when the process of step S110-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-13.

(Step S110-2-13)
In step S110-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “different color black seven BB” is in operation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not “different color black seven BB” is in operation based on a value stored in a BB in-operation information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that “different color black seven BB” is in operation (step S110-2-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2-14, and “different color black seven BB” is determined. If it is determined that it is not in operation (step S110-2-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-2-15.

(Step S110-2-14)
In step S110-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the offset value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the offset value set in the register. Then, when the process of step S110-2-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-16.

(Step S110-2-15)
In step S110-2-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “RB operating bell”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is “RB active bell” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that the winning combination is “RB in operation bell” (step S110-2-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-2-16, and the winning combination is “in RB operation”. If it is determined that it is not “bell” (step S110-2-15 = No), the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing proceeds to step S110-3 of the information setting processing.

(Step S110-2-16)
In step S110-2-16, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game table setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing the offset value set in the register in the pseudo game table type information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-2-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-17.

(Step S110-2-17)
In step S110-2-17, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S110-2-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2-18.

(Step S110-2-18)
In step S110-2-18, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game push order setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses the random number value set in the register by the hard random number acquisition processing in step S110-2-17 to calculate the total operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. The process of dividing by “6” is performed, and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remainder of the division is stored in the pseudo game hitting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-2-18 is completed, the pseudo-game mid-push order lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-3 of the information setting process.

  Thus, when the winning combination is “losing”, “1” is set as the initial value of the offset value by the process of step S110-2-6, and the pseudo game table setting process of step S110-2-16 The offset value becomes “1” at the timing of performing. Then, in the pseudo game push order setting process of step S110-2-18, the left stop button 11 for promoting the pseudo game mode based on the random number value acquired by the hard random number acquisition process of step S110-2-17, The operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that maintain the pseudo game mode are determined.

  Here, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the stop is performed in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. When the operation is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and when the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. Further, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. When the value stored in the pseudo game hitting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “2”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode.

  Here, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, the stop in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11. When the operation is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and when the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. Further, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “4”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. When the value stored in the pseudo game hitting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “5”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode.

  In addition, although specifically described later, the promotion of the pseudo game mode when the winning combination is “losing” will be described. When the value of the pseudo game mode is “0”, the left stop for promoting the pseudo game mode In the case of the operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, "1" is added to the value of the pseudo game mode. Here, when the value of the pseudo game mode is “7”, the value of the pseudo game mode is determined when the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for promoting the pseudo game mode is reached. “1” is added to the value to become “pseudo game preparation”.

  On the other hand, the maintenance of the pseudo game mode when the winning combination is “losing” will be described. When the value of the pseudo game mode is “0”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, which does not promote the pseudo game mode, In the case of the operation order of the right stop button 13, the value of the pseudo game mode remains “0”. Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning combination is “losing” and the value of the pseudo game mode is “3”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop for promoting the pseudo game mode. The operation order of the buttons 13 is not notified.

  When the winning combination is “replay”, “1” is set as the initial value of the offset value by the process of step S110-2-6, and the offset value is “1” by the process of step S110-2-11. ”And the offset value becomes“ 2 ”at the timing when the pseudo game table setting process of step S110-2-16 is performed. Then, in the pseudo game push order setting process of step S110-2-18, the left stop button 11 for promoting the pseudo game mode based on the random number value acquired by the hard random number acquisition process of step S110-2-17, The operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that maintain the pseudo game mode are determined.

  Here, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the stop is performed in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. When the operation is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and when the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. Further, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. When the value stored in the pseudo game hitting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “2”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode.

  Here, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. Further, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “4”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode. When the value stored in the pseudo game hitting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “5”, the stop operation is performed in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11. Is performed, the pseudo game mode is promoted, and if the stop operation is performed in another order, it is determined to maintain the pseudo game mode.

  The promotion of the pseudo game mode when the winning combination is “normal replay” will be described. When the value of the pseudo game mode is “0”, the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 for promoting the pseudo game mode. In the case of the operation order of the right stop button 13, "1" is added to the value of the pseudo game mode. On the other hand, the maintenance of the pseudo game mode when the winning combination is “normal replay” will be described. When the value of the pseudo game mode is “3”, the value of the pseudo game mode remains “3”.

  Also, the promotion of the pseudo game mode when the winning combination is “replay during the first RT” will be described. When the value of the pseudo game mode is “0”, the left stop button 11 for promoting the pseudo game mode, the middle stop In the case of the operation order of the button 12 and the right stop button 13, the value of the pseudo game mode is “4”. Further, when the value of the pseudo game mode is “1”, when the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for promoting the pseudo game mode is reached, the value of the pseudo game mode is “5”. Further, when the value of the pseudo game mode is “2”, when the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for promoting the pseudo game mode is reached, the value of the pseudo game mode is “6”. Further, when the value of the pseudo game mode is “3”, when the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for promoting the pseudo game mode is reached, the value of the pseudo game mode is “7”. Further, when the value of the pseudo game mode is “4” to “6”, if the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for promoting the pseudo game mode is set, The game mode value is incremented by “1”. Further, when the value of the pseudo game mode is “7” and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for promoting the pseudo game mode is reached, the value of the pseudo game mode is “Pseudo game preparation”.

  If the winning combination is “RB active bell”, “1” is set as the initial value of the offset value by the process of step S110-2-6, and the offset value is set by the process of step S110-2-12. Is added by “2”, the offset value is added by “1” by the process of step S110-2-14, and the offset value becomes “4” at the timing of performing the pseudo game table setting process of step S110-2-16. . Then, in the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the left stop button 11 that sets the pseudo game based on the random number value acquired by the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17. The operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is determined.

  Here, when the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the left stop button 11 as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “0” described later, The order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set, and the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “1” which will be described later. The order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13 is set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “2”, and the middle stop button 12, right is set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “3” described later. The order of the stop button 13 and the left stop button 11 is set, and the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “6” which will be described later. Right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12 as an operation order corresponding to the later reservation number "7", and to set the order of the left stop button 11.

  When the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”, the left stop button 11 and the middle as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “1” described later. The order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set, and the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “2” which will be described later. The order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13 is set as the operation order corresponding to the number “3”, and the middle stop button 12 and the right stop are set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “6” described later. The order of the button 13 and the left stop button 11 is set, and the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “7” which will be described later. Right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12 as an operation order corresponding to the predicate reservation number "0", and to set the order of the left stop button 11.

  When the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “2”, the left stop button 11 and the middle as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “2” described later. The order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set, and the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “3” which will be described later. The order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13 is set as the operation order corresponding to the number “6”, and the middle stop button 12 and the right stop are set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “7” described later. The order of the button 13 and the left stop button 11 is set, and the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “0” which will be described later. Right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12 as an operation order corresponding to the predicate reservation number "1", and to set the order of the left stop button 11.

  Further, when the value stored in the pseudo game hitting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”, the left stop button 11 and the middle as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “3” described later. The order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set, and the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “6” which will be described later. The order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13 is set as the operation order corresponding to the number “7”, and the middle stop button 12 and the right stop are set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “0” described later. The order of the button 13 and the left stop button 11 is set, and the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “1” which will be described later. Right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12 as an operation order corresponding to the predicate reservation number "2", and to set the order of the left stop button 11.

  If the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “4”, the left stop button 11 and the middle as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “6” described later. The order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set, and the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “7” which will be described later. The order of the middle stop button 12, left stop button 11, and right stop button 13 is set as the operation order corresponding to the number “0”, and the middle stop button 12 and right stop are set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “1” described later. The order of the button 13 and the left stop button 11 is set, and the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “2” which will be described later. Right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12 as an operation order corresponding to the predicate reservation number "3", and to set the order of the left stop button 11.

  When the value stored in the pseudo game batting order type storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “5”, the left stop button 11, The order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is set, and the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “0” which will be described later. The order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13 is set as the operation order corresponding to the number “1”, and the middle stop button 12 and the right stop are set as the operation order corresponding to the reservation number “2” described later. The order of the button 13 and the left stop button 11 is set, and the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 is set as an operation order corresponding to a reservation number “3” which will be described later. Right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12 as an operation order corresponding to the predicate reservation number "6", and to set the order of the left stop button 11.

  When the winning combination is “RB in operation bell” and the process for setting the pseudo game is performed “2” times, the pseudo game or the spinning effect is set.

(Processing by state when canceling pseudo game)
Next, based on FIG. 38, the process according to the state at the time of pseudo game cancellation performed by the process of step S110-7 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing according to the state at the time of pseudo game cancellation.

(Step S110-7-1)
In step S110-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is the “first ART game number determination state” (step S110-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2, and the “first ART game number determination state” is reached. If it is determined that it is not (step S110-7-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-3.

(Step S110-7-2)
In step S110-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs a cancellation first ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when canceling the pseudo game, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a lottery equivalent to the case where the pseudo game is being executed in the “first ART game number determination state”. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2 is completed, the subroutine for the state-by-state process at the time of canceling the pseudo game is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Step S110-7-3)
In step S110-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “second ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is the “second ART game number determination state” (step S110-7-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-4, and the “second ART game number determination state” is reached. If it is determined that it is not (step S110-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-5.

(Step S110-7-4)
In step S110-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs a cancel second ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when canceling the pseudo game, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a lottery equivalent to the case where the pseudo game is being executed in the “second ART game number determination state”. Then, when the process of step S110-7-4 is completed, the subroutine of the process according to the state at the time of pseudo game cancellation is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Step S110-7-5)
In step S110-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “third ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is the “third ART game number determination state” (step S110-7-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-6, and the “third ART game number determination state” is reached. If it is determined that it is not (step S110-7-5 = No), the subroutine of the process according to the state at the time of canceling the pseudo game is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Step S110-7-6)
In step S110-7-6, the main CPU 301 carries out a third ART game number determination state process upon cancellation, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when canceling the pseudo game, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing a lottery equivalent to the case where the pseudo game is being executed in the “third ART game number determination state”. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6 is completed, the subroutine of the process according to the state at the time of pseudo game cancellation is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Processing for determining the number of first ART games when canceling)
Next, based on FIG. 39, the cancellation first ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-7-2 of FIG. 38 will be described. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first ART game number determination state processing at the time of cancellation.

(Step S110-7-2-1)
In step S110-7-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART game number determination state alternative lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 draws in place of the benefits that the player can acquire in the pseudo game executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state”. Perform the process. More specifically, the main CPU 301 first performs a process of acquiring a random number on the assumption that the player has operated the start lever 10 and performs a lottery process. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-2.

(Step S110-7-2-2)
In step S110-7-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-3.

(Step S110-7-2-3)
In step S110-7-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the register storing the number of lotteries is “256” which is the upper limit value of the number of lotteries. When it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “256” (step S110-7-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-4, and the value of the number of lotteries is determined. Is determined not to be “256” (step S110-7-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5.

(Step S110-7-2-4)
In step S110-7-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when step S110-7-2-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5.

(Step S110-7-2-5)
In step S110-7-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a continuation rate management process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines the continuation rate for the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303, and stores the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. Note that the continuation rate management process in step S110-7-2-5 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, so the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6.

(Step S110-7-2-6)
In step S110-7-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs ART game number determination state spinning effect execution time processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a privilege to be given to the player when the spinning effect is executed in the pseudo game. In addition, since the process at the time of performing the spinning effect for the ART game number determination state in step S110-7-2-6 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. It will be. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7.

(Step S110-7-2-7)
In step S110-7-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a third stop time process for the ART game number determination state, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when it is determined that the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game to which a privilege is given according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 Then, processing for determining a privilege according to the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Since the third stop time process for the ART game number determination state in step S110-7-2-7 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. It becomes. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-8.

(Step S110-7-2-8)
In step S110-7-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuation rate is undetermined. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the continuation rate is undetermined (step S110-7-2-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-9, and the continuation rate is not undetermined. Is determined (step S110-7-2-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-1.

(Step S110-7-2-9)
In step S <b> 110-7-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “ART game number notification state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “ART game number notification state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-7-2-7 ends, the subroutine of the first ART game number determination state process at the time of cancellation ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Continuation rate management process)
Next, based on FIG. 40, the continuation rate management process performed by the process of step S110-7-2-5 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a subroutine of continuation rate management processing.

(Step S110-7-2-5-1)
In step S110-7-2-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the game is a pseudo game D or a pseudo game E. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E is stored based on the value stored in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. When it is determined that the game is a pseudo game D or a pseudo game E (step S110-7-2-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-2. When it is determined that the game is not the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E (step S110-7-2-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-6.

(Step S110-7-2-5-2)
In step S110-7-2-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuation rate is undetermined. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the continuation rate is not yet determined (step S110-7-2-5-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-3, and the continuation rate is If it is determined that it is not yet determined (step S110-7-2-5-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-4.

(Step S110-7-2-5-3)
In step S110-7-2-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a continuation rate lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 can display the “combination of symbols related to BAR” in a pseudo game based on a continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 18) provided in the main ROM 302. The processing for determining the continuation rate for continuing the notification of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is performed, and the continuation rate determined in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is set. Process to store. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-4.

(Step S110-7-2-5-4)
In step S110-7-2-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process for the pseudo game DE. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the pseudo lotion DE extra lottery table (see FIG. 21) provided in the main ROM 302. Process. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-5.

(Step S110-7-2-5-5)
In step S110-7-2-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery result storage process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the value of the number of games determined by the extra lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-4 to the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. I do. When the process of step S110-7-2-5-5 is completed, the continuation rate management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the continuation rate management process subroutine.

(Step S110-7-2-5-6)
In step S110-7-2-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game continuation flag stored in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF. If it is determined that the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF (step S110-7-2-5-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-7, and the pseudo game is performed. If it is determined that the continuation flag is not OFF (step S110-7-2-5-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-11.

(Step S110-7-2-5-7)
In step S110-7-2-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs continuation rate erasure processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to a value stored in a continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-8.

(Step S110-7-2-5-8)
In step S110-7-2-5-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is “1” or more (step S110-7-2-5-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-9. If it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S110-7-2-5-8 = No), the continuation rate management process subroutine is terminated, and the continuation rate management process The processing shifts to the subroutine call source.

(Step S110-7-2-5-9)
In step S110-7-2-5-9, the main CPU 301 performs a continuation rate lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 can display the “combination of symbols related to BAR” in a pseudo game based on a continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 18) provided in the main ROM 302. Processing for determining a continuation rate for continuing notification of the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 is performed, and the determined continuation rate is stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. Then, when step S110-7-2-5-9 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-10.

(Step S110-7-2-5-10)
In step S110-7-2-5-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-11.

(Step S110-7-2-5-11)
In step S110-7-2-5-11, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game continuation lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 can stop and display the “combination of symbols related to BAR” in accordance with the continuation rate stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified, or the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right that cannot be displayed together with the “combination of symbols related to the BAR” are displayed. Processing for determining whether to notify the operation order of the stop button 13 by lottery is performed. In other words, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for continuing the pseudo game is notified, or the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for ending the pseudo game. A process for determining whether to notify the operation order is performed by lottery. Here, when it is decided to continue the pseudo game, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for continuing the pseudo game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and the pseudo game is displayed. When it is decided to end the game, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for ending the pseudo game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-12.

(Step S110-7-2-5-12)
In step S110-7-2-5-12, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game continuation flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game continuation lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-11, and as a result, the left stop button that can display the “combination of symbols related to BAR” in a uniform manner. 11. When it is determined to notify the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13, the process of turning on the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 When it is determined not to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that can display the “combination of symbols related to the BAR” together. Then, a process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-13.

(Step S110-7-2-5-13)
In step S110-7-2-5-13, the main CPU 301 performs a sorting lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 displays a left stop button that can display the “combination of symbols related to BAR” as a result of the lottery by the pseudo game continuation lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-11. 11. When it is determined to perform the process of notifying the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13, based on the distribution lottery table (see FIG. 19) provided in the main ROM 302. The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 in which “the combination of symbols related to BAR” is aligned with the “1” line is notified, or “the combination of symbols related to BAR” is the “2” line. The process of determining by lottery whether the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 aligned with each other is notified. On the other hand, it was decided not to perform the process of notifying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that can display the “combination of symbols related to BAR” in a uniform manner. In this case, a process of determining to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which “the combination of symbols related to BAR” is not complete is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-14.

(Step S110-7-2-5-14)
In step S110-7-2-5-14, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process for pseudo game. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first identifies the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the main control board 300 Based on the managed state, the first ART game number determination state addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 22A), the second ART game number determination state addition lottery provided in the main ROM 302 A process of selecting a table (see FIG. 22B) or an additional lottery table for the third ART game number determination state provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 22C) is performed. Then, the main CPU 301 adds the number of games to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the selected ART game number determination state addition lottery table, or the “first ART added state”, “second ART A process of determining whether to acquire the “additional state” and the “third ART additional state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-5-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-5-15.

(Step S110-7-2-5-15)
In step S110-7-2-5-15, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery result storage process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines to add the number of games to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the pseudo-game extra lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-14. Is performed by adding the value of the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” to an ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined to acquire the “first ART added state”, a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed, and the “second ART added state” is performed. ”Is added,“ 1 ”is added to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303, and“ 3rd ART added state ”is acquired. If it is, a process of adding “1” to the value of the third ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the process of step S110-7-2-5-15 is completed, the continuation rate management process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the continuation rate management process subroutine.

(Processing at the time of execution of the spinning effect for the ART game number determination state)
Next, based on FIG. 41, the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution time process performed by the process of step S110-7-2-6 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution process.

(Step S110-7-2-6-1)
In step S110-7-2-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. If it is determined that the start switch 10sw is ON (step S110-7-2-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-2, and the start switch 10sw If it is determined that is not ON (step S110-7-2-6-1 = No), the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution time processing subroutine is terminated and the ART game number determination state is determined. The processing shifts to the caller of the subroutine of the process for executing the spinning effect.

(Step S110-7-2-6-2)
In step S <b> 110-7-2-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not information related to the first special spinning effect is stored. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not information related to the first special spinning effect is stored based on a value stored in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. And when it determines with the information which concerns on a 1st special winding effect being stored (step S110-7-2-6-2 = Yes), it processes to step S110-7-2-6-3. If it is determined that the information related to the first special winding effect is not stored (step S110-7-2-6-2 = No), step S110-7-2-6-8 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-7-2-6-3)
In step S110-7-2-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “7” as the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “7” in the register as the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-4.

(Step S110-7-2-6-4)
In step S110-7-2-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process when executing the first special spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the first lottery effect execution extra lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 23A). A process for determining the number of games to be added to is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-5.

(Step S110-7-2-6-5)
In step S110-7-2-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery result temporary storage process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the number of games determined by the extra lottery process at the time of execution of the first special spinning effect in step S110-7-2-6-4 in a register. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-6.

(Step S110-7-2-6-6)
In step S110-7-2-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the number of lotteries set in the register. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-6-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-7.

(Step S110-7-2-6-7)
In step S110-7-2-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of lotteries is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the number of lotteries set in the register by the processing of step S110-7-2-6-6, and as a result, the value of the number of lotteries becomes “0”. A process of determining whether or not has been performed is performed. If it is determined that the number of lotteries is “0” (step S110-7-2-6-7 = Yes), the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution time processing subroutine is terminated, The processing shifts to the caller of the subroutine of the processing at the time of executing the spinning effect for the ART game number determination state. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of lotteries is not “0” (step S110-7-2-6-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-4.

(Step S110-7-2-6-8)
In step S110-7-2-6-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not information relating to the second special spinning effect is stored. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not information related to the second special spinning effect is stored based on the value stored in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. And when it determines with the information which concerns on a 2nd special winding effect having been stored (step S110-7-2-6-8 = Yes), it processes to step S110-7-2-6-9. , And when it is determined that the information related to the second special spinning effect is not stored (step S110-7-2-6-8 = No), the ART game number determination state turning effect is executed. The time processing subroutine is terminated, and the processing shifts to the caller of the subroutine of the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution time processing.

(Step S110-7-2-6-9)
In step S110-7-2-6-9, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process when executing the second special spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the extra lottery table (see FIG. 23B) for execution of the second special spinning effect provided in the main ROM 302. A process for determining the number of games to be added to is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-6-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-6-10.

(Step S110-7-2-6-10)
In step S110-7-2-6-10, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery result temporary storage process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting, in a register, the value of the number of games determined by the extra lottery process at the time of execution of the second special spinning effect in step S110-7-2-6-9. When the processing of step S110-7-2-6-10 is completed, the subroutine for the ART game number determination state for the spinning effect execution is terminated, and the ART game number determination state for the rotation effect execution time processing subroutine. The processing is transferred to the caller.

(Third stop processing for ART game number determination state)
Next, based on FIG. 42, the ART game number determination state third stop time process performed by the process of step S110-7-2-7 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a third stop time subroutine for the ART game number determination state.

(Step S110-7-2-7-1)
In step S110-7-2-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game D is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game D is set based on a value stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game D is set (step S110-7-2-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-2, and the pseudo game is performed. If it is determined that D is not set (step S110-7-2-7-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-4.

(Step S110-7-2-7-2)
In step S110-7-2-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first stop is the left reel 18. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left stop button 11 is operated in a state where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. If it is determined that the first stop is the left reel 18 (step S110-7-2-7-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-3. When it is determined that one stop is not the left reel 18 (step S110-7-2-7-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-7.

(Step S110-7-2-7-3)
In step S110-7-2-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the lottery flag on during the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the extra lottery flag during the spinning effect in the extra lottery flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-7-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-7.

(Step S110-7-2-7-4)
In step S110-7-2-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game E is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game E is set based on a value stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game E is set (step S110-7-2-7-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-5, and the pseudo game is performed. If it is determined that E is not set (step S110-7-2-7-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-7.

(Step S110-7-2-7-5)
In step S110-7-2-7-5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the first stop is the middle reel 19 or the right reel 20. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether the middle stop button 12 or the right stop button 13 is operated in a state where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating. . If it is determined that the first stop is the middle reel 19 or the right reel 20 (step S110-7-2-7-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-6. And when it is determined that the first stop is not the middle reel 19 or the right reel 20 (step S110-7-2-7-5 = No), step S110-7-2-7-7 The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-7-2-7-6)
In step S110-7-2-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding an extra lottery flag during turning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the extra lottery flag during the spinning effect in the extra lottery flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-7-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-7.

(Step S110-7-2-7-7)
In step S110-7-2-7-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the extra lottery flag at the time of turning effect is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the spinning lottery effect extra lottery flag in the extra lottery flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the extra lottery flag at the time of turning effect is ON (step S110-7-2-7-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-8. If it is determined that the extra lottery flag at the time of the spinning effect is not ON (step S110-7-2-7-7 = No), the subroutine for the third stop time process for the ART game number determination state is ended. Then, the process shifts to the caller of the subroutine of the third stop time process for the ART game number determination state.

(Step S110-7-2-7-8)
In step S110-7-2-7-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the loop counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-9.

(Step S110-7-2-7-9)
In step S110-7-2-7-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the loop counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-7-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-10.

(Step S110-7-2-7-10)
In step S110-7-2-7-10, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the value set in the register to the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the lottery result temporary storage process in step S110-7-2-6-5. Process. Then, when the process of step S110-7-2-7-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-11.

(Step S110-7-2-7-11)
In step S110-7-2-7-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the loop counter is “8”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the loop counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “8”. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter is “8” (step S110-7-2-7-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-12. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter is not “8” (step S110-7-2-7-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-2-7-9.

(Step S110-7-2-7-12)
In step S110-7-2-7-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the loop counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the loop counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S110-7-2-7-12 is completed, the subroutine for the ART game number determination state third stop process is terminated, and the ART game number determination state third stop process subroutine is called. Transfer processing to the original.

  If it is determined that the first special spinning effect is to be executed, “1” times when the “symbols related to BAR” are displayed and the first special spinning effect are executed. "1" times in total will be added for a total of "2" times. When it is determined that the second special spinning effect is to be executed, “1” times for which the “symbols related to BAR” are displayed and “2” for the second special spinning effect are executed. 7 "times, a total of" 8 "times of addition will be executed.

(Processing for determining the number of second ART games when canceling)
Next, based on FIG. 43, the cancellation second ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-7-4 of FIG. 38 will be described. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART game number determination state processing at the time of cancellation.

(Step S110-7-4-1)
In step S110-7-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a second ART game number determination state alternative lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process in place of the benefits that the player can acquire in the pseudo game executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the second ART game number determination state. I do. More specifically, the main CPU 301 first performs a process of acquiring a random number on the assumption that the player has operated the start lever 10 and performs a lottery process. Then, when the process of step S110-7-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-2.

(Step S110-7-4-2)
In step S110-7-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-7-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-3.

(Step S110-7-4-3)
In step S110-7-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the register storing the number of lotteries is “256” which is the upper limit value of the number of lotteries. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “256” (step S110-7-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-4, and the value of the number of lotteries is determined. Is determined not to be “256” (step S110-7-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-5.

(Step S110-7-4-4)
In step S110-7-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-5.

(Step S110-7-4-5)
In step S110-7-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines a continuation rate for the value of the navigation stock counter, and performs a process of storing the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. In addition, since the continuation rate management process in step S110-7-4-5 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. Then, when step S110-7-4-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-6.

(Step S110-7-4-6)
In step S110-7-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution process described in detail with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a privilege to be given to the player when the spinning effect is executed in the pseudo game. In addition, since the process at the time of the spinning effect for the ART game number determination state in step S110-7-4-6 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. It will be. Then, when the process of step S110-7-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-7.

(Step S110-7-4-7)
In step S110-7-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state third stop process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, when it is determined that the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game to which a privilege is given according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 Then, processing for determining a privilege according to the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Since the third stop time process for the ART game number determination state in step S110-7-4-7 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. It becomes. Then, when the process of step S110-7-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-8.

(Step S110-7-4-8)
In step S110-7-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the continuation rate is undetermined. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the continuation rate is undetermined (step S110-7-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-9, and the continuation rate is not undetermined. Is determined (step S110-7-4-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-4-1.

(Step S110-7-4-9)
In step S <b> 110-7-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “ART game number notification state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “ART game number notification state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-7-4-9 ends, the subroutine for the second ART game number determination state process at the time of cancellation ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Processing for determining the number of third ART games when canceling)
Next, based on FIG. 44, the cancellation third ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-7-6 of FIG. 38 will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third ART game number determination state processing at the time of cancellation.

(Step S110-7-6-1)
In step S110-7-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a third ART game number determination state alternative lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 draws in place of the benefits that the player can acquire in the pseudo game executed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state”. Perform the process. More specifically, the main CPU 301 first performs a process of acquiring a random number on the assumption that the player has operated the start lever 10 and performs a lottery process. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-2.

(Step S110-7-6-2)
In step S110-7-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-3.

(Step S110-7-6-3)
In step S110-7-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the register storing the number of lotteries is “256” which is the upper limit value of the number of lotteries. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “256” (step S110-7-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-4, and the value of the number of lotteries is determined. Is determined not to be “256” (step S110-7-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-5.

(Step S110-7-6-4)
In step S110-7-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-5.

(Step S110-7-6-5)
In step S110-7-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines a continuation rate for the value of the navigation stock counter, and performs a process of storing the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Since the continuation rate management process in step S110-7-6-5 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-6.

(Step S110-7-6-6)
In step S110-7-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution process detailed with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a privilege to be given to the player when the spinning effect is executed in the pseudo game. In addition, since the process at the time of performing the spinning effect for the ART game number determination state in step S110-7-6-6 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. It will be. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-7.

(Step S110-7-6-7)
In step S110-7-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state third stop process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, when it is determined that the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game to which a privilege is given according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 Then, processing for determining a privilege according to the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Note that the third stop-time process for the ART game number determination state in step S110-7-6-7 is a process when the pseudo game is canceled, and therefore the process is performed assuming that the pseudo game is executed. It becomes. Then, when the process of step S110-7-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-8.

(Step S110-7-6-8)
In step S110-7-6-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the continuation rate is undetermined. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the continuation rate has not been determined (step S110-7-6-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-9, and the continuation rate is not yet determined. Is determined (step S110-7-6-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-7-6-1.

(Step S110-7-6-9)
In step S <b> 110-7-6-9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “ART game number notification state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “ART game number notification state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-7-6-9 is completed, the subroutine for the third ART game number determination state process at the time of cancellation is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-8 of the information setting process.

(Pseudo game processing)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the pseudo game process performed by the process of step S110-9 of FIG. 36 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of pseudo game processing.

(Step S110-9-1)
In step S110-9-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the pseudo game flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the pseudo game flag stored in the pseudo game flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-2.

(Step S110-9-2)
In step S110-9-2, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game timer setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a predetermined value to the value of the pseudo game timer provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value set in the pseudo game timer can be set as appropriate. Then, when the process of step S110-9-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-3.

(Step S110-9-3)
In step S110-9-3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 designates an initialization area of the main RAM 303 and performs a process of initializing the designated initialization area. Then, when the process of step S110-9-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-4.

(Step S110-9-4)
In step S110-9-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the executed pseudo game is “pseudo game I”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the value stored in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “7”, whereby the pseudo game to be executed is “pseudo game”. I ”is determined. If it is determined that the pseudo game to be executed is “pseudo game I” (step S110-9-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-5, and the pseudo game to be executed is executed. Is determined not to be “pseudo game I” (step S110-9-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-6.

(Step S110-9-5)
In step S110-9-5, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game special stop control number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a stop control number in the register when the pseudo game to be executed is “pseudo game I”. Then, when the process of step S110-9-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-10.

(Step S110-9-6)
In step S110-9-6, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a pseudo game to be executed based on a pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 16) provided in the main ROM 302. More specifically, when the value of the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “4” or “5”, the ART transition determination state pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 16 (A)), the process of determining the pseudo game to be executed is performed, and when the value of the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or “2”, Based on the ART game number determination state pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 16B) provided in the main ROM 302, a process for determining a pseudo game to be executed is performed and provided in the main RAM 303. When the value of the effect storage area is “6”, based on the BB state pseudo game lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 16C). Performs a process of determining a pseudo game to be able to run. Then, when the process of step S110-9-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-7.

(Step S110-9-7)
In step S110-9-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the pseudo game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the pseudo game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-8.

(Step S110-9-8)
In step S110-9-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo game number counter is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “256” which is the upper limit of the number of times of executing the pseudo game. If it is determined that the value of the pseudo game number counter is “256” (step S110-9-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-9, and the value of the pseudo game number counter is set. Is determined not to be “256” (step S110-9-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-10.

(Step S110-9-9)
In step S110-9-9, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game stop control number setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a stop control number in the register in the case of “256” which is the upper limit of the number of executions of the pseudo game number. Then, when the process of step S110-9-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-10.

(Step S110-9-10)
In step S110-9-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a pseudo game command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value set in the register by the pseudo game special stop control number setting process in step S110-9-5 or the pseudo game stop control number setting process in step S110-9-9. In order to transmit a pseudo game command having information related to the value set in the register to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the pseudo game command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-11.

(Step S110-9-11)
In step S110-9-11, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to execute the rotation effect based on the rotation effect lottery table (see FIG. 17) provided in the main ROM 302 at the timing of executing the rotation effect lottery. If it is decided to execute the spinning effect, the process for storing the information related to the spinning effect to be executed in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the main CPU 301 stores information related to the spinning effect to be executed in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the previous pseudo game, the main CPU 301 performs a process of executing the spinning effect. Then, when the process of step S110-9-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-12.

(Step S110-9-12)
In step S110-9-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits a turning effect command having information related to the turning effect set by the turning effect setting process in step S110-9-11 to the sub-control board 400. Processing for setting the spinning effect command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-13.

(Step S110-9-13)
In step S110-9-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel rotation start command during pseudo game play. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits a pseudo-game reel rotation start command having information indicating that rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started to the sub control board 400. Then, processing for setting the reel rotation start command in the pseudo game in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-14.

(Step S110-9-14)
In step S110-9-14, the main CPU 301 performs a reel operation management process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the reel rotation start process described in step S113. Then, when the process of step S110-9-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-15.

(Step S110-9-15)
In step S110-9-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo game timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo game timer provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the pseudo game timer is “0” (step S110-9-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-16, and the value of the pseudo game timer is “0”. If it is determined that it is not “0” (step S110-9-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-18.

(Step S110-9-16)
In step S110-9-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the spinning effect. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the value of the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-17.

(Step S110-9-17)
In step S110-9-17, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a time-up command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value of the pseudo game timer provided in the main RAM 303 to “0” when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating during the pseudo game. In order to transmit a time-up command having information indicating that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 has not been detected until the sub-control board 400, the time-up command Is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-24.

(Step S110-9-18)
In step S110-9-18, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a start lever timer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the value of the start lever timer in a register. Here, the value set in the start lever timer can be set as appropriate. Then, when the process of step S110-9-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19.

(Step S110-9-19)
In step S110-9-19, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo-lever start lever detection process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the start lever timer has become “0” during the pseudo game. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-20.

(Step S110-9-20)
In step S110-9-20, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “3” or less. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value stored in the effect storage area is “3” or less, based on the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. And when it determines with the value stored in the production | presentation storage area being "3" or less (step S110-9-20 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S110-9-21, and production storage. When it is determined that the value stored in the area is not “3” or less (step S110-9-20 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-24.

(Step S110-9-21)
In step S110-9-21, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect deleting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first acquires information on the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that are first operated in the pseudo game, and at the timing of erasing information related to the spinning effect. Processing for determining whether or not there is present is performed. And when it is the timing which deletes the information regarding a rotation effect, the process which clears the value of the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-21 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22.

(Step S110-9-22)
In step S110-9-22, the main CPU 301 performs a process according to the state during display during pseudo game, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the state managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-23.

(Step S110-9-23)
In step S110-9-23, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game is over. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires information on the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that are initially operated in the pseudo game, and based on the acquired information, the main CPU 301 is at the end of the pseudo game. The process which determines whether or not is performed. If it is determined that the pseudo game is over (step S110-9-23 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-24, and it is determined that the pseudo game is not over. (Step S110-9-23 = No), the process proceeds to Step S110-9-2.

(Step S110-9-24)
In step S110-9-24, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game end process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 designates an initialization area of the main RAM 303 and performs a process of initializing the designated initialization area. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the pseudo game flag stored in the pseudo game flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S110-9-24 is completed, the pseudo game process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-10 of the information setting process.

(Reel operation management process)
Next, based on FIG. 46, the reel operation management process performed by the process of step S110-9-14 in FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a subroutine of reel operation management processing.

(Step S110-9-14-1)
In step S110-9-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-14-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-14-2.

(Step S110-9-14-2)
In step S110-9-14-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating at a constant speed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the rotation speeds of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are constant speeds. If it is determined that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating at a constant speed (step S110-9-14-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-14-3. When it is determined that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are not rotating at a constant speed (step S110-9-14-2 = No), the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel. The process of step S110-9-14-2 is repeatedly executed until 20 becomes constant speed rotation.

(Step S110-9-14-3)
In step S110-9-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing during reel rotation. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed, and the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 are pressed. In the case of pressing, among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the operated stop button. Then, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, the pressing reference position is acquired and stored in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Next, the main CPU 301 has a stop table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the value of the winning combination storage area provided in the main RAM 303, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop. Based on the operation order of the button 13, etc., a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” to “4” frames is performed, and the determined number of sliding frames is determined as a sliding frame provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to store in the number storage area. Then, the main CPU 301 rotates based on the value stored in the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the value stored in the sliding frame number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. A process of temporarily stopping the middle left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-14-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-14-4.

(Step S110-9-14-4)
In step S110-9-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in a state where the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are all rotating during the pseudo game. Then, a process of determining whether or not the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are temporarily stopped is performed. If it is determined that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are temporarily stopped (step S110-9-14-4 = Yes), the reel operation management process subroutine is terminated, and the pseudo game process is completed. The process proceeds to step S110-9-15. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are not temporarily stopped (step S110-9-14-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-14-2. Transition.

(Start lever detection process during pseudo game)
Next, based on FIG. 47, the pseudo lever start lever detection process performed by the process of step S110-9-19 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of start lever detection processing during pseudo game.

(Step S110-9-19-1)
In step S110-9-19-1, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever timer setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the start lever timer set in the register by the process of step S110-9-18 to the start lever timer provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-2.

(Step S110-9-19-2)
In step S110-9-19-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the start lever timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value set in the start lever timer provided in the main RAM 303 has become “0”. If it is determined that the value of the start lever timer is “0” (step S110-9-19-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4, where the start lever timer If it is determined that the value is not “0” (step S110-9-19-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-3.

(Step S110-9-19-3)
In step S110-9-19-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10 sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10. If it is determined that the start switch 10sw is ON (step S110-9-19-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4, and the start switch 10sw is not ON. Is determined (step S110-9-19-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-2.

(Step S110-9-19-4)
In step S110-9-19-4, the main CPU 301 performs a state-by-state process during the pseudo game which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing according to the state managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4 is completed, the subroutine of the start lever detection process during the pseudo game is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(Processing according to the state at the start during pseudo game)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the process according to the state at the start time in the pseudo game performed by the process of step S110-9-19-4 of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the state-specific processing at the start during pseudo game.

(Step S110-9-19-4-1)
In step S <b> 110-9-19-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the state is the “first ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is the “first ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-19-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-2, If it is determined that the state is not the “first ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-19-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-3.

(Step S110-9-19-4-2)
In step S110-9-19-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process described with reference to FIG. When the process of step S110-9-19-4-2 ends, the subroutine of the process according to the start time state during the pseudo game ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(Step S110-9-19-4-3)
In step S <b> 110-9-19-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is in the “second ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is the “second ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-19-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-4. If it is determined that the state is not the “second ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-19-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-5.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4)
In step S110-9-19-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a second ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process described with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-4 is completed, the subroutine for the start-by-state process during the pseudo game is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(Step S110-9-19-4-5)
In step S <b> 110-9-19-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “third ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. And when it determines with it being "a 3rd ART game number determination state" (step S110-9-19-4-5 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S110-9-19-4-6, When it is determined that the state is not the “third ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-19-4-5 = No), the subroutine for the process according to the start time state during the pseudo game is ended, and the pseudo game process is completed. The process proceeds to step S110-9-20.

(Step S110-9-19-4-6)
In step S110-9-19-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a third ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process described with reference to FIG. When the process of step S110-9-19-4-6 is completed, the subroutine of the state-by-start process during the pseudo game is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(First ART Game Number Determination State Processing)
Next, the first ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-19-4-2 of FIG. 48 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first ART game number determination state processing.

(Step S110-9-19-4-2-1)
In step S110-9-19-4-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-2-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-2-2.

(Step S110-9-19-4-2-2)
In step S110-9-19-4-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries stored in the register is “256” which is the upper limit of the number of lotteries. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “256” (step S110-9-19-4-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-2-3. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is not “256” (step S110-9-19-4-2-2 = No), step S110-9-19-4-2-4 The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-9-19-4-2-3)
In step S110-9-19-4-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-2-4.

(Step S110-9-19-4-2-4)
In step S110-9-19-4-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines a continuation rate for the value of the navigation stock counter, and performs a process of storing the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-2-5.

(Step S110-9-19-4-2-5)
In step S110-9-19-4-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution process detailed with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a privilege to be given to the player when the spinning effect is executed in the pseudo game. When the process of step S110-9-19-4-2-5 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART game number determination state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(Second ART Game Number Determination State Process)
Next, the second ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-19-4-4 of FIG. 48 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART game number determination state processing.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4-1)
In step S110-9-19-4-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-4-2.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4-2)
In step S110-9-19-4-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries stored in the register is “256” which is the upper limit of the number of lotteries. When it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “256” (step S110-9-19-4-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-4-2-3. , And if it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is not “256” (step S110-9-19-4-4-2 = No), step S110-9-19-4-4-2-4 The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4-3-3)
In step S110-9-19-4-4--3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S110-9-19-4-4-3 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S110-9-19-4-4-4.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4-4)
In step S110-9-19-4-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines the continuation rate for the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 and stores the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform processing. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-4-5.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4-5)
In step S110-9-19-4-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state spinning effect execution process detailed with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a privilege to be given to the player when the spinning effect is executed in the pseudo game. When the process of step S110-9-19-4-4-5 ends, the subroutine for the second ART game number determination state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(3rd ART game number determination state process)
Next, the third ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-19-4-6 of FIG. 48 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third ART game number determination state processing.

(Step S110-9-19-4-6-1)
In step S110-9-19-4-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-6-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-4-2.

(Step S110-9-19-4-4-2)
In step S110-9-19-4-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries is “256”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the number of lotteries stored in the register is “256” which is the upper limit of the number of lotteries. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is “256” (step S110-9-19-4-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-6-3. If it is determined that the value of the number of lotteries is not “256” (step S110-9-19-4-6-2 = No), step S110-9-19-4-6-4 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-9-19-4-6-3)
In step S110-9-19-4-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-6-4.

(Step S110-9-19-4-6-4)
In step S110-9-19-4-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines a continuation rate for the value of the navigation stock counter, and performs a process of storing the determined continuation rate in the continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-19-4-6-5.

(Step S110-9-19-4-6-5)
In step S110-9-19-4-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state spinning effect execution process described in detail with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a privilege to be given to the player when the spinning effect is executed in the pseudo game. Then, when the process of step S110-9-19-4-6-5 is completed, the subroutine for the third ART game number determination state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-20 of the pseudo game process.

(Processing by state during display during pseudo game)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the process according to the state at the time of display during pseudo game performed by the process of step S110-9-22 of FIG. 45 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the state-specific processing during display during pseudo game.

(Step S110-9-22-1)
In step S110-9-22-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is the “first ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-22-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-2, and “the first ART game is determined”. If it is determined that it is not the “number determination state” (step S110-9-22-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-3.

(Step S110-9-22-2)
In step S110-9-22-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process described with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-2 ends, the subroutine for the state-by-state display process during pseudo game ends, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

(Step S110-9-22-3)
In step S110-9-22-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “second ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the state is the “second ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-22-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-4, and the “second ART game is determined”. If it is determined that it is not the “number determination state” (step S110-9-22-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-5.

(Step S110-9-22-4)
In step S110-9-22-4, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time second ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process described with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-4 is completed, the subroutine for the state-by-state display process during pseudo game is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

(Step S110-9-22-5)
In step S110-9-22-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “third ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. When it is determined that the state is the “third ART game number determination state” (step S110-9-22-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-6, and the “third ART game is determined”. If it is determined that it is not “number determination state” (step S110-9-22-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-7.

(Step S110-9-22-6)
In step S110-9-22-6, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time third ART game number determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the continuation rate management process described with reference to FIG. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-6 is completed, the subroutine for the state-by-state display process during pseudo game is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

(Step S110-9-22-7)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is in the “ART transition determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART transition determination state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “ART transition determination state” (step S110-9-22-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8, and the “ART transition determination state” If it is determined that it is not (step S110-9-22-7 = No), the subroutine for the state-by-state display process during pseudo game is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process. To do.

(Step S110-9-22-8)
In step S110-9-22-8, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART transition determination state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 sets the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or “the first state” when “the combination of symbols related to BAR” is displayed on the active line. Processing to shift to “3 ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-8 is completed, the subroutine for the state display process during pseudo game is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

(Processing for determining the number of first ART games during display)
Next, the display-time first ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-22-2 of FIG. 52 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display-time first ART game number determination state process.

(Step S110-9-22-2-1)
In step S110-9-22-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state third stop process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, when it is determined that the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game to which a privilege is given according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 Then, processing for determining a privilege according to the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-2-2.

(Step S110-9-22-2-2)
In step S110-9-22-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the continuation rate is not set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuation rate is not set based on a value stored in a continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the continuation rate is not set (step S110-9-22-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-2-3, and the continuation rate is If it is determined that it has not been set (step S110-9-22-2-2 = No), the subroutine for the first ART game number determination state process at the time of display is terminated, and step S110-9 of the pseudo game process is completed. The process is shifted to -23.

(Step S110-9-22-2-3)
In step S110-9-22-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game is over. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is an operation order for ending the pseudo game is performed. If it is determined that the pseudo game is over (step S110-9-22-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-2-4, and the pseudo game is over. If it is determined that it is not (step S110-9-22-2-3 = No), the subroutine for the first ART game number determination state process at the time of display is terminated, and step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process is ended. The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-9-22-2-4)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “ART game number notification state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “ART game number notification state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-2-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-2-5.

(Step S110-9-22-2-5)
In step S110-9-22-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing at the end of the first ART game number determination state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a register or the like in which the number of lotteries is set to “0”. When the process of step S110-9-22-2-5 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART game number determination state process at the time of display is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pseudo game is to be continued in the first ART game number determination state process at the time of display, the left stop in which “the symbol related to BAR” is displayed on the active line The operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 will be notified by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like. Here, it is determined that the pseudo game is continued, and the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which “the symbol related to BAR” is displayed on the active line is notified. Regardless, it is assumed that the player has made a mistake in the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. In this case, even if it is determined to continue the pseudo game, the pseudo game is ended. For this reason, the first ART game number determination state alternative lottery process of step S110-7-2-1 is performed in the process at the end of the first ART game number determination state of step S110-9-22-2-5. Thereby, even if the player makes a mistake in the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the player's loss can be compensated.

  In the present embodiment, the first ART game number determination state alternative lottery process in step S110-7-2-1 is executed in the process at the end of the first ART game number determination state in step S110-9-22-2-5. By doing so, the player's loss is compensated when the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the wrong order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the process at the end of the first ART game number determination state in step S110-9-22-2-5, the player is compared with the alternative lottery process for the first ART game number determination state in step S110-7-2-1. It is also possible to make compensation that is disadvantageous to the user. Thereby, the player can compensate for the loss of the player while urging the user to make sure that the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not mistaken.

(Processing for determining the number of second ART games during display)
Next, the display-time second ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-22-4 of FIG. 52 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display-time second ART game number determination state processing.

(Step S110-9-22-4-1)
In step S110-9-22-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state third stop process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, when it is determined that the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game to which a privilege is given according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 Then, processing for determining a privilege according to the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-4-2.

(Step S110-9-22-4-2)
In step S110-9-22-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the continuation rate is not set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuation rate is not set based on a value stored in a continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the continuation rate is not set (step S110-9-22-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-4-3, and the continuation rate is If it is determined that it has not been set (step S110-9-22-4-2 = No), the subroutine for the display-time second ART game number determination state process is terminated, and step S110-9 of the pseudo game process is ended. The process is shifted to -23.

(Step S110-9-22-4-3)
In step S110-9-22-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game is over. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is an operation order for ending the pseudo game is performed. If it is determined that the pseudo game is over (step S110-9-22-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-4-4, and the pseudo game is over. If it is determined that it is not (step S110-9-22-4-3 = No), the subroutine for the second ART game number determination state process at the time of display is terminated, and step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process is ended. The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-9-22-4-4)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “ART game number notification state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “ART game number notification state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-24-4-5.

(Step S110-9-22-4-5)
In step S110-9-22-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing at the end of the second ART game number determination state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a register or the like in which the number of lotteries is set to “0”. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-4-5 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time second ART game number determination state is ended, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pseudo game is to be continued in the display-time second ART game number determination state process, the left stop in which “the symbol related to BAR” is displayed on the active line The operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified to the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like. Here, it is determined that the pseudo game is continued, and the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which “the symbol related to BAR” is displayed on the active line is notified. Regardless, it is assumed that the player has made a mistake in the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. In this case, even if it is determined to continue the pseudo game, the pseudo game is ended. Therefore, the second ART game number determination state alternative lottery process of step S110-7-4-1 is performed in the second ART game number determination state end process of step S110-9-22-4-5. Thereby, even if the player makes a mistake in the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the player's loss can be compensated.

  In the present embodiment, the second ART game number determination state alternative lottery process of step S110-7-4-1 is executed in the second ART game number determination state end process of step S110-9-22-4-5. By doing so, the player's loss is compensated when the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the wrong order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the process at the end of the second ART game number determination state in step S110-9-22-4-5, the player is compared with the alternative lottery process for the second ART game number determination state in step S110-7-4-1. It is also possible to make compensation that is disadvantageous to the user. Thereby, the player can compensate for the loss of the player while urging the user to make sure that the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not mistaken.

(Processing for determining the number of 3rd ART games during display)
Next, the display-time third ART game number determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-22-6 of FIG. 52 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display time third ART game number determination state process.

(Step S110-9-22-6-1)
In step S110-9-22-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs the ART game number determination state third stop process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, when it is determined that the main CPU 301 executes a pseudo game to which a privilege is given according to the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11 Then, processing for determining a privilege according to the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-6-2.

(Step S110-9-22-6-2)
In step S110-9-22-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the continuation rate is not set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuation rate is not set based on a value stored in a continuation rate storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the continuation rate is not set (step S110-9-22-6-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-6-3, and the continuation rate is If it is determined that it has not been set (step S110-9-22-6-2 = No), the subroutine for the display-time second ART game number determination state process is terminated, and step S110-9 of the pseudo game process is completed. The process is shifted to -23.

(Step S110-9-22-6-3)
In step S110-9-22-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game is over. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is an operation order for ending the pseudo game is performed. If it is determined that the pseudo game is over (step S110-9-22-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-6-4, and the pseudo game is over. If it is determined that it is not (step S110-9-22-6-3 = No), the subroutine of the display time third ART game number determination state process is terminated, and the pseudo game process step S110-9-23 is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S110-9-22-6-4)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “ART game number notification state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “ART game number notification state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-6-6.

(Step S110-9-22-6-5)
In step S110-9-22-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing at the end of the third ART game number determination state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a register or the like in which the number of lotteries is set to “0”. When the process of step S110-9-22-6-5 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time third ART game number determination state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the pseudo game is to be continued in the display-time third ART game number determination state process, the left stop in which “the symbol related to BAR” is displayed on the active line The operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified to the liquid crystal display device 31 and the like. Here, it is determined that the pseudo game is continued, and the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which “the symbol related to BAR” is displayed on the active line is notified. Regardless, it is assumed that the player has made a mistake in the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. In this case, even if it is determined to continue the pseudo game, the pseudo game is ended. Therefore, the third ART game number determination state alternative lottery process of step S110-7-6-1 is performed in the third ART game number determination state end process of step S110-9-22-6-5. Thereby, even if the player makes a mistake in the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the player's loss can be compensated.

  In the present embodiment, the third ART game number determination state alternative lottery process in step S110-7-6-1 is executed in the third ART game number determination state end process in step S110-9-22-6-5. By doing so, the player's loss is compensated when the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the wrong order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the process at the end of the third ART game number determination state in step S110-9-22-6-5, the player is compared with the alternative lottery process for the third ART game number determination state in step S110-7-6-1. It is also possible to make compensation that is disadvantageous to the user. Thereby, the player can compensate for the loss of the player while urging the user to make sure that the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is not mistaken.

(Process for displaying ART transition judgment state)
Next, the display-time ART transition determination state process performed by the process of step S110-9-22-8 of FIG. 52 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine for display ART transition determination state processing.

(Step S110-9-22-8-1)
In step S110-9-22-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the BAR is aligned. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 is an operation order in which “the symbol related to BAR” is allowed to be aligned on the active line. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the BAR is aligned (step S110-9-22-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8-2, and it is determined that the BAR is not aligned. If it is determined (step S110-9-22-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8-8.

(Step S110-9-22-8-2)
In step S110-9-22-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs ART transition determination state transition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Here, in the present embodiment, the executed pseudo game is “single BAR aligned A”, “single BAR aligned B”, or “single BAR aligned C”, and includes a left stop button 11, a middle stop button 12, When the operation order of the right stop button 13 is an operation order that allows the “symbols related to BAR” to be aligned on the active line, it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. The executed pseudo game is “double BAR aligned A”, “double BAR aligned B”, or “double BAR aligned C”, and the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is , When it is an operation order that allows the “symbols related to BAR” to be aligned on the active line, it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination ready state”. That is, this is only an example, it may be determined how or to migrate to want to migrate to "a 1ART game number determination ready state", or "second 3ART game number determination ready state". Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8-3.

(Step S110-9-22-8-3)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, as a result of performing the transition process for the ART transition determination state in step S110-9-22-8-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to transition to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” (step S110-9-22-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8-4. If it is determined that it has not been determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” (step S110-9-22-8-3 = No), step S110-9-22- The process proceeds to 8-5.

(Step S110-9-22-8-4)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-8-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8-6.

(Step S110-9-22-8-5)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “a third ART game number determination preparation state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-8-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-9-22-8-6.

(Step S110-9-22-8-6)
In step S110-9-22-8-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-8-6 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART transition determination state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

(Step S110-9-22-8-7)
In step S <b> 110-9-22-8-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “normal state” as a state managed by the main control board 300. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110-9-22-8-7 is completed, the subroutine for the display time ART transition determination state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110-9-23 of the pseudo game process.

(Processing by status at start)
Next, based on FIG. 57, a description will be given of the start-time state process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing by state at start time.

(Step S111-1)
In step S <b> 111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. When it is determined that the state is “normal state” (step S111-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2, and when it is determined that the state is not “normal state” (step S111). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-3.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a normal state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Then, when the process of step S111-2 is completed, the subroutine of the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “bonus preparation state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is “bonus preparation state” (step S111-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4. If it is determined that the state is not “bonus preparation state” ( Step S111-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-5.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first bonus preparation state”, the main CPU 301 performs a first bonus preparation state process, which will be described later, and the “second bonus preparation state”. If so, the second bonus preparation state process described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-5)
In step S111-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “bonus state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state is “bonus state” (step S111-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6, and if it is determined that the state is not “bonus state” (step S111). −5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-7.

(Step S111-6)
In step S111-6, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the first BB state process described later when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state”, and when the state is the “second BB state”, If the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first special BB state”, the first special BB state process described later is performed and the “second special BB state” is performed. In the case of “state”, the second special BB state process described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-7)
In step S <b> 111-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not it is in the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is “ART game number determination preparation state” (step S111-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8, and is determined not to be “ART game number determination preparation state”. If it is determined (step S111-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-9.

(Step S111-8)
In step S111-8, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART game number determination preparation state process to be described later, In the case of the “game number determination preparation state”, the second ART game number determination preparation state process described later is performed, and when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, a third ART game number determination preparation state process described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-8 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-9)
In step S <b> 111-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “art bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART bonus state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the bonus state is during ART (step S111-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10, and if it is determined that the bonus state is not during ART. (Step S111-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S111-11.

(Step S111-10)
In step S111-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus state process during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “the first BB state during ART”, the main CPU 301 performs a process for the first BB state during ART described later, and “the second BB state during ART”. If it is, the processing for the second BB state during ART described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-10 is completed, the subroutine of the start state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-11)
In step S111-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART ready state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is “ART ready state” (step S111-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-12, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART ready state” ( Step S111-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-13.

(Step S111-12)
In step S111-12, the main CPU 301 performs an ART preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus initial hit determination process, which will be described later. Then, when the process of step S111-12 is completed, the subroutine of the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-13)
In step S111-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state is “ART state” (step S111-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-14, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART state” (step S111). −13 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-15.

(Step S111-14)
In step S111-14, the main CPU 301 performs ART state processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus initial hit determination process, which will be described later. Then, when the process of step S111-14 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-15)
In step S <b> 111-15, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not it is in the “ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is “ART added state” (step S111-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART added state” (step S111-15 = Yes) Step S111-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-17.

(Step S111-16)
In step S111-16, the main CPU 301 performs an ART addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state”, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART added state process, which will be described later, and is in the “second ART added state”. The second ART addition state process described later is performed. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART addition state”, the third ART addition state process described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-16 is completed, the subroutine for the start-time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-17)
In step S111-17, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number notification state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus initial hit determination process, which will be described later. When the process of step S111-17 is completed, the subroutine for the start state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the normal state process performed by the process of step S111-2 of FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S111-2-1)
In step S111-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-2.

(Step S111-2-2)
In step S111-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs bonus initial hit determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, processing for turning on the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-3.

(Step S111-2-3)
In step S111-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs an ART lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 shifts to the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20B) provided in the main ROM 302 or transitions to the bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state transition. Based on the lottery table (see FIG. 20C), a process of determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination ready state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-4.

(Step S111-2-4)
In step S111-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a precursor setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 plays the game until the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “first bonus preparation state” when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Process to determine the number. In addition, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the determined number of games to the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-5.

(Step S111-2-5)
In step S111-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a mode transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300. In addition, when it is determined to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300, a process for shifting the mode managed by the main control board 300 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-6.

(Step S111-2-6)
In step S111-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs ceiling determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “ceiling mode” as a mode managed by the main control board 300 when the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “999”. Do. When the process of step S111-2-6 ends, the normal state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Bonus first hit judgment process)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the bonus initial hit determination process performed by the process of step S111-2-2 in FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine of bonus initial hit determination processing.

(Step S111-2-2-1)
In step S111-2-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won based on a value stored in a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that “bonus” is won (step S111-2-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2-2-2, and “bonus” is won. If it is determined that the bonus has not been reached (step S111-2-2-1 = No), the bonus initial hit determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the bonus initial hit determination process.

(Step S111-2-2-2)
In step S <b> 111-2-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the “ART game number determination preparation state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is “ART game number determination preparation state” (step S111-2-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2-2-2, and “ART game number” is determined. If it is determined that the state is not “determination ready state” (step S111-2-2-2 = No), the bonus initial hit determination process subroutine is terminated, and the bonus initial hit determination process subroutine is processed. Transition.

(Step S111-2-2-3)
In step S111-2-2-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-2-2-3 is completed, the bonus initial hit determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to a caller of the bonus initial hit determination process subroutine.

(ART lottery process)
Next, the ART lottery process performed by the process of step S111-2-3 in FIG. 58 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 60 shows a subroutine for the ART lottery process.

(Step S111-2-3-1)
In step S111-2-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is ON is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S111-2-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-9, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not ON (step S111-2-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-2.

(Step S111-2-3-2)
In step S111-2-3-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “same color black BB” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “same color black BB” is determined as the winning combination based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that “same color black BB” has been won (step S111-2-3-2 = Yes), the ART lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the caller of the ART lottery processing subroutine is processed. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that “same color black BB” has not been won (step S111-2-3-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-3.

(Step S111-2-3-3)
In step S111-2-3-3, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “bonus” is determined as the winning combination based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that “bonus” has been won (step S111-2-3-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-4, and “bonus” has not been won. Is determined (step S111-2-3-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-5.

(Step S111-2-3-4)
In step S111-2-3-4, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus winning ART lottery process. Specifically, after the “bonus state” is completed, the main CPU 301, based on the bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 20C), A process of drawing whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination ready state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-3-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-6.

(Step S111-2-3-5)
In step S111-2-3-5, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus non-winning ART lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the “art game number determination preparation state” based on the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20B) provided in the main ROM 302. A process of drawing whether or not to shift to is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-6.

(Step S111-2-3-6)
In step S111-2-3-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery result of the bonus lottery ART lottery process in step S111-2-3-4 or the bonus non-winner ART lottery process of step S111-2-3-5. As a result, a process of determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” is performed is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-2-3-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-2-3-7, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-2-3-6 = No), the ART lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART lottery processing subroutine.

(Step S111-2-3-7)
In step S111-2-3-7, the main CPU 301 performs ART game number determination state winning flag setting processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery result of the bonus lottery ART lottery process in step S111-2-3-4 or the bonus non-winner ART lottery process of step S111-2-3-5. As a result, if it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. Is turned on, and if it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, the third ART game in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. A process of turning on the number determination state winning flag is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-3-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-8.

(Step S111-2-3-8)
In step S111-2-3-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-2-3-8 is completed, the ART lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART lottery process subroutine.

(Step S111-2-3-9)
In step S111-2-3-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “bonus” is determined as the winning combination based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that “bonus” has been won (step S111-2-3-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-10, and “bonus” has not been won. Is determined (step S111-2-3-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-11.

(Step S111-2-3-10)
In step S111-2-3-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus winning navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the bonus winning time navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28A). A process of drawing whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-12.

(Step S111-2-3-11)
In step S111-2-3-11, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus non-winning navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the bonus non-winning navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28B). A process for lottery of whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-2-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2-3-12.

(Step S111-2-3-12)
In step S111-2-3-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the result of the lottery by the bonus winning navigation stock addition lottery process in step S111-2-3-10 or the bonus non-winning navigation stock addition in step S111-2-3-11. As a result of the lottery process, it is determined whether or not it is decided to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. And when it determines with having won (step S111-2-3-12 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-2-3-13, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-2-3-12 = No), the ART lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART lottery processing subroutine.

(Step S111-2-3-13)
In step S111-2-3-13, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value determined by the bonus winning navigation stock addition lottery process in step S111-2-3-10 or the bonus non-winning navigation stock in step S111-2-3-11. A process of adding the value determined by the addition lottery process to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the process of step S111-2-3-13 is completed, the ART lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART lottery process subroutine.

(Ceiling judgment processing)
Next, the ceiling determination process performed by the process of step S111-2-6 of FIG. 58 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine for ceiling determination processing.

(Step S111-2-6-1)
In step S111-2-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “999”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “999”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “999” (step S111-2-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-2-6-2, and the ceiling game is performed. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “999” (step S111-2-6-1 = No), the ceiling determination subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process. .

(Step S111-2-6-2)
In step S111-2-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the mode managed by the main control board 300 to “ceiling”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting “ceiling mode” as a mode managed by the main control board 300. When the process of step S111-2-6-2 is completed, the ceiling determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Bonus preparation status processing)
Next, the bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-4 of FIG. 57 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of bonus preparation state processing.

(Step S111-4-1)
In step S111-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first bonus preparation state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first bonus preparation state” (step S111-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-2 and is not the “first bonus preparation state”. Is determined (step S111-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3.

(Step S111-4-2)
In step S111-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a first bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs the ART lottery process described with reference to FIG. When the process of step S111-4-2 ends, the bonus preparation state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-4-3)
In step S111-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a second bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART added state acquisition lottery process and the like which will be described later. When the process of step S111-4-3 ends, the bonus preparation state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for the first bonus preparation state)
Next, based on FIG. 63, the process for the 1st bonus preparation state performed by the process of step S111-4-2 of FIG. 62 is demonstrated. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first bonus preparation state process.

(Step S111-4-2-1)
In step S111-4-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs an ART lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 enters the “ART game number determination preparation state” based on the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20B) provided in the main ROM 302. Processing for determining whether or not to migrate is performed. When the process of step S111-4-2-1 is completed, the first bonus preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Second bonus preparation state process)
Next, the second bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-4-3 of FIG. 62 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second bonus preparation state process.

(Step S111-4-3-1)
In step S111-4-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs an ART added state acquisition lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to acquire the “ART added state” based on the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29A) provided in the main ROM 302. The process etc. which draw a lot is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3.

(Step S111-4-3-3)
In step S111-4-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs a second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the “second ART game number determination state”. When the process of step S111-4-3-3 is completed, the second bonus preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(ART addition status acquisition lottery process)
Next, the ART added state acquisition lottery process performed by the process of step S111-4-3-1 in FIG. 64 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART added state acquisition lottery process.

(Step S111-4-3-1-1)
In step S111-4-3-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs an ART added state lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to acquire the “ART added state” based on the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29A) provided in the main ROM 302. A process of drawing lots is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-1-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-1-2.

(Step S111-4-3-1-2)
In step S111-4-3-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first ART added state” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first ART added state” is won as a result of performing the ART added state lottery process in step S111-4-3-1-1. If it is determined that the “first ART added state” has been won (step S111-4-3-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-1-3. If it is determined that the “first ART added state” is not won (step S111-4-3-1-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-1-4.

(Step S111-4-3-1-3)
In step S111-4-3-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S111-4-3-1-3 is completed, the ART added state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART added state acquisition lottery processing subroutine.

(Step S111-4-3-1-4)
In step S111-4-3-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second ART added state” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second ART added state” is won as a result of performing the ART added state lottery process in step S111-4-3-1-1. And when it determines with having won the "2nd ART addition state" (step S111-4-3-1-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-4-3-1-5, If it is determined that the “second ART added state” is not won (step S111-4-3-1-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-1-6.

(Step S111-4-3-1-5)
In step S111-4-3-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S111-4-3-1-5 is completed, the ART added state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART added state acquisition lottery processing subroutine.

(Step S111-4-3-1-6)
In step S111-4-3-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “third ART added state” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “third ART added state” is won as a result of performing the ART added state lottery process in step S111-4-3-1-1. If it is determined that the “third ART added state” is won (step S111-4-3-1-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-1-7. If it is determined that the “3rd ART added state” has not been won (step S111-4-3-1-6 = No), the ART added state acquisition lottery process is terminated and the ART added state acquisition lottery process is completed. The processing shifts to the subroutine call source.

(Step S111-4-3-1-7)
In step S111-4-3-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the third ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the third ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S111-4-3-1-7 is completed, the ART added state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the ART added state acquisition lottery processing subroutine.

(Second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process)
Next, the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process performed by the process of step S111-4-3-3 of FIG. 64 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process.

(Step S111-4-3-3-1)
In step S111-4-3-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is ON is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S111-4-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-8. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S111-4-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2.

(Step S111-4-3-3-2)
In step S <b> 111-4-3-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won based on a value stored in a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that “bonus” is won (step S111-4-3-3-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-3, and “bonus” "" Is determined not to be won (step S111-4-3-3-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-4.

(Step S111-4-3-2-3)
In step S111-4-3-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 enters the “ART game number determination ready state” based on the bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 20C) provided in the main ROM 302. The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-3-2-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-5.

(Step S111-4-3-2-4)
In step S111-4-3-2-4, the main CPU 301 conducts a bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the “art game number determination preparation state” based on the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 20B). A process of drawing whether or not to shift to is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-3-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-5.

(Step S111-4-3-2-5)
In step S111-4-3-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the result of the lottery in the step S111-4-3-2-3 for the bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process or the step S111-4-3-2-4. As a result of the lottery by the bonus game non-winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process, it is determined whether or not it is determined to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state”. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-4-3-2-5 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S111-4-3-2-6, and it was determined with having not been won. If this is the case (step S111-4-3-2-5 = No), the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is processed. Transition.

(Step S111-4-3-2-6)
In step S111-4-3-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the result of the lottery in the step S111-4-3-2-3 for the bonus winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process or the step S111-4-3-2-4. When it is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery process based on the bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process, the second ART game provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. The process of turning on the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the number determination state winning flag storage area is performed, and the lottery is performed by the bonus game time determination ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process in step S111-4-3-3-2 As a result of the above, or a bonus non-winning ART game number determination preparation state acquisition lottery process in step S111-4-3-2-4 As a result of the lottery, if it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination ready state”, the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303 is determined as the third ART game number determination state in the winning flag storage area. Processing to turn ON the winning flag. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-3-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-7.

(Step S111-4-3-2-7)
In step S111-4-3-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the processing of step S111-4-3-2-7 is completed, the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is processed. Transition.

(Step S111-4-3-2-8)
In step S111-4-3-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won based on a value stored in a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” has been won (step S111-4-3-2-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-9, and the “bonus” "" Is determined not to be won (step S111-4-3-2-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-2-10.

(Step S111-4-3-2-9)
In step S111-4-3-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus stock navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the bonus winning time navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28A). A process of drawing whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-3-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-11.

(Step S111-4-3-3-2-10)
In step S111-4-3-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus non-winning navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the bonus non-winning navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28B). A process for lottery of whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-4-3-3-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4-3-3-2-11.

(Step S111-4-3-2-11)
In step S111-4-3-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process for bonus winning at step S111-4-3-2-9 or the bonus non-winning at step S111-4-3-2-11. As a result of the lottery by the navigation stock addition lottery process, a process for determining whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-4-3-2-11 = Yes), it transfers to a process to step S111-4-3-2-12, and it determined with having not been won. If this is the case (step S111-4-3-2-11 = No), the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery processing subroutine is processed. Transition.

(Step S111-4-3-2-12)
In step S111-4-3-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value determined by the bonus stock at the time of bonus winning at step S111-4-3-2-9 or the bonus non-winning at step S111-4-3-2-10. Processing for adding the value determined by the hourly navistock addition lottery process to the value of the navistock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the processing of step S111-4-3-2-12 is completed, the subroutine for the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process is ended, and the process is performed on the caller of the subroutine for the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process. Transition.

(Bonus state processing)
Next, the bonus state process performed by the process of step S111-6 of FIG. 66 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of bonus state processing.

(Step S111-6-1)
In step S <b> 111-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first BB state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first BB state” (step S111-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-2, and it is determined that the state is not the “first BB state”. In the case (step S111-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-3.

(Step S111-6-2)
In step S111-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a first BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process described later when the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. When the process of step S111-6-2 ends, the bonus state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-6-3)
In step S <b> 111-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second BB state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second BB state” (step S111-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-4, and it is determined that the state is not the “second BB state”. In this case (step S111-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-5.

(Step S111-6-4)
In step S111-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a second BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process described later when the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. When the processing in step S111-6-4 is completed, the bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 in the main loop processing.

(Step S111-6-5)
In step S <b> 111-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first special BB state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first special BB state” based on the information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first special BB state” (step S111-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6 and is not the “first special BB state”. Is determined (step S111-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7.

(Step S111-6-6)
In step S111-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a first special BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process, which will be described later. When the process of step S111-6-6 ends, the bonus state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-6-7)
In step S111-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a second special BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number addition lottery process or the like until the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 becomes “3”. When the process of step S111-6-7 ends, the bonus state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for 1st BB state)
Next, based on FIG. 68, the 1BB state process performed by the process of step S111-6-2 of FIG. 67 is demonstrated. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first BB state process.

(Step S111-6-2-1)
In step S111-6-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag in the ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S111-6-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-2-2, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determined state winning flag is not ON (step S111-6-2-1 = No), the first BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop processing. .

(Step S111-6-2-2)
In step S111-6-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. When the 1 ART game number determination state winning flag is ON, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is set based on the normal promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30A) provided in the main ROM 302. The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the state to be shifted from the state determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” to be shifted to the state determined to shift. Then, when the process of step S111-6-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-2-3.

(Step S111-6-2-3)
In step S111-6-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-6-2-2. The process of determining whether or not to be promoted to is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-6-2-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-6-2-4, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-6-2-3 = No) and step S111-6-2-5.

(Step S111-6-2-4)
In step S111-6-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-6-2-2. (Step S111-6-2-3 = Yes), the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is turned OFF. And a process of turning on the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-2-5.

(Step S111-6-2-5)
In step S111-6-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a first BB state navigation stock counter addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the first BB state navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28C). A process of drawing whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-6-2-6.

(Step S111-6-2-6)
In step S111-6-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 may add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of the lottery by the first BB state navigation stock counter addition lottery process in step S111-6-2-5. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-6-2-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-6-2-7, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-6-2-6 = No), the first BB state processing subroutine is ended, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-6-2-7)
In step S111-6-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the value determined by the first BB state navigation stock addition lottery processing in step S111-6-2-5 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. When the process of step S111-6-2-7 ends, the first BB state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for second BB state)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the second BB state process performed by the process of step S111-6-4 of FIG. 67 will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second BB state process.

(Step S111-6-4-1)
In step S111-6-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is OFF is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF (step S111-6-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-2, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not OFF (step S111-6-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-6.

(Step S111-6-4-2)
In step S111-6-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process. Specifically, based on the bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20A) provided in the main ROM 302, the main CPU 301 sets the “second BB state” to “ A process of determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination state” via the “ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-3.

(Step S111-6-4-3)
In step S111-6-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state” after the “second BB state” is ended as a result of the lottery process based on the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S111-6-4-2. A process of determining whether or not to decide to do is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-6-4-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-6-4-4, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-6-4-3 = No), the second BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-6-4-4)
In step S111-6-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs ART game number determination state winning flag setting processing. Specifically, as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S111-6-4-2, the main CPU 301 sets the “first ART game number determination preparation state” after the end of the “second BB state”. If it is decided to shift to the “first ART game number determination state”, the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is turned ON. After the “second BB state” is completed, if it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination state” via the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, the main RAM 303 The process of turning on the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in FIG. Cormorant. Then, when the process of step S111-6-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-5.

(Step S111-6-4-5)
In step S111-6-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-6-4-5 ends, the subroutine for the second BB state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-6-4-6)
In step S111-6-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S111-6-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-7, and the first ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S111-6-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-10.

(Step S111-6-4-7)
In step S111-6-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” based on the normal-time promotion lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 30A). A process of drawing whether or not to be promoted to a state where it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” from the current state is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-8.

(Step S111-6-4-8)
In step S111-6-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-6-4-7. The process of determining whether or not to be promoted to is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-6-4-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-6-4-9, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-6-4-8 = No) and step S111-6-4-10.

(Step S111-6-4-9)
In step S111-6-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-6-4-7. Since it is determined to be promoted (step S111-6-4-8 = Yes), the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is turned OFF. And a process of turning on the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-10.

(Step S111-6-4-10)
In step S111-6-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs a second BB state navigation stock counter addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 based on the second BB state navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28D). A process of drawing whether or not to add is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-4-11.

(Step S111-6-4-11)
In step S111-6-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 may add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of the lottery by the second BB state navigation stock counter addition lottery process in step S111-6-4-10. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-6-4-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-6-4-12, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-6-4-11 = No), the second BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-6-4-12)
In step S111-6-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding the value determined by the second BB state navigation stock addition lottery process in step S111-6-4-10 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. When the process of step S111-6-4-12 ends, the second BB state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for first special BB state)
Next, based on FIG. 70, the 1st special BB state process performed by the process of step S111-6-6 of FIG. 67 is demonstrated. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for the first special BB state.

(Step S111-6-6-1)
In step S111-6-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “RB operating bell”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is “RB active bell” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. . When it is determined that the winning combination is “RB in operation bell” (step S111-6-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-2, and the winning combination is When it is determined that it is not “RB in operation bell” (step S111-6-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-3.

(Step S111-6-6-2)
In step S111-6-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-6-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-3.

(Step S111-6-6-3)
In step S111-6-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. When the 1 ART game number determination state winning flag is ON, the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is set based on the normal promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30A) provided in the main ROM 302. The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the state to be shifted from the state determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” to be shifted to the state determined to shift. Then, when the process of step S111-6-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-4.

(Step S111-6-6-4)
In step S111-6-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-6-6-3. A process for determining whether or not promotion is determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-6-6-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-6-6-5, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-6-6-4 = No) and step S111-6-6-6.

(Step S111-6-6-5)
In step S111-6-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-6-6-3. Since it is determined to be promoted, a process for turning off the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed and also provided in the main RAM 303. The third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area is turned ON. Then, when the process of step S111-6-6-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-6.

(Step S111-6-6-6)
In step S111-6-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “losing”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is “losing” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “losing” (step S111-6-6-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-7, and the winning combination is “losing”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S111-6-6-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-8.

(Step S111-6-6-7)
In step S111-6-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-6-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-8.

(Step S111-6-6-8)
In step S111-6-6-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bell winning number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the bell winning number counter is “3” (step S111-6-6-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-9 and the bell winning is performed. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “3” (step S111-6-6-8 = No), the first special BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop process proceeds to step S112. Migrate processing.

(Step S111-6-6-9)
In step S111-6-6-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter is less than the minimum guaranteed value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is less than the minimum guaranteed value. Here, the minimum guaranteed value can be set as appropriate. If it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is less than the minimum guaranteed value (step S111-6-6-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-6-10, and the navigation stock is counted. If it is determined that the counter value is not less than the minimum guaranteed value (step S111-6-6-9 = No), the first special BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing step S112 is performed. Migrate processing.

(Step S111-6-6-10)
In step S111-6-6-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the minimum guaranteed value to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding the minimum guaranteed value to the value in the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-6-6-10 ends, the first special BB state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for second special BB state)
Next, based on FIG. 71, the second special BB state process performed by the process of step S111-6-7 of FIG. 67 will be described. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second special BB state process.

(Step S111-6-7-1)
In step S111-6-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “RB operating bell”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning combination is “RB active bell” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that the winning combination is “RB active bell” (step S111-6-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-2, and the winning combination is When it is determined that it is not “RB in operation bell” (step S111-6-7-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-14.

(Step S111-6-7-2)
In step S111-6-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the second special BB state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the second special BB state flag in the second special BB state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-3.

(Step S111-6-7-3)
In step S111-6-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the write pointer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to a register that stores the value of the write pointer. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-4.

(Step S111-6-7-4)
In step S111-6-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-5.

(Step S111-6-7-5)
In step S111-6-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to a register that stores the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-6.

(Step S111-6-7-6)
In step S111-6-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs a second special BB state lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the “second special BB state” based on the second special BB state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20D) provided in the main ROM 302. After completion of the above, a process of drawing whether or not to shift to the “second ART game number determination state” through the “second ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-7.

(Step S111-6-7-7)
In step S111-6-7-7, the main CPU 301 performs the ART added state acquisition lottery process described in detail with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to acquire the “ART added state” based on the second special BB state ART added state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29B) provided in the main ROM 302. When it is determined that the “first ART added state” is acquired as a result of the lottery, the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the “second ART added state” is acquired, a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. If it is determined to acquire the “third ART added state”, the third ART added state stored in the main RAM 303 is determined. The value of the Kukaunta carry out the process of adding "1". Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-8.

(Step S111-6-7-8)
In step S111-6-7-8, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART games. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the second special BB state extra lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 27). The process of drawing lots is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-9.

(Step S111-6-7-9)
In step S111-6-7-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the read pointer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the register that stores the read pointer. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-10.

(Step S111-6-7-10)
In step S111-6-7-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the read pointer is equal to the value of the write pointer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the register storing the read pointer value is equal to the value of the register storing the write pointer value. If it is determined that the value of the read pointer is equal to the value of the write pointer (step S111-6-7-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-11, and the read pointer is determined. If it is determined that the value of the write pointer is not equal to the value of the write pointer (step S111-6-7-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-5.

(Step S111-6-7-11)
In step S111-6-7-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the second special BB state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the second special BB state flag in the second special BB state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-12.

(Step S111-6-7-12)
In step S111-6-7-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the write pointer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in a register that stores the value of the write pointer. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-13.

(Step S111-6-7-13)
In step S111-6-7-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” as the value of the number of lotteries. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” in a register that stores the value of the number of lotteries. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-16.

(Step S111-6-7-14)
In step S111-6-7-14, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the second special BB state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the second special BB state flag in the second special BB state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-15.

(Step S111-6-7-15)
In step S111-6-7-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the write pointer. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to a register that stores the value of the write pointer. Then, when the process of step S111-6-7-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-16.

(Step S111-6-7-16)
In step S111-6-7-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bell winning number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the bell winning number counter is “3” (step S111-6-7-16 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-17, and the bell winning is performed. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “3” (step S111-6-7-16 = No), the second special BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing proceeds to step S112. Migrate processing.

(Step S111-6-7-17)
In step S111-6-7-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second ART game number determination state” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the state managed by the main control board 300 is the second special BB state lottery in step S111-6-7-6 until the “second special BB state” ends. After the end of the “second special BB state”, the process determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination state”. If it is determined that the “second ART game number determination state” is won (step S111-6-7-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-6-7-18. If it is determined that the “second ART game number determination state” is not won (step S111-6-7-17 = No), the second special BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the main loop processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S112.

(Step S111-6-7-18)
In step S111-6-7-18, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-6-7-18 ends, the second special BB state processing subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(ART game number determination preparation state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 72, the ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-8 of FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART game number determination preparation state processing.

(Step S111-8-1)
In step S <b> 111-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. The process which determines whether or not is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first ART game number determination preparation state” (step S111-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-2, and the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is determined. If it is determined that the state is not “state” (step S111-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-8-3.

(Step S111-8-2)
In step S111-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART game number determination preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-2 is completed, the ART game number determination preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8-3)
In step S <b> 111-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second ART game number determination preparation state” is set. Specifically, the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. The process which determines whether or not is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second ART game number determination preparation state” (step S111-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-4, and “the second ART game number determination preparation state”. If it is determined that the state is not “state” (step S111-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5.

(Step S111-8-4)
In step S111-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs a second ART game number determination preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-4 is completed, the ART game number determination preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8-5)
In step S111-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs a third ART game number determination preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-5 is completed, the ART game number determination preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(First ART Game Number Determination Preparation State Processing)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the first ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-8-2 of FIG. 72 will be described. FIG. 73 shows a subroutine for the first ART game number determination preparation state process.

(Step S111-8-2-1)
In step S111-8-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-8-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-2.

(Step S111-8-2-2)
In step S111-8-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-3.

(Step S111-8-2-3)
In step S111-8-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S111-8-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-4, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S111-8-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-5.

(Step S111-8-2-4)
In step S111-8-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-2-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-5.

(Step S111-8-2-5)
In step S111-8-2-5, the main CPU 301 conducts a first ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process and the first ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table (see FIG. 28E) provided in the main ROM 302. Then, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-6.

(Step S111-8-2-6)
In step S111-8-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 may add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the navigation stock addition lottery process for the first ART game number determination preparation state in step S111-8-2-5. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-8-2-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-8-2-7, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-8-2-6 = No) and step S111-8-2-8.

(Step S111-8-2-7)
In step S111-8-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value determined by the first ART game number determination ready state navigation stock addition lottery process in step S111-8-2-5 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the addition process. Then, when the process of step S111-8-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-8.

(Step S111-8-2-8)
In step S111-8-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is equal to or greater than “48”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or greater than “48”. When it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is equal to or greater than “48” (step S111-8-2-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-9. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “48” (step S111-8-2-8 = No), step S111-8-2 The process is shifted to -12.

(Step S111-8-2-9)
In step S111-8-2-9, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is “48”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “48”. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is “48” (step S111-8-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-10. , And when it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is not “48” (step S111-8-2-9 = No), step S111-8-2-11 The process is transferred to.

(Step S111-8-2-10)
In step S111-8-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-2-10 is completed, the subroutine for the first ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8-2-11)
In step S111-8-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a second security lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the second security lottery table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the main ROM 302 and the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-13.

(Step S111-8-2-12)
In step S111-8-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a first security lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the first security lottery table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the main ROM 302 and the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-2-13.

(Step S111-8-2-13)
In step S111-8-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs navigation stock provided in the main RAM 303 by the second guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-2-11 or the first guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-2-12. Processing for determining whether or not to add the counter values is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-8-2-13 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-8-2-14, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-8-2-13 = No), the first ART game number determination preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-8-2-14)
In step S111-8-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided with the value determined by the second guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-2-11 or the first guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-2-12 in the main RAM 303. Adds to the value of the Navistock counter. When the process of step S111-8-2-14 ends, the subroutine for the first ART game number determination preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Second ART Game Number Determination Preparation State Processing)
Next, the second ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-8-4 of FIG. 72 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 74 shows a subroutine for the second ART game number determination preparation state process.

(Step S111-8-4-1)
In step S111-8-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-2.

(Step S111-8-4-2)
In step S111-8-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-3.

(Step S111-8-4-3)
In step S <b> 111-8-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S111-8-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-4, and the “bonus” is not won. (Step S111-8-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-5.

(Step S111-8-4-4)
In step S111-8-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-5.

(Step S111-8-4-5)
In step S111-8-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a second ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process and the second ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28F). Then, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-6.

(Step S111-8-4-6)
In step S111-8-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 may add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the navigation stock addition lottery process for the second ART game number determination preparation state in step S111-8-4-5. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-8-4-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-8-4-7, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-8-4-6 = No) and step S111-8-4-8.

(Step S111-8-4-7)
In step S111-8-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value determined by the second ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery process in step S111-8-4-5 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the addition process. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-8.

(Step S111-8-4-8)
In step S111-8-4-8, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is equal to or greater than “48”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or greater than “48”. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is equal to or greater than “48” (step S111-8-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-9. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “48” (step S111-8-4-8 = No), step S111-8-4 The process is shifted to -12.

(Step S111-8-4-9)
In step S111-8-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is “48”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “48”. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is “48” (step S111-8-4-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-10. , And when it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is not “48” (step S111-8-4-9 = No), step S111-8-4-11 The process is transferred to.

(Step S111-8-4-10)
In step S111-8-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-4-10 ends, the subroutine for the second ART game number determination preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8-4-11)
In step S111-8-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a second security lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the second security lottery table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the main ROM 302 and the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-13.

(Step S111-8-4-12)
In step S111-8-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs a first security lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the first security lottery table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the main ROM 302 and the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-13.

(Step S111-8-4-13)
In step S111-8-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs navigation stock provided in the main RAM 303 by the second guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-4-11 or the first guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-4-12. Processing for determining whether or not to add the counter values is performed. When it is determined that the winning is made (step S111-8-4-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-4-14, and when it is determined that the winning is not made ( Step S111-8-4-13 = No), the second ART game number determination preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-8-4-14)
In step S111-8-4-14, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided in the main RAM 303 with a value determined by the second guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-4-11 or the first guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-4-12. Adds to the value of the Navistock counter. When the process of step S111-8-4-14 ends, the subroutine for the second ART game number determination preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(3rd ART game number determination preparation state process)
Next, the third ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-8-5 of FIG. 72 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third ART game number determination preparation state processing.

(Step S111-8-5-1)
In step S111-8-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus initial hit determination process detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-8-5-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-2.

(Step S111-8-5-2)
In step S111-8-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when step S111-8-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-3.

  In the present embodiment, the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is a first ART game number determination preparation state process, a second ART game number determination preparation state process, and a third ART game. It is supposed to be used in the number determination preparation state process, but is not limited to this. The first ART game number determination preparation state game number counter used in the first ART game number determination preparation state process; The second ART game number determination preparation state game number counter used in the second ART game number determination preparation state process and the third ART game number determination preparation state game number counter used in the third ART game number determination preparation state process It is good also as providing.

(Step S111-8-5-3)
In step S <b> 111-8-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S111-8-5-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-4, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S111-8-5-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-5.

(Step S111-8-5-4)
In step S111-8-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-5-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-5.

(Step S111-8-5-5)
In step S111-8-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a third ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process and the third ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 28G). Then, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-5-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-6.

(Step S111-8-5-6)
In step S111-8-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 may add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the navigation stock addition lottery process for the third ART game number determination preparation state in step S111-8-5-5. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. When it is determined that the winning is made (step S111-8-5-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-7, and when it is determined that the winning is not made ( The process proceeds to step S111-8-5-6 = No) and step S111-8-5-8.

(Step S111-8-5-7)
In step S111-8-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the value determined in the third ART game number determination preparation state navigation stock addition lottery process in step S111-8-5-5 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the addition process. Then, when the process of step S111-8-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-8.

(Step S111-8-5-8)
In step S111-8-5-8, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is equal to or greater than “48”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is equal to or greater than “48”. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is equal to or greater than “48” (step S111-8-5-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-9. If the processing is shifted and it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination ready state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “48” (step S111-8-5-8 = No), step S111-8-5 The process is shifted to -12.

(Step S111-8-5-9)
In step S111-8-5-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is “48”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “48”. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is “48” (step S111-8-5-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-10. If it is determined that the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter is not “48” (step S111-8-5-9 = No), step S111-8-5-11 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S111-8-5-10)
In step S111-8-5-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-8-5-10 is completed, the subroutine for the third ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8-5-11)
In step S111-8-5-11, the main CPU 301 performs a second guaranteed lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the second security lottery table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the main ROM 302 and the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-13.

(Step S111-8-5-12)
In step S111-8-5-12, the main CPU 301 performs a first security lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the first security lottery table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the main ROM 302 and the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-8-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-13.

(Step S111-8-5-13)
In step S111-8-5-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs navigation stock provided in the main RAM 303 by the second guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-5-11 or the first guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-5-12. Processing for determining whether or not to add the counter values is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S111-8-5-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-8-5-14, and if it is determined that the winning is not made ( In step S111-8-5-13 = No), the subroutine for the third ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-8-5-14)
In step S111-8-5-14, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided in the main RAM 303 with a value determined by the second guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-5-11 or the first guaranteed lottery process in step S111-8-5-12. Adds to the value of the Navistock counter. When the process of step S111-8-5-14 is completed, the third ART game number determination preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for bonus status during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the bonus state process during ART performed by the process of step S111-10 of FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine for bonus state processing during ART.

(Step S111-10-1)
In step S <b> 111-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first BB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state during ART” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first BB state during ART” (step S111-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10-2 and is not the “first BB state during ART”. Is determined (step S111-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-10-3.

(Step S111-10-2)
In step S111-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process for the first BB state during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process, which will be described later. When the processing of step S111-10-2 is completed, the ART bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-10-3)
In step S <b> 111-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second BB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state during ART” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second BB state during ART” (step S111-10-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10-4 and is not the “second BB state during ART”. Is determined (step S111-10-3 = No), the ART bonus process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-10-4)
In step S111-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs a second BB state process during ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process, which will be described later. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus state during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for 1st BB state during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 77, the processing for the first BB state during ART performed by the processing of step S111-10-2 in FIG. 76 will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for the first BB state during ART.

(Step S111-10-2-1)
In step S111-10-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is OFF is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF (step S111-10-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-2, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not OFF (step S111-10-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-6.

(Step S111-10-2-2)
In step S111-10-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the “first BB state during ART” based on the ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table for the first BB state during ART provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 20E). After completion of the above, a process of determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination state” via the “ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-10-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-3.

(Step S111-10-2-3)
In step S <b> 111-10-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S111-10-2-2, the main CPU 301 determines that the “ART game number determination ready state” after completion of the “first BB state during ART”. A process of determining whether or not to shift to is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-10-2-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-10-2-4, and when it determines with having not been won ( In step S111-10-2-3 = No), the subroutine for the first BB state processing during ART is terminated, and the processing shifts to step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-10-2-4)
In step S111-10-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag setting process. Specifically, as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S111-10-2-2, the main CPU 301 determines that the “second ART game number determination ready state” after completion of the “first BB state during ART”. , The second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. Is turned on, and after the “1st BB state during ART” is completed, if it is decided to shift to the “3rd ART game number determination preparation state”, the 3rd ART provided in the main RAM 303 Processing for turning on the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the game number determination state winning flag storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-10-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-5.

(Step S111-10-2-5)
In step S111-10-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-10-2-5 is completed, the subroutine for the first BB state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-10-2-6)
In step S111-10-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S111-10-2-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-7, and the second ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S111-10-2-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-10.

(Step S111-10-2-7)
In step S111-10-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” based on the ART promotion lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 30B). The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the player is promoted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, when the process of step S111-10-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-8.

(Step S111-10-2-8)
In step S <b> 111-10-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-10-2-7. The process of determining whether or not to be promoted to is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-10-2-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-10-2-9, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-10-2-8 = No) and step S111-10-2-10.

(Step S111-10-2-9)
In step S111-10-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-10-2-7. Since it is determined to be promoted, a process for turning off the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed and also provided in the main RAM 303. The third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area is turned ON. Then, when the process of step S111-10-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-10.

(Step S111-10-2-10)
In step S111-10-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition lottery process for the first BB state during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses the navigation stock addition lottery table for the first BB state during ART provided in the main ROM 302 (special BB flag = OFF) (see FIG. 28H), or for the first BB state during ART. Based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (special BB flag = ON) (see FIG. 28J), the lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is to be added. Then, when the process of step S111-10-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-2-11.

(Step S111-10-2-11)
In step S <b> 111-10-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of the lottery by the navigation stock counter addition lottery process for the first BB state during ART in step S111-10-2-10. A process for determining whether or not this is determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-10-2-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-10-2-12, and when it determines with having not been won ( In step S111-10-2-11 = No), the subroutine for the first BB state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-10-2-12)
In step S111-10-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the value determined by the navigation stock addition lottery process for the first BB state during ART in step S111-10-2-10 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Process. When the process of step S111-10-2-12 is completed, the subroutine for the first BB state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for 2nd BB state during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 78, the processing for the second BB state during ART performed by the processing of step S111-10-4 of FIG. 76 will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second BB state process during ART.

(Step S111-10-4-1)
In step S111-10-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is OFF is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF (step S111-10-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-2, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not OFF (step S111-10-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-6.

(Step S111-10-4-2)
In step S111-10-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state transition lottery process. Specifically, based on the bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20A) provided in the main ROM 302, the main CPU 301, after the end of the “second BB state during ART”. Then, a process of determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination state” via the “ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-3.

(Step S111-10-4-3)
In step S <b> 111-10-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 enters the “ART game number determination state” after the completion of the “second BB state during ART” as a result of the lottery process based on the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S111-10-4-2. A process is performed to determine whether or not it is decided to shift. And when it determines with having won (step S111-10-4-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-10-4-4, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-10-4-3 = No), the second BB state processing subroutine during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop processing.

(Step S111-10-4-4)
In step S111-10-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines that the “second ART game number determination ready state” after the end of “the second BB state during ART” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state transition lottery process in step S111-10-4-2. , The second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. After the “second BB state during ART” is completed, if it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination ready state”, the third ART provided in the main RAM 303 is processed. Processing for turning on the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the game number determination state winning flag storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-5.

(Step S111-10-4-5)
In step S111-10-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-10-4-5 is completed, the subroutine for the second BB state process during ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-10-4-6)
In step S111-10-4-6, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S111-10-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-7, and the second ART If it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S111-10-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-10.

(Step S111-10-4-7)
In step S111-10-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state promotion lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “second ART game number determination preparation state” based on the ART promotion lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 30B). The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the player is promoted to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-8.

(Step S111-10-4-8)
In step S <b> 111-10-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-10-4-7. The process of determining whether or not to be promoted to is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-10-4-8 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-10-4-9, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-10-4-8 = No) and step S111-10-4-10.

(Step S111-10-4-9)
In step S111-10-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state winning flag update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination state” as a result of the lottery by the ART game number determination state promotion lottery process in step S111-10-4-7. Since it is determined to be promoted, a process for turning off the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed and also provided in the main RAM 303. The third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area is turned ON. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-10.

(Step S111-10-4-10)
In step S111-10-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition lottery process for the second BB state during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 uses the navigation stock addition lottery table for the second BB state during ART provided in the main ROM 302 (special BB flag = OFF) (see FIG. 28 (I)), or for the second BB state during ART. Based on the navigation stock addition lottery table (special BB flag = ON) (see FIG. 28 (K)), the lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-10-4-11.

(Step S111-10-4-11)
In step S <b> 111-10-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 as a result of lottery by the second BB state navigation stock counter addition lottery processing during ART in step S111-10-4-10. A process for determining whether or not this is determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-10-4-11 = Yes), a process transfers to step S111-10-4-12, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-10-4-11 = No), the subroutine for the second BB state process during ART is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-10-4-12)
In step S111-10-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs a navigation stock counter addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds the value determined by the second BB state navigation stock addition lottery process during ART in step S111-10-4-10 to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Process. Then, when the process of step S111-10-4-12 ends, the subroutine for the second BB state process during ART ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 79, the ART preparation state process performed by the process of step S111-12 of FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S111-12-1)
In step S111-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-12-2.

(Step S111-12-2)
In step S111-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART added state acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to acquire the “ART added state” based on the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29A) provided in the main ROM 302. When it is determined that the “first ART added state” is acquired as a result of the lottery, the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the “second ART added state” is acquired, a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. If it is determined to acquire the “third ART added state”, the third ART added state provided in the main RAM 303 It performs the process of adding "1" to the value of the stock counter. Then, when the process of step S111-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-12-3.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART additional state acquisition lottery process of the ART preparation state process, the “ART additional state” is based on the second bonus preparation state ART additional state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART ready state” separately from the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, “ART added state” The ART ROM 302 additional state acquisition lottery table may be separately provided in the main ROM 302, which is used when performing the process of lottering whether or not to acquire.

(Step S111-12-3)
In step S111-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process described in detail with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the “second ART game number determination state”. When the processing of step S111-12-3 is completed, the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop processing.

(ART status processing)
Next, the ART state process performed by the process of step S111-14 of FIG. 57 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART state processing.

(Step S111-14-1)
In step S111-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-14-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-14-2.

(Step S111-14-2)
In step S111-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART added state acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to acquire the “ART added state” based on the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29A) provided in the main ROM 302. When it is determined that the “first ART added state” is acquired as a result of the lottery, the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the “second ART added state” is acquired, a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. If it is determined to acquire the “third ART added state”, the third ART added state provided in the main RAM 303 It performs the process of adding "1" to the value of the stock counter. Then, when the process of step S111-14-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-14-3.

  In this embodiment, in the ART added state acquisition lottery process of the ART state process, the “ART added state” is set based on the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302. Although the process of drawing whether or not to win is performed, it is not limited to this. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART state” separately from the second bonus preparation state ART additional state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, “ART additional state” is set. An ART state ART additional state acquisition lottery table used when performing a process of lottery whether or not to acquire may be separately provided in the main ROM 302.

(Step S111-14-3)
In step S111-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process described in detail with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the “second ART game number determination state”. Then, when the process of step S111-14-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-14-4.

(Step S111-14-4)
In step S111-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs a precursor setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 plays the game until the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “second bonus preparation state” when “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Process to determine the number. When the process of step S111-14-4 is completed, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Art add-on processing)
Next, based on FIG. 81, the ART added state process performed by the process of step S111-16 of FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a subroutine for ART addition status processing.

(Step S111-16-1)
In step S <b> 111-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “first ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. When it is determined that the state is the “first ART added state” (step S111-16-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2 and is determined not to be the “first ART added state”. If it is determined (step S111-16-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-16-3.

(Step S111-16-2)
In step S111-16-2, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a first ART extra state addition lottery process for selecting whether or not to add the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2 is completed, the ART added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-16-3)
In step S <b> 111-16-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the “second ART added state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second ART added state” (step S111-16-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-4 and is determined not to be the “second ART added state”. If it is determined (step S111-16-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-16-5.

(Step S111-16-4)
In step S111-16-4, the main CPU 301 performs a second ART added state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process for the second ART addition state in which the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is lottered. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4 is completed, the ART added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-16-5)
In step S <b> 111-16-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “third ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “third ART added state” (step S111-16-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-6 and is determined not to be the “third ART added state”. If YES (step S111-16-5 = No), the ART addition state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-16-6)
In step S <b> 111-16-6, the main CPU 301 performs a third ART added state process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for adding up the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4 is completed, the ART added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Process for the first ART addition state)
Next, based on FIG. 82, the first ART addition state process performed by the process of step S111-16-2 of FIG. 81 will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for the first ART addition state.

(Step S111-16-2-1)
In step S111-16-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-2.

(Step S111-16-2-2)
In step S111-16-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the winning combination is “push order bell” based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the winning combination is “push order bell” (step S111-16-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-3, and the winning combination is “ If it is determined that it is not “push order bell” (step S111-16-2-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-4.

(Step S111-16-2-3)
In step S111-16-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter. Specifically, a process of adding “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-4.

(Step S111-16-2-4)
In step S111-16-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-5.

(Step S111-16-2-5)
In step S111-16-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process for the first ART extra state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 plays a game in the “ART state” based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process and the first ART additional state addition lottery table (see FIG. 24) provided in the main ROM 302. A process for determining whether or not to add the number of possible games is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-6.

(Step S111-16-2-6)
In step S111-16-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, when the main CPU 301 determines that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is to be increased by the additional lottery process for the first ART additional state in step S111-16-2-5, A process of adding the determined number of games to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-7.

(Step S111-16-2-7)
In step S111-16-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is determined to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” as a result of the lottery process based on the first ART additional state additional lottery process in step S111-16-2-5. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S111-16-2-7 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-16-2-8, and when it determines with having not been won ( The process proceeds to step S111-16-2-7 = No) and step S111-16-2-9.

(Step S111-16-2-8)
In step S111-16-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the first ART added state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the first ART added state winning flag in the first ART added state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-9.

(Step S111-16-2-9)
In step S111-16-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the bell winning number counter is “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 adds “1” to the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S111-16-2-3, and as a result, the bell provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. A process of determining whether or not the value of the winning counter is “5” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the bell winning number counter is “5” (step S111-16-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-10, and the bell winning is performed. If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “5” (step S111-16-2-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-12.

(Step S111-16-2-10)
In step S111-16-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “100” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, a process of adding “100” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. As a result of the processing, the state managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the “first ART added state”, and the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not added during the “5” game. "" Can continue to be determined as a winning combination, a privilege can be given to the player. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-11.

(Step S111-16-2-11)
In step S <b> 111-16-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the first ART added state winning flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the first ART added state winning flag in the first ART added state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-12.

(Step S111-16-2-12)
In step S111-16-2-12, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first ART added state game number counter is “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “5”. When it is determined that the value of the first ART added state game number counter is “5” (step S111-16-2-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-13. If it is determined that the value of the first ART added state game number counter is not “5” (step S111-16-2-12 = No), the first ART added state processing subroutine is terminated. The process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-16-2-13)
In step S111-16-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART added state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART added state winning flag provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF. If it is determined that the first ART extra state winning flag is OFF (step S111-16-2-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-16-2-14, and the first ART extra is added. If it is determined that the state winning flag is not OFF (step S111-16-2-13 = No), the first ART additional state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop processing. To do.

(Step S111-16-2-14)
In step S111-16-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “10” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, a process of adding “10” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Although the state managed by the main control board 300 has shifted to the “first ART added state” by this process, the first ART added state additional in step S111-16-2-5 during the “5” game. Even if the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not added by the lottery process, it is possible to guarantee the addition of the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. When the process of step S111-16-2-14 is completed, the first ART added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Second ART addition state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 83, the second ART added state process performed by the process of step S111-16-4 of FIG. 81 will be described. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second ART added state processing.

(Step S111-16-4-1)
In step S111-16-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-4-2.

(Step S111-16-4-2)
In step S111-16-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-4-3.

(Step S111-16-4-3)
In step S111-16-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs an extra lottery process for the second ART extra state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 plays a game in the “ART state” based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process and the second ART additional state addition lottery table (see FIG. 25) provided in the main ROM 302. A process for determining whether or not to add the number of possible games is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-4-4.

(Step S111-16-4-4)
In step S111-16-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, when the main CPU 301 determines that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is to be added by the extra drawing process for the second ART added state in step S111-16-4-3, A process of adding the determined number of games to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-4-5.

(Step S111-16-4-5)
In step S <b> 111-16-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is decided to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” as a result of the lottery by the extra lottery process for the second ART extra state in step S111-16-4-3. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S111-16-4-5 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S111-16-4-6, and when it determines with having not been won ( Step S111-16-4-5 = No), the second ART added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S112 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-16-4-6)
In step S <b> 111-16-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the winning flag during the second ART addition state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the second ART added state winning flag in the second ART added state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-16-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-16-4-7.

(Step S111-16-4-7)
In step S <b> 111-16-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second ART added state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S111-16-4-7 ends, the subroutine for the second ART addition state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(ART game number notification state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 84, the ART game number notification state process performed by the process of step S111-17 of FIG. 57 will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine of ART game number notification state processing.

(Step S111-17-1)
In step S111-17-1, the main CPU 301 performs the bonus initial hit determination process described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines that “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Then, the special BB flag is turned on. Then, when the process of step S111-17-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S111-17-2.

(Step S111-17-2)
In step S111-17-2, the main CPU 301 performs an ART added state acquisition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not to acquire the “ART added state” based on the second bonus preparation state ART added state acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 29A) provided in the main ROM 302. When it is determined that the “first ART added state” is acquired as a result of the lottery, the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1”. If it is determined that the “second ART added state” is acquired, a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. If it is determined to acquire the “third ART added state”, the third ART added state provided in the main RAM 303 It performs the process of adding "1" to the value of the stock counter. Then, when the process of step S111-17-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-17-3.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART extra state acquisition lottery process of the ART game number notification state process, the “ART extra addition” is based on the second bonus preparation state ART extra state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302. The process of lottering whether or not to acquire the “state” is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number notification state” separately from the second bonus preparation state ART additional state acquisition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302, the “ART additional state” is displayed. An ART game number notification state ART additional state acquisition lottery table may be separately provided in the main ROM 302, which is used when the process of drawing whether or not to acquire the “state” is performed.

(Step S111-17-3)
In step S111-17-3, the main CPU 301 performs the second ART game number determination state acquisition lottery process described in detail with reference to FIG. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to acquire the “second ART game number determination state”. When the process of step S111-17-3 is completed, the ART game number notification state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 85, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S118 of FIG. 34 will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a subroutine of gaming state transition processing.

(Step S118-1)
In step S <b> 118-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed (step S118-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-2, and the “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed. If it is determined that it is not (step S118-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-3.

(Step S118-2)
In step S118-2, the main CPU 301 performs BB operation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is provided in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or in the main RAM 303 based on the “combination of symbols related to bonus” displayed on the active line. A process for setting a game state storage area and a process for clearing a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 are performed. Further, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” to the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 or the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-14.

(Step S118-3)
In step S118-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that it is the end of “BB” (step S118-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-4, and if it is determined that it is not the end of “BB”. (Step S118-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S118-8.

(Step S118-4)
In step S118-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of changing the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 to a “non-RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information related to a non-RT gaming state in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-5.

(Step S118-5)
In step S <b> 118-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “different color black seven BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the “different color black seven BB” is ended based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that it is the end time of “different color black seven BB” (step S118-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-6, and is not the end time of “different color black seven BB”. Is determined (step S118-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-7.

(Step S118-6)
In step S118-6, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a pseudo game that is performed when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART transition determination state” in the “ART transition determination state”. More specifically, processing for setting the value of the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S118-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-16.

(Step S118-7)
In step S118-7, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game mode setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a predetermined value as an initial value in the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the predetermined value set in the pseudo game mode storage area can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be a predetermined value or a value determined by lottery. Then, when the process of step S118-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-16.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the pseudo game mode is a pseudo game mode value of “0”, a pseudo game mode value of “1”, a pseudo game mode value of “2”, and a pseudo game mode value of “0”. When the value of the game mode is “3”, the value of the pseudo game mode is “4”, the value of the pseudo game mode is “5”, the value of the pseudo game mode is “6”, the pseudo game mode When the value of “7” is “7”, a total of “9” patterns are provided when the value of the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation”. Specifically, as described later, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “non-RT gaming state” and the “first RT gaming state”, the value of the pseudo gaming mode is “0”. From this case, the user stays in any of the cases where the value of the pseudo game mode is “3”. On the other hand, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second RT game state”, the value of the pseudo game mode is “4” to the value of the pseudo game mode “pseudo game preparation”. You will stay in either of these. In the present embodiment, the smaller the value of the pseudo game mode, the longer the number of games until the pseudo game is executed, and the value of the pseudo game mode becomes “pseudo game preparation”. In this case, a pseudo game is executed.

(Step S118-8)
In step S118-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a prize has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to winning” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a prize has been won (step S118-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-9. If it is determined that no prize has been won (step S118-8 = No), The process proceeds to step S118-11.

(Step S118-9)
In step S118-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-10.

(Step S118-10)
In step S118-10, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S118-9, and as a result, the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is obtained. A process of determining whether or not “0” has been reached is performed. If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is “0” (step S118-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-11, and the value of the winning number counter is not “0”. Is determined (step S118-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-14.

(Step S118-11)
In step S118-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-12.

(Step S118-12)
In step S118-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the possible game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 subtracts “1” from the value of the game possible number counter provided in the main RAM 303 by the process of step S118-11, and as a result, Processing for determining whether or not the value is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the game possible number counter is “0” (step S118-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-13, and the value of the game possible number counter is “0”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S118-12 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-14.

(Step S118-13)
In step S118-13, the main CPU 301 performs various counter settings for RB. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “4” as the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 and sets “4” as the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Process to set. Then, when the process of step S118-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-14.

(Step S118-14)
In step S118-14, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines the gaming state provided in the main RAM 303 according to the combination of the value stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the symbols displayed on the activated line. Processing to update the value stored in the storage area is performed. Then, when the process of step S118-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-15.

(Step S118-15)
In step S118-15, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game mode setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the pseudo game mode. Then, when the process of step S118-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-16.

(Step S118-16)
In step S118-16, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a gaming state command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the gaming state command having the information related to the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 400, so that the gaming state command is displayed in the main RAM 303. To set in the transmission data storage area. Then, when the process of step S118-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-17.

(Step S118-17)
In step S118-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is the BB end time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, a process for determining whether or not the BB has ended is performed. If it is determined that the BB is finished (step S118-17 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-18. If it is determined that the BB is not finished (step S118-17). = No), the game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(Step S118-18)
In step S118-18, the main CPU 301 performs BB end processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the possible game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the like. When the process of step S118-18 is completed, the gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 86, the RT game state transition process performed by the process of step S118-14 of FIG. 85 will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S118-14-1)
In step S118-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “RB gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is “RB gaming state” based on a value stored in a gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the game state is “RB gaming state” (step S118-14-1 = Yes), the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118-15 of the gaming state transition process. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the “RB gaming state” (step S118-14-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-14-2.

(Step S118-14-2)
In step S118-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not an RT transition symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 selects one of “a combination of symbols related to the blank”, “a combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay”, and “a combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay”. The process of determining whether or not the combination of symbols is displayed on the active line is performed. If it is determined that the RT transition symbol is displayed (step S118-14-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-14-3, and it is determined that the RT transition symbol is not displayed. In this case (step S118-14-2 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118-15 of the game state transition process.

(Step S118-14-3)
In step S118-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not it is during the transition to the first RT gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for specifying the current gaming state based on the value stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming”. In the case of “state”, a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line is performed. Also, if the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state”, is “the combination of symbols relating to blank” or “the combination of symbols relating to the first RT gaming state transition replay” displayed on the active line? Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the first RT gaming state is being shifted (step S118-14-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-14-4, and it is determined that the first RT gaming state is not being shifted. If it is determined (step S118-14-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-14-6.

(Step S118-14-4)
In step S <b> 118-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “non-RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the “non-RT gaming state” based on the value stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the game is in the “non-RT gaming state” (step S118-14-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-14-5 and is determined not to be in the “non-RT gaming state”. If it is determined (step S118-14-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-14-6.

(Step S118-14-5)
In step S118-14-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the pseudo game mode. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-14-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-14-6.

(Step S118-14-6)
In step S118-14-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is during the RT gaming state transition. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for specifying the current gaming state based on the value stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming”. In the case of “state”, a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line is performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state”, a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line is performed. Also, if the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state”, is “the combination of symbols relating to blank” or “the combination of symbols relating to the first RT gaming state transition replay” displayed on the active line? Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the RT gaming state is being transitioned (step S118-14-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-14-7, and it is determined that the RT gaming state is not transitioning. In this case (step S118-14-6 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118-15 of the game state transition process.

(Step S118-14-7)
In step S118-14-7, the main CPU 301 performs an RT gaming state update process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for updating the value of the game state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. More specifically, in the case where the current gaming state is “non-RT gaming state”, when “the combination of symbols related to the blank” is displayed on the active line, the game provided in the main RAM 303. A process of updating information related to the “non-RT gaming state” stored in the state storage area to information related to the “first RT gaming state” is performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the “first RT gaming state” and the “combination of symbols relating to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line, it is provided in the main RAM 303. A process of updating information related to the “first RT gaming state” stored in the gaming state storage area to information related to the “second RT gaming state” is performed. Also, when the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state”, “the combination of symbols related to the blank” or “the combination of symbols related to the first RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line Is performed to update the information related to the “second RT gaming state” stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the information related to the “first RT gaming state”. When the process of step S118-14-7 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118-15 of the gaming state transition process.

(Pseudo game mode setting process)
Next, the pseudo game mode setting process performed by the process of step S118-15 in FIG. 85 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the pseudo game mode setting process.

(Step S118-15-1)
In step S118-15-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a transition to the pseudo game mode. Specifically, the main CPU 301 operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game mode set by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18 is shifted. A process of determining whether or not the order matches the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player is performed. Then, when it is determined that the pseudo game mode is being shifted (step S118-15-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-15-2, and it is determined that the pseudo game mode is not being shifted. In that case (step S118-15-1 = No), the pseudo game mode setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118-16 of the game state transition process.

(Step S118-15-2)
In step S118-15-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation” based on the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation” (step S118-15-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-15-3, and the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game”. If it is determined that it is not “preparation” (step S118-15-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-15-4.

(Step S118-15-3)
In step S118-15-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the pseudo game mode. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-15-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-15-4.

(Step S118-15-4)
In step S118-15-4, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing order acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 by the player. Then, when the process of step S118-15-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S118-15-5.

(Step S118-15-5)
In step S <b> 118-15-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is “RB gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current gaming state is “RB gaming state” based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the state is “RB gaming state” (step S118-15-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-15-12, and it is determined that the state is not “RB gaming state”. In this case (step S118-15-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-15-6.

(Step S118-15-6)
In step S118-15-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game mode is being cleared. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether it is time to clear the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the timing of clearing the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the notified left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13 when the pseudo game mode is promoted. This is a case where the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated without following the operation order. If it is determined that the pseudo game mode is being cleared (step S118-15-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-15-9, and it is determined that the pseudo game mode is not being cleared. In this case (step S118-15-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-15-7.

(Step S118-15-7)
In step S118-15-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation” based on the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation” (step S118-15-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-15-8, and the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game”. If it is determined that it is not “preparation” (step S118-15-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-15-10.

(Step S118-15-8)
In step S118-15-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the pseudo game mode. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S118-15-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S118-15-9.

(Step S118-15-9)
In step S118-15-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of updating the effect storage area or the pseudo game mode. Specifically, when the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is cleared by the processing of step S118-15-8, the main CPU 301 stores the effect provided in the main RAM 303. A process of setting a pseudo game or a spinning effect corresponding to a value stored in the area in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301 determines that the pseudo game mode is being cleared by the process of step S118-15-6 (step S118-15-6 = Yes), the pseudo game provided in the main RAM 303 is determined. Processing to update the value of the mode storage area to “0” is performed. Then, when the process of step S118-15-9 ends, the subroutine of the pseudo game mode setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S118-16 of the game state transition process.

(Step S118-15-10)
In step S118-15-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game mode is “3” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game mode is “3” or more based on the value stored in the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . If it is determined that the pseudo game mode is “3” or more (step S118-15-10 = Yes), the pseudo game mode setting process subroutine is terminated, and the game state transition process step S118-16. The process is transferred to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo game mode is not “3” or more (step S118-15-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S118-15-11.

(Step S118-15-11)
In step S118-15-11, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game mode addition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. By this process, for example, when the value stored in the pseudo game mode storage area is “0”, it is updated to “1”. When the process of step S118-15-11 ends, the pseudo game mode setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S118-16 of the game state transition process.

(Step S118-15-12)
In step S118-15-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the same as the previous time. Specifically, in the previous game, the information related to the pseudo game or the spinning effect that is to be set in the previous game is the same as the information related to the pseudo game or the spinning effect that is to be set in the game. The process which determines whether it is is is performed. If it is determined that it is the same as the previous time (step S118-15-12 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S118-15-13, and if it is determined that it is not the same as the previous time ( Step S118-15-12 = No), the pseudo game mode setting process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S118-16 of the game state transition process.

  Here, “information related to the pseudo game or the spinning effect to be set” refers to reservation information related to the reservation of the pseudo game or the spinning effect. The “reservation information” in this embodiment is provided from the reservation number “0” to the reservation number “7”, and the reservation number “0” is selected when the spinning effect or the pseudo game is not executed, In the case where the reservation number “1” is selected to be notified when “Red Seven BB” and “White Seven BB” are finished, notification of whether or not to shift to “ART game number determination ready state” is made. , Corresponding to the spinning effect that informs the transition to the “ART game number determination ready state”, and the reservation number “2” indicates whether or not to transition to the “ART game number determination ready state”. In the case where notification is selected when “Red Seven BB” and “White Seven BB” are finished, the spinning effect that is selected when notifying the transition to the “ART game number determination ready state” is selected. Corresponding, reservation number "3" When the notification of whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination ready state” is selected when “Red Seven BB” and “White Seven BB” are ended, “ART game number determination” is selected. This corresponds to the turning effect selected when notifying that the state does not shift to the “preparation state”. In addition, when the reservation number “1” is set and when the reservation number “2” is set, it is possible to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” by performing different spinning effects. It will be notified.

  In addition, the reservation number “4” is reserved to execute a pseudo game of “single BAR uniform A”, “single BAR uniform B”, and “single BAR uniform C” at the end of “different color black seven BB”. The reservation number “5” is executed at the end of “Different Black Seven BB”, and a “double BAR aligned A”, “double BAR aligned B”, and “double BAR aligned C” pseudo game is executed. Is selected when the reservation is made, and the reservation number “6” executes “pseudo game F”, “pseudo game G”, and “pseudo game H” in “red seven BB” or “white seven BB” The reservation number “7” is selected when “pseudo game I” is executed in “Red Seven BB” or “White Seven BB”.

(Step S118-15-13)
In step S118-15-13, the main CPU 301 performs an RB gaming state pseudo game setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a spinning effect or a pseudo game based on a value stored in an effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. More specifically, a process of storing the value stored in the effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in the execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. When the process of step S118-15-13 is completed, the subroutine of the pseudo game mode setting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118-16 of the game state transition process.

(Processing by display status)
Next, based on FIG. 88, the process according to display state performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 34 will be described. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing by state upon display.

(Step S119-1)
In step S <b> 119-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “normal state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. When it is determined that the state is “normal state” (step S119-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2, and when it is determined that the state is not “normal state” (step S119). -1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display normal state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S111-2 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “bonus preparation state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “bonus preparation state” (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and if it is determined that the state is not the “bonus preparation state” ( Step S119-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-5.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first bonus preparation state”, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first bonus preparation state process to be described later, In the case of “status”, processing for display second bonus preparation status described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-4 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “bonus state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state is “bonus state” (step S119-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6, and if it is determined that the state is not “bonus state” (step S119). −5 = No), the process proceeds to step S111-7.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus process at the time of display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state”, the main CPU 301 performs the first BB state process at the time of display described later, and when the state is the “second BB state”. Performs processing for the second BB state at the time of display described later, and performs processing for the first special BB state at the time of display described later when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first special BB state”. In the case of the “second special BB state”, a display-time second special BB state process, which will be described later, is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-6 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-7)
In step S119-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine whether or not. If it is determined that the state is “ART game number determination preparation state” (step S119-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8, and is determined not to be “ART game number determination preparation state”. If it is determined (step S119-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-9.

(Step S119-8)
In step S119-8, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART game number determination preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first ART game number determination preparation state process, which will be described later. In the case of the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, a second ART game number determination preparation state process at the time of display described later is performed, and the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. In some cases, a display-time third ART game number determination preparation state process described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-8 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-9)
In step S119-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “art bonus state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART bonus state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is “ART bonus state” (step S119-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART bonus state”. (Step S119-9 = No), the process proceeds to Step S119-11.

(Step S119-10)
In step S 119-10, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus process for the display-time ART, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 105. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “the first BB state during ART”, the main CPU 301 performs a process for the first BB state during the ART during display, which will be described later, and “the second BB during ART”. In the case of “status”, processing for the second BB state during ART at the time of display described later is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-10 is completed, the subroutine for the display time state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-11)
In step S119-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART ready state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is “ART ready state” (step S119-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-12, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART ready state” ( Step S119-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-13.

(Step S119-12)
In step S119-12, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 as the “second bonus preparation state” when the “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S119-12 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-13)
In step S119-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state is the “ART state” (step S119-13 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14, and if it is determined that the state is not the “ART state” (step S119). −13 = No), and the process proceeds to step S119-15.

(Step S119-14)
In step S119-14, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state end check process, which will be described later. Then, when the process of step S119-14 is completed, the subroutine for the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-15)
In step S <b> 119-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the “ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is “ART additional state” (step S119-15 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16, and if it is determined that the state is not “ART additional state” ( Step S119-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-17.

(Step S119-16)
In step S119-16, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “first ART added state”, the main CPU 301 performs a display first ART added state process to be described later, and in “second ART added state”. In some cases, a display second ART addition state process described later is performed. When the state managed by the main control board 300 is a “third ART addition state”, a display third ART addition state process described later is performed. I do. Then, when the process of step S119-16 is completed, the subroutine of the display state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-17)
In step S119-17, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time ART game number notification state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 as the “second bonus preparation state” when the “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S119-17 is completed, the subroutine for the state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for normal state during display)
Next, based on FIG. 89, the display normal state process performed by the process of step S119-2 of FIG. 88 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing during display.

(Step S119-2-1)
In step S119-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a normal mode transition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is managed by the main control board 300 when it is determined to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300 in the mode transition lottery process in step S111-2-5. Perform processing to switch modes. Then, when the process of step S119-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-2.

(Step S119-2-2)
In step S <b> 119-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed (step S119-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14, and “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed. "Is not displayed (step S119-2-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-3.

(Step S119-2-3)
In step S119-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is ON is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-4, and the ART game number determination state winning flag is determined. If it is determined that is not ON (step S119-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-6.

(Step S119-2-4)
In step S119-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-5.

(Step S119-2-5)
In step S119-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a warning end check process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 as the “second bonus preparation state” when the “bonus” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S119-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-15.

(Step S119-2-6)
In step S119-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processes. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-7.

(Step S119-2-7)
In step S119-2-7, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the current pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation” based on the value of the pseudo game mode storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game preparation” (step S119-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-8, and the pseudo game mode is “pseudo game”. If it is determined that it is not “preparation” (step S119-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-15.

(Step S119-2-8)
In step S119-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the state is the “second RT gaming state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the “second RT gaming state” based on the value stored in the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the state is the “second RT gaming state” (step S119-2-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-9, and it is determined that the state is not the “second RT gaming state”. If it is determined (step S119-2-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-15.

(Step S119-2-9)
In step S119-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs an ART game number determination state distribution lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 shifts to the “first ART game number determination state” based on an ART game number determination state distribution lottery table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302 or “third ART A process of determining by lottery whether to shift to the “game number determination state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-10.

(Step S119-2-10)
In step S119-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first ART game number determination state” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination state” as a result of performing the ART game number determination state distribution lottery process in step S119-2-9. Perform the process. If it is determined that the “first ART game number determination state” is won (step S119-2-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-11, and the “first ART game number determination state” is determined. "Is determined not to be won (step S119-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-12.

(Step S119-2-11)
In step S119-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “first ART game number determination state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-13.

(Step S119-2-12)
In step S119-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “third ART game number determination state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-13.

(Step S119-2-13)
In step S119-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-15.

(Step S119-2-14)
In step S119-2-14, the main CPU 301 performs bonus display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 determines that the state managed by the main control board 300 is “first special BB state”, or “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, or When the process of shifting to the “second special BB state” is performed, and the “combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the main control When the state managed by the substrate 300 is shifted to the “second BB state”, and the “combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the effective line, the state is managed by the main control substrate 300. For example, a process of shifting the state to the “first BB state”. Then, when the process of step S119-2-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-15.

(Step S119-2-15)
In step S119-2-15, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-2-15 is completed, the subroutine for the normal state processing at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Significant end check processing)
Next, based on FIG. 90, the precursor end check process performed by the process of step S119-2-5 of FIG. 89 will be described. Note that FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a subroutine of a precursor end check process.

(Step S119-2-5-1)
In step S119-2-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (step S119-2-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-2, and the precursor game When it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “0” (step S119-2-5-1 = No), the subroutine of the sign end check process is terminated, and the display normal state process step S119- The process proceeds to 2-15.

(Step S119-2-5-2)
In step S119-2-5-2, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not “bonus” has been won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won based on a value stored in a carry flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that “bonus” is won (step S119-2-5-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-3, and “bonus” is won. If it is determined that it has not (step S119-2-5-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-4.

(Step S119-2-5-3)
In step S119-2-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “first bonus preparation state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-5-3 is completed, the subroutine of the sign end check process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S119-2-15 of the display normal state process.

(Step S119-2-5-4)
In step S119-2-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-2-5-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-5, and the first ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-2-5-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-6.

(Step S119-2-5-5)
In step S119-2-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-5-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-8.

(Step S119-2-5-6)
In step S119-2-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the third ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-2-5-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-7, and the third ART When it is determined that the number-of-games determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-2-5-6 = No), the subroutine of the precursor end check process is ended, and the display normal state process step S119- The process proceeds to 2-15.

(Step S119-2-5-7)
In step S119-2-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-5-8.

(Step S119-2-5-8)
In step S119-2-5-8, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processes. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-2-5-8 is completed, the precursor end check process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119-2-15 of the display normal state process.

(Bonus display processing)
Next, based on FIG. 91, the bonus display time process performed by the process of step S119-2-14 of FIG. 89 will be described. FIG. 91 shows a subroutine for bonus display processing.

(Step S119-2-14-1)
In step S <b> 119-2-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. And when it determines with "the combination of the symbols concerning the same color black seven BB" being displayed (step S119-2-14-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S119-2-14-2, If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is not displayed (step S119-2-14-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-5.

(Step S119-2-14-2)
In step S119-2-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is ON is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-2-14-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-3, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-2-14-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-4.

(Step S119-2-14-3)
In step S119-2-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first special BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “first special BB state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-14-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-11.

(Step S119-2-14-4)
In step S119-2-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “second special BB state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-14-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-11.

(Step S119-2-14-5)
In step S119-2-14-5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to the white seven BB” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether “a combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to the white seven BB” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed (step S119-2-14-5 = Yes), step S119- 2-14-6, when it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is not displayed (step S119-2). -14-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-7.

(Step S119-2-14-6)
In step S119-2-14-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “second BB state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-14-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-11.

(Step S119-2-14-7)
In step S <b> 119-2-14-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to different color black Seven BB” is displayed (step S119-2-14-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-8. When it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is not displayed (step S119-2-14-7 = No), the bonus display processing subroutine is terminated, and the bonus display processing is performed. The processing shifts to the subroutine call source.

(Step S119-2-14-8)
In step S119-2-14-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “first BB state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-2-14-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-9.

(Step S119-2-14-9)
In step S119-2-14-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is OFF is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF (step S119-2-14-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-10, and the number of ART games is determined. When it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not OFF (step S119-2-14-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-11.

(Step S119-2-14-10)
In step S119-2-14-10, the main CPU 301 performs an ART transition determination state transition preparation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game performed in an “ART transition determination state” that is transitioned after the end of the “first BB state” based on the first BB state pseudo game lottery table provided in the main ROM 302. The process etc. which determine are performed. Then, when the process of step S119-2-14-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2-14-11.

(Step S119-2-14-11)
In step S119-2-14-11, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processes. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-2-14-11 ends, the bonus display time process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to the caller of the bonus display time process subroutine.

(Processing for bonus preparation status when displayed)
Next, the display-time bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-4 of FIG. 88 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing for displaying bonus preparation state.

(Step S119-4-1)
In step S119-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first bonus preparation state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first bonus preparation state” (step S119-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-2 and is not the “first bonus preparation state”. Is determined (step S119-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-4-3.

(Step S119-4-2)
In step S119-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs bonus display processing and the like. When the process of step S119-4-2 ends, the subroutine for the display-time bonus preparation state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-4-3)
In step S119-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time second bonus preparation state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART, which will be described later. When the process of step S119-4-3 ends, the bonus preparation state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for the first bonus preparation state at the time of display)
Next, the display-time first bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-4-2 of FIG. 92 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first bonus preparation state process at the time of display.

(Step S119-4-2-1)
In step S119-4-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a mode transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S119-4-2-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-4-2-2.

(Step S119-4-2-2)
In step S119-4-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a normal mode transition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 manages the main control board 300 when it is determined to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300 in the mode transition lottery process in step S119-4-2-1. The process to change the mode to be performed is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-4-2-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-4-2-3.

(Step S119-4-2-3)
In step S119-4-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process detailed with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 determines that the state managed by the main control board 300 is “first special BB state”, or “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, or When the process of shifting to the “second special BB state” is performed, and the “combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the main control When the state managed by the substrate 300 is shifted to the “second BB state”, and the “combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the effective line, the state is managed by the main control substrate 300. For example, a process of shifting the state to the “first BB state”. Then, when the process of step S119-4-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-2-4.

(Step S119-4-2-4)
In step S119-4-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-4-2-4 is completed, the subroutine for the first bonus preparation state at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for second bonus preparation status when displayed)
Next, the display-time second bonus preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-4-3 of FIG. 92 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second bonus preparation state process at the time of display.

(Step S119-4-3-1)
In step S119-4-3-1, the main CPU 301 performs ART bonus display processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-4-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-3-3.

(Step S119-4-3-3)
In step S119-4-3-3, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-4-3-3 is completed, the subroutine for the second bonus preparation state at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process during bonus display during ART)
Next, based on FIG. 95, the bonus display process during ART performed by the process of step S119-4-3-1 in FIG. 94 will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during bonus display during ART.

(Step S119-4-3-1-1)
In step S119-4-3-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed (step S119-4-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-3-1-2. , And when it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is not displayed (step S119-4-3-1-1 = No), step S119-4-3-1 The process is shifted to -3.

(Step S119-4-3-1-2)
In step S119-4-3-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “second special BB state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-3-1-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-4-3-1-7.

(Step S119-4-3-1-3)
In step S119-4-3-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed. . Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether “a combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to the white seven BB” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed (step S119-4-3-1-3 = Yes), step When the process proceeds to S119-4-3-1-4, and it is determined that neither “the combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” nor “the combination of symbols related to the white seven BB” is displayed. (Step S119-4-3-1-3 = No), the process proceeds to Step S119-4-3-1-5.

(Step S119-4-3-1-4)
In step S119-4-3-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second BB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “second BB state during ART” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-3-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-3-1-7.

(Step S119-4-3-1-5)
In step S <b> 119-4-1-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to different color black Seven BB” is displayed (step S119-4-3-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4-3-1-6. , And if it is determined that “the combination of symbols relating to the different color black seven BB” is not displayed (step S119-4-3-1-5 = No), the bonus display processing subroutine during ART And the process proceeds to the caller of the subroutine for the bonus display process during ART.

(Step S119-4-3-1-6)
In step S119-4-3-1-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first BB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the “first BB state during ART” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-4-3-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-4-3-1-7.

(Step S119-4-3-1-7)
In step S119-4-3-1-7, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processes during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 provides the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the main RAM 303. A process of clearing the value of the third ART added state game number counter, the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the like is performed. When the process of step S119-4-3-1-7 is completed, the subroutine for the ART bonus display process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the caller of the subroutine for the ART bonus display process.

(Process for bonus state when displayed)
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the display bonus state process performed by the process of step S119-6 of FIG. 88 will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a subroutine for display bonus state processing.

(Step S119-6-1)
In step S <b> 119-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “first BB state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. When it is determined that the state is the “first BB state” (step S119-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2, and it is determined that the state is not the “first BB state”. In the case (step S119-6-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-3.

(Step S119-6-2)
In step S119-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at the end of “BB”. When the process of step S119-6-2 ends, the display bonus state process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-3)
In step S119-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “second BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second BB state” (step S119-6-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4, and it is determined that the state is not the “second BB state”. In the case (step S119-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-5.

(Step S119-6-4)
In step S119-6-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for the second BB state during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at the end of “BB”. When the process of step S119-6-4 is completed, the subroutine for display bonus state processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-5)
In step S119-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first special BB state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first special BB state” based on the information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first special BB state” (step S119-6-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-6 and is not the “first special BB state”. (Step S119-6-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-7.

(Step S119-6-6)
In step S119-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first special BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to “0” at the end of “BB”. When the process of step S119-6-6 is completed, the subroutine for display bonus state processing is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-7)
In step S119-6-7, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time second special BB state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303 to “0” at the end of “BB”. When the process of step S119-6-7 is completed, the subroutine for displaying bonus state is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for 1st BB state during display)
Next, the display-time first BB state process performed by the process of step S119-6-2 of FIG. 96 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display-time first BB state process.

(Step S119-6-2-1)
In step S 119-6-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that it is the end of “BB” (step S119-6-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-2, and the end of “BB”. If it is determined that it is not (step S119-6-2-1 = No), the subroutine for the first BB state process at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-2-2)
In step S119-6-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-2-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-3.

(Step S119-6-2-3)
In step S119-6-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-6-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-4, and the first ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-6-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-5.

(Step S119-6-2-4)
In step S119-6-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-2-4 ends, the subroutine for the first BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-2-5)
In step S119-6-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. When it is determined that the third ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-6-2-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-6, and the third ART When it is determined that the number-of-games determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-6-2-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-7.

(Step S119-6-2-6)
In step S119-6-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-2-6 ends, the subroutine for the first BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-2-7)
In step S119-6-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a pseudo game is being executed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game based on a value stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game is being executed (step S119-6-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-8, and it is determined that the pseudo game is not being executed. If it is determined (step S119-6-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-2-9.

(Step S119-6-2-8)
In step S119-6-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART transition determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “ART transition determination state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-2-8 ends, the subroutine for the first BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-2-9)
In step S119-6-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs ART transition determination state compensation processing. Here, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART transition determination state”, the state shifts to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or “the third ART game” based on the result of the pseudo game. A process for determining whether to shift to the “number determination ready state” or “normal state” is performed. For example, the player can perform a left stop button 11, a middle stop button 12, and a right stop button 13. If the operation order is incorrect, the pseudo game may not be executed. For this reason, the main CPU 301 executes a lottery equivalent to the case where the pseudo game is executed, so that after the “first BB state” ends, the main CPU 301 shifts to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or “third ART Processing for determining whether to shift to the “game number determination ready state” or to shift to the “normal state” is performed. When it is determined that the main CPU 301 shifts to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the main CPU 301 sets the “first ART game number determination preparation state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, the process of setting the “third ART game number determination preparation state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. If it is determined to shift to the “normal state”, a process of setting the “normal state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Further, when it is determined to shift to the “first ART game number determination preparation state” or when it is determined to shift to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”, it is provided in the main RAM 303. A process of adding “3” to the value of the navigation stock counter is performed. When the process of step S119-6-2-9 ends, the subroutine for the first BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for 2nd BB state during display)
Next, based on FIG. 98, the display time second BB state process performed by the process of step S119-6-4 of FIG. 96 will be described. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display-time second BB state process.

(Step S119-6-4-1)
In step S <b> 119-6-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that the end of “BB” is reached (step S119-6-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-2, and the end of “BB”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S119-6-4-1 = No), the display-time second BB state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop processing.

(Step S119-6-4-2)
In step S119-6-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-3.

(Step S119-6-4-3)
In step S119-6-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-6-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-4, and the first ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-6-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-5.

(Step S119-6-4-4)
In step S119-6-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-4-4 ends, the subroutine for the second BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-4-5)
In step S119-6-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the third ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the third ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-6-4-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-6, and the third ART If it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-6-4-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-7.

(Step S119-6-4-6)
In step S119-6-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-4-6 ends, the subroutine for the second BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-4-7)
In step S119-6-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a mode transition lottery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of drawing whether or not to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S119-6-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-8.

(Step S119-6-4-8)
In step S119-6-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a normal mode transition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 manages the main control board 300 when it is determined to shift the mode managed by the main control board 300 in the mode transition lottery process in step S119-6-4-7. The process to change the mode to be performed is performed. When step S119-6-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-4-9.

(Step S119-6-4-9)
In step S119-6-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-4-9 ends, the subroutine for the second BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for first special BB state during display)
Next, the display-time first special BB state process performed by the process of step S119-6-6 of FIG. 96 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first special BB state process during display.

(Step S119-6-6-1)
In step S119-6-6-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that it is the end of “BB” (step S119-6-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-6-2, and the end of “BB”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S119-6-6-1 = No), the subroutine for the first special BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-6-2)
In step S119-6-6-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the bell winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-6-3.

(Step S119-6-6-3)
In step S119-6-6-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-6-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-6-4.

(Step S119-6-6-4)
In step S119-6-6-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-6-6-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-6-5, and the first ART If it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-6-6-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-6-6.

(Step S119-6-6-5)
In step S119-6-6-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-6-5 ends, the subroutine for the first special BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-6-6)
In step S119-6-6-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-6-6 ends, the subroutine for the first special BB state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for second special BB state during display)
Next, the display-time second special BB state process performed by the process of step S119-6-7 of FIG. 96 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for the second special BB state at the time of display.

(Step S119-6-7-1)
In step S119-6-7-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that the end of “BB” is reached (step S119-6-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-7-2, and the end of “BB”. If it is determined that this is not the case (step S119-6-7-1 = No), the subroutine for the second special BB state process at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-7-2)
In step S119-6-7-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the bell winning number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the bell winning number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-6-7-3.

(Step S119-6-7-3)
In step S119-6-7-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-6-7-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-6-7-4.

(Step S119-6-7-4)
In step S119-6-7-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing to determine whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the first ART game number determination state winning flag in the first ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the first ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-6-7-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6-7-5, and the first ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-6-7-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-6-7-6.

(Step S119-6-7-5)
In step S119-6-7-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “first ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-7-5 ends, the subroutine for the second special BB state process during display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6-7-6)
In step S119-6-7-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to a “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6-7-6 ends, the subroutine for the second special BB state at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for determining the number of ART games during display)
Next, the display-time ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-8 of FIG. 88 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a subroutine of a display time ART game number determination preparation state process.

(Step S119-8-1)
In step S <b> 119-8-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”. The process which determines whether or not is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first ART game number determination preparation state” (step S119-8-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2, and the “first ART game number determination preparation state” is determined. If it is determined that the state is not “state” (step S119-8-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-3.

(Step S119-8-2)
In step S119-8-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time first ART game number determination preparation state process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed. Etc. When the process of step S119-8-2 is completed, the subroutine for the display time ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-8-3)
In step S119-8-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. The process which determines whether or not is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second ART game number determination preparation state” (step S119-8-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4, and “the second ART game number determination preparation state”. When it is determined that the state is not “state” (step S119-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5.

(Step S119-8-4)
In step S119-8-4, the main CPU 301 performs display-time second ART game number determination preparation state processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed. Etc. When the process of step S119-8-4 is completed, the subroutine for the display time ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-8-5)
In step S119-8-5, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time third ART game number determination preparation state process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “the combination of symbols related to BB” is displayed. Etc. When the process of step S119-8-5 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(First ART game number determination preparation state process at the time of display)
Next, the display-time first ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-8-2 of FIG. 101 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 102 is a view showing a subroutine of the first ART game number determination preparation state processing at the time of display.

(Step S119-8-2-1)
In step S119-8-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed (step S119-8-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-2, and “ When it is determined that “the combination of symbols” is not displayed (step S119-8-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-5.

(Step S119-8-2-2)
In step S119-8-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-3.

(Step S119-8-2-3)
In step S119-8-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-4.

(Step S119-8-2-4)
In step S119-8-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART described in detail with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-13.

(Step S119-8-2-5)
In step S119-8-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-8-2-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-6, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S119-8-2-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-9.

(Step S119-8-2-6)
In step S119-8-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-7.

(Step S119-8-2-7)
In step S119-8-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-8.

(Step S119-8-2-8)
In step S119-8-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-13.

(Step S119-8-2-9)
In step S119-8-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo game start time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo game start based on a value stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game is started (step S119-8-2-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-10, and it is determined that the pseudo game is not started. If it is determined (step S119-8-2-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-13.

(Step S119-8-2-10)
In step S119-8-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-11.

(Step S119-8-2-11)
In step S119-8-2-11, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-12.

(Step S119-8-2-12)
In step S119-8-2-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “first ART game number determination state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-2-13.

(Step S119-8-2-13)
In step S119-8-2-13, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-8-2-13 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time first ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Second ART game number determination preparation state process at the time of display)
Next, the display-time second ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-8-4 of FIG. 101 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display time second ART game number determination preparation state processing.

(Step S119-8-4-1)
In step S119-8-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed (step S119-8-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-2, When it is determined that the “symbol combination” is not displayed (step S119-8-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-5.

(Step S119-8-4-2)
In step S119-8-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-3.

(Step S119-8-4-3)
In step S119-8-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty recovery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-4.

(Step S119-8-4-4)
In step S119-8-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-13.

(Step S119-8-4-5)
In step S119-8-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-8-4-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-6, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S119-8-4-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-9.

(Step S119-8-4-6)
In step S119-8-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-7.

(Step S119-8-4-7)
In step S119-8-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-8.

(Step S119-8-4-8)
In step S119-8-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-13.

(Step S119-8-4-9)
In step S119-8-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pseudo game starts. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo game start based on a value stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the pseudo game is started (step S119-8-4-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-10, and it is determined that the pseudo game is not started. If it is determined (step S119-8-4-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-13.

(Step S119-8-4-10)
In step S119-8-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-11.

(Step S119-8-4-11)
In step S119-8-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-12.

(Step S119-8-4-12)
In step S119-8-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “second ART game number determination state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-4-13.

(Step S119-8-4-13)
In step S119-8-4-13, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-4-13 ends, the subroutine for the second ART game number determination preparation state process at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(3rd ART game number determination preparation state process at the time of display)
Next, the display-time third ART game number determination preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-8-5 of FIG. 101 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the display time third ART game number determination preparation state processing.

(Step S119-8-5-1)
In step S119-8-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed (step S119-8-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-2, If it is determined that the “symbol combination” is not displayed (step S119-8-5-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-5.

(Step S119-8-5-2)
In step S119-8-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-3.

(Step S119-8-5-3)
In step S119-8-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-4.

(Step S119-8-5-4)
In step S119-8-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-13.

(Step S119-8-5-5)
In step S119-8-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-8-5-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-6, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S119-8-5-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-9.

(Step S119-8-5-6)
In step S119-8-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-7.

(Step S119-8-5-7)
In step S119-8-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty recovery process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-8.

(Step S119-8-5-8)
In step S119-8-5-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-13.

(Step S119-8-5-9)
In step S119-8-5-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo game start time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a pseudo game start based on a value stored in an execution effect storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When it is determined that the pseudo game is started (step S119-8-5-9 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-10, and it is determined that the pseudo game is not started. If it is determined (step S119-8-5-9 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-13.

(Step S119-8-5-10)
In step S119-8-5-10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART game number determination preparation state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-11.

(Step S119-8-5-11)
In step S119-8-5-11, the main CPU 301 performs a penalty return process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “0” to the value of the penalty counter provided in the main RAM 303 and performs processing for turning off the penalty flag in the penalty flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. . Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-12.

(Step S119-8-5-12)
In step S119-8-5-12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a “third ART game number determination state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-8-5-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-8-5-13.

(Step S119-8-5-13)
In step S119-8-5-13, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-8-5-13 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time third ART game number determination preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for bonus state during ART during display)
Next, based on FIG. 105, the display state ART bonus process for display performed by the process of step S119-10 of FIG. 88 will be described. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a subroutine for bonus state processing during ART during display.

(Step S119-10-1)
In step S <b> 119-10-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first BB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first BB state during ART” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first BB state during ART” (step S119-10-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-2 and is not the “first BB state during ART”. Is determined (step S119-10-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-3.

(Step S119-10-2)
In step S119-10-2, the main CPU 301 performs the processing for the first BB state during ART during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the special BB flag provided in the main RAM 303 when “BB” ends. When the process of step S119-10-2 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus state process during ART during display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-3)
In step S <b> 119-10-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “second BB state during ART”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state during ART” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second BB state during ART” (step S119-10-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-4 and is not the “second BB state during ART”. Is determined (step S119-10-3 = No), the subroutine for the bonus state process during ART during display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S111-10-4)
In step S111-10-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for the second BB state during ART during display, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the special BB flag provided in the main RAM 303 when “BB” ends. When the process of step S119-10-4 is completed, the subroutine for the bonus state process during display ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for 1st BB state during ART during display)
Next, the processing for the first BB state during the ART at the time of display performed by the processing of step S119-10-2 of FIG. 105 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the processing for the first BB state during ART during display.

(Step S119-10-2-1)
In step S <b> 119-10-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that it is the end of “BB” (step S119-10-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-2, and the end of “BB”. If it is determined that it is not (step S119-10-2-1 = No), the subroutine for the first BB state process during the ART at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-2-2)
In step S119-10-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-10-2-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-3.

(Step S119-10-2-3)
In step S119-10-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is ON is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-10-2-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-4, and the number of ART games is determined. If it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-10-2-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-7.

(Step S119-10-2-4)
In step S119-10-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Processing for determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON is performed. If it is determined that the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-10-2-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-5, and the second ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-10-2-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-6.

(Step S119-10-2-5)
In step S119-10-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-2-5 is completed, the subroutine for the first BB state process during the ART at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-2-6)
In step S119-10-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-2-6 ends, the subroutine for the first BB state process during the ART at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-2-7)
In step S119-10-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART games at the end of the bonus during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the bonus end addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302 (see FIG. 26). Process. Then, when the process of step S119-10-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10-2-8.

(Step S119-10-2-8)
In step S <b> 119-10-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the state managed by the main control board 300 as the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-2-8 ends, the subroutine for the first BB state process during the display time ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Process for 2nd BB state during ART during display)
Next, the processing for the second BB state during the ART at the time of display performed by the processing of step S119-10-4 of FIG. 105 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the processing for the second BB state during ART during display.

(Step S119-10-4-1)
In step S <b> 119-10-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “BB” has ended. Specifically, the main CPU 301 specifies “BB” that is operating based on the value stored in the BB operating information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and then is provided in the main RAM 303. Based on the value of the payout number counter, it is determined whether or not “BB” has ended. If it is determined that it is the end of “BB” (step S119-10-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-2, and the end of “BB”. If it is determined that it is not (step S119-10-4-1 = No), the subroutine for the second BB state process during the ART at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-4-2)
In step S119-10-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the special BB flag in the special BB flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-10-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-3.

(Step S119-10-4-3)
In step S119-10-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 or the third ART game number determination state provided in the main RAM 303. Processing for determining whether or not the third ART game number determination state winning flag in the winning flag storage area is ON is performed. If it is determined that the ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-10-4-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-4, and the number of ART games is determined. When it is determined that the determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-10-4-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-7.

(Step S119-10-4-4)
In step S119-10-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Processing for determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON is performed. If it is determined that the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-10-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-5, and the second ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-10-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-6.

(Step S119-10-4-5)
In step S119-10-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-4-5 is completed, the subroutine for the second BB state process during the display time ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-4-6)
In step S119-10-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to a “third ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-4-6 is completed, the subroutine for the second BB state process during the display time ART is ended, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-10-4-7)
In step S119-10-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART games at the end of the bonus during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” based on the bonus end addition lottery table provided in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S119-10-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-10-4-8.

(Step S119-10-4-8)
In step S119-10-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an “ART ready state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-10-4-8 ends, the subroutine for the second BB state process during the ART at the time of display ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for ART preparation state at the time of display)
Next, the display-time ART preparation state process performed by the process of step S119-12 of FIG. 88 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a subroutine for display-time ART preparation state processing.

(Step S119-12-1)
In step S <b> 119-12-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed (step S119-12-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-12-2, and the “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed. "Is not displayed (step S119-12-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-12-3.

(Step S119-12-2)
In step S119-12-2, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-12-3.

(Step S119-12-3)
In step S119-12-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-12-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-12-4, and it is determined that the “bonus” is not won. In that case (step S119-12-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-12-5.

(Step S119-12-4)
In step S119-12-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-12-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-12-5.

(Step S119-12-5)
In step S119-12-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the second RT gaming state transition replay” is displayed (step S119-12-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-12-6, If it is determined that the “combination of symbols relating to 2RT gaming state transition replay” is not displayed (step S119-12-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-12-7.

(Step S119-12-6)
In step S119-12-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an “ART state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-12-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-12-7.

(Step S119-12-7)
In step S119-12-7, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-12-7 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART preparation state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(ART state processing during display)
Next, based on FIG. 109, the display state ART state process performed by the process of step S119-14 of FIG. 88 will be described. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a subroutine for display state ART state processing.

(Step S119-14-1)
In step S <b> 119-14-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed (step S119-14-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-2, and “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed. "Is not displayed (step S119-14-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-14-3.

(Step S119-14-2)
In step S119-14-2, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-14-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-6.

(Step S119-14-3)
In step S119-14-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-4.

(Step S119-14-4)
In step S119-14-4, the main CPU 301 performs an ART early warning end check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this processing, the main CPU 301 is managed by the main control board 300 when the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0” and “bonus” is won. For example, a process of shifting to a “second bonus preparation state”. Then, when the process of step S119-14-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-5.

(Step S119-14-5)
In step S119-14-5, the main CPU 301 performs an ART state end check process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state” when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. Etc. Then, when the process of step S119-14-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-6.

(Step S119-14-6)
In step S119-14-6, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-14-6 is completed, the subroutine for the ART state at the time of display is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(ART precursor end check process)
Next, based on FIG. 110, the ART sign precursor end check process performed by the process of step S119-14-4 of FIG. 109 will be described. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART warning sign end check process.

(Step S119-14-4-1)
In step S119-14-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the precursor game number counter is “0” (step S119-14-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-2, and the precursor game If it is determined that the value of the number counter is not “0” (step S119-14-4-1 = No), the subroutine of the ART warning sign end check process is terminated, and the display ART state processing step The processing moves to S119-14-5.

(Step S119-14-4-2)
In step S119-14-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-14-4-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-3, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S119-14-4-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-4.

(Step S119-14-4-3)
In step S119-14-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-14-4-3 is completed, the subroutine of the ART warning sign end check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119-14-5 of the display state ART state process.

(Step S119-14-4-4)
In step S119-14-4-4, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the second ART game number determination state winning flag is ON (step S119-14-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-5, and the second ART When it is determined that the game number determination state winning flag is not ON (step S119-14-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-6.

(Step S119-14-4-5)
In step S119-14-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second ART game number determination preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-12.

(Step S119-14-4-6)
In step S119-14-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first ART added state stock counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first ART added state stock counter is “1” or more based on the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. I do. When it is determined that the value of the first ART added state stock counter is “1” or more (step S119-14-4-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-7. If it is determined that the value of the first ART added state stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S119-14-4-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-8.

(Step S119-14-4-7)
In step S119-14-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “first ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the “first ART added state” in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-12.

(Step S119-14-4-8)
In step S119-14-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second ART added state stock counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second ART added state stock counter is “1” or more based on the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the value of the second ART added state stock counter is “1” or more (step S119-14-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-9. If it is determined that the value of the second ART added state stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S119-14-4-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-10.

(Step S119-14-4-9)
In step S119-14-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second ART added state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-12.

(Step S119-14-4-10)
In step S119-14-4-10, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the third ART added state stock counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the third ART added state stock counter is “1” or more based on the value of the third ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that the value of the third ART added state stock counter is “1” or more (step S119-14-4-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-11. If it is determined that the value of the third ART added state stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S119-14-4-10 = No), the ART early warning end check subroutine is terminated and displayed. The process proceeds to step S119-14-5 of the ART state process.

(Step S119-14-4-11)
In step S119-14-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “third ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “third ART added state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-12.

(Step S119-14-4-12)
In step S119-14-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processing during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 provides the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the main RAM 303. A process of clearing the value of the third ART added state game number counter, the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the like is performed. When the process of step S119-14-4-12 ends, the subroutine of the ART warning sign end check process ends, and the process proceeds to step S119-14-5 of the display state ART state process.

(ART state end check process)
Next, based on FIG. 111, the ART state end check process performed by the process of step S119-14-5 of FIG. 109 will be described. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART state end check process.

(Step S119-14-5-1)
In step S <b> 119-14-5-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not it is in the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state” based on the value stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Perform the process. If it is determined that the state is the “ART state” (step S119-14-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-2, and is not the “ART state”. If YES (step S119-14-5-1 = No), the ART state end check subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119-14-6 of the display state ART state.

(Step S119-14-5-2)
In step S119-14-5-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART game number determination state winning flag in the second ART game number determination state winning flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is OFF. If it is determined that the second ART game number determination state winning flag is OFF (step S119-14-5-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-3, and the second ART When it is determined that the number-of-games determination state winning flag is not OFF (step S119-14-5-2 = No), the ART state end check processing subroutine is terminated, and the display state ART state processing step S119 is completed. The process is shifted to -14-6.

(Step S119-14-5-3)
In step S119-14-5-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first ART added state stock counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the first ART added state stock counter is “0” based on the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. If it is determined that the value of the first ART added state stock counter is “0” (step S119-14-5-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-4. If it is determined that the value of the first ART added state stock counter is not “0” (step S119-14-5-3 = No), the ART state end check processing subroutine is ended and the display ART state is displayed. The process proceeds to process step S119-14-6.

(Step S119-14-5-4)
In step S119-14-5-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second ART added state stock counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the second ART added state stock counter is “0” based on the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. If it is determined that the value of the second ART added state stock counter is “0” (step S119-14-5-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-5. If it is determined that the value of the second ART addition state stock counter is not “0” (step S119-14-5-4 = No), the ART state end check processing subroutine is ended, and the display ART state is displayed. The process proceeds to process step S119-14-6.

(Step S119-14-5-5)
In step S119-14-5-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third ART added state stock counter is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the third ART added state stock counter is “0” based on the value of the third ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Do. If it is determined that the value of the third ART added state stock counter is “0” (step S119-14-5-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-6. When it is determined that the value of the third ART addition state stock counter is not “0” (step S119-14-5-5 = No), the ART state end check processing subroutine is ended, and the display ART state is displayed. The process proceeds to process step S119-14-6.

(Step S119-14-5-6)
In step S119-14-5-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S119-14-5-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-7. When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not “0” (step S119-14-5-6 = No), the ART state end check processing subroutine is terminated, and the ART state at the time of display is displayed. The process proceeds to process step S119-14-6.

(Step S119-14-5-7)
In step S119-14-5-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the precursor game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-14-5-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-5-8.

(Step S119-14-5-8)
In step S119-14-5-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “normal state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “normal state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-14-5-8 is completed, the ART state end check processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S119-14-6 of the display state ART state process.

(Process for adding ART during display)
Next, based on FIG. 112, the display-time ART addition state process performed by the process of step S119-16 of FIG. 88 will be described. Note that FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the display-time ART addition state processing.

(Step S119-16-1)
In step S119-16-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “first ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “first ART added state” (step S119-16-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2 and is determined not to be the “first ART added state”. If it is determined (step S119-16-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-3.

(Step S119-16-2)
In step S119-16-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display first ART addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “bonus” is displayed. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART addition state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-16-3)
In step S <b> 119-16-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the “second ART added state” is set. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “second ART added state” (step S119-16-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4 and is determined not to be the “second ART added state”. If it is determined (step S119-16-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-5.

(Step S119-16-4)
In step S119-16-4, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time second ART addition state process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “bonus” is displayed. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART addition state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-16-5)
In step S119-16-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the state is the “third ART added state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “third ART added state” based on information stored in the state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. The process which determines is performed. If it is determined that the state is the “third ART added state” (step S119-16-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-6 and is determined not to be the “third ART added state”. If it has been performed (step S119-16-5 = No), the display time ART addition state subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-16-6)
In step S119-16-6, the main CPU 301 performs a display-time third ART addition state process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the third ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 when “bonus” is displayed. When the process of step S119-16-6 ends, the subroutine for the display-time ART addition state process ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for adding the first ART during display)
Next, based on FIG. 113, the display-time first ART addition state process performed by the process of step S119-16-2 of FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first ART addition state process during display.

(Step S119-16-2-1)
In step S119-16-2-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed (step S119-16-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-2, If it is determined that the “symbol combination” is not displayed (step S119-16-2-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-4.

(Step S119-16-2-2)
In step S119-16-2-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-3.

(Step S119-16-2-3)
In step S119-16-2-3, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-10.

(Step S119-16-2-4)
In step S119-16-2-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-16-2-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-5, and the “bonus” is not won. Is determined (step S119-16-2-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-7.

(Step S119-16-2-5)
In step S119-16-2-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the first ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-6.

(Step S119-16-2-6)
In step S119-16-2-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-10.

(Step S119-16-2-7)
In step S119-16-2-7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the first ART added state game number counter is “5”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “5”. When it is determined that the value of the first ART added state game number counter is “5” (step S119-16-2-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-8. If it is determined that the value of the first ART added state game number counter is not “5” (step S119-16-2-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-10. To do.

(Step S119-16-2-8)
In step S119-16-2-8, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processing during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 provides the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the main RAM 303. A process of clearing the value of the third ART added state game number counter, the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the like is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-9.

(Step S119-16-2-9)
In step S119-16-2-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an “ART state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-2-10.

(Step S119-16-2-10)
In step S119-16-2-10, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-2-10 is completed, the subroutine for the display first ART addition state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for adding 2nd ART during display)
Next, based on FIG. 114, the display-time second ART addition state process performed by the process of step S119-16-4 of FIG. 112 will be described. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second ART addition state processing at the time of display.

(Step S119-16-4-1)
In step S <b> 119-16-4-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed (step S119-16-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-2, If it is determined that the “symbol combination” is not displayed (step S119-16-4-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-4.

(Step S119-16-4-2)
In step S119-16-4-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. And if the process of step S119-16-4-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S119-16-4-3.

(Step S119-16-4-3)
In step S119-16-4-3, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-12.

(Step S119-16-4-4)
In step S119-16-4-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-16-4-4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-5, and the “bonus” is not won. (Step S119-16-4-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-7.

(Step S119-16-4-5)
In step S119-16-4-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the second ART added state stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-6.

(Step S119-16-4-6)
In step S119-16-4-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-14-4-10.

(Step S119-16-4-7)
In step S119-16-4-7, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second ART added state game number counter is “4”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “4”. When it is determined that the value of the second ART added state game number counter is “4” (step S119-16-4-7 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-8. If it is determined that the value of the second ART added state game number counter is not “4” (step S119-16-4-7 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-12. To do.

(Step S119-16-4-8)
In step S119-16-4-8, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the second ART added state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a second ART added state winning flag provided in the main RAM 303 is ON. If it is determined that the second ART extra state winning flag is ON (step S119-16-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-9, and the second ART extra is added. If it is determined that the state winning flag is not ON (step S119-16-4-8 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-10.

(Step S119-16-4-9)
In step S119-16-4-9, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second ART added state game number counter. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-12.

(Step S119-16-4-10)
In step S119-16-4-10, the main CPU 301 performs various counter clear processing during ART. Specifically, the main CPU 301 provides the value of the first ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the second ART added state game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the main RAM 303. A process of clearing the value of the third ART added state game number counter, the value of the precursor game number counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the like is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-11.

(Step S119-16-4-11)
In step S119-16-4-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an “ART state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-16-4-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-16-4-12.

(Step S119-16-4-12)
In step S119-16-4-12, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-16-4-12 is completed, the subroutine for the display second ART addition state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Processing for displaying the number of ART games during display)
Next, the display-time ART game number notification state process performed by the process of step S119-17 of FIG. 88 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display time ART game number notification state processing.

(Step S119-17-1)
In step S <b> 119-17-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “a combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “the combination of symbols related to the bonus” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed (step S119-17-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-17-2, and “combination of symbols related to bonus” is displayed. "Is not displayed (step S119-17-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-17-3.

(Step S119-17-2)
In step S119-17-2, the main CPU 301 performs a bonus display process during ART detailed with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 shifts the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second special BB state” when “the combination of symbols related to the same color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line. When “a combination of symbols related to red seven BB” or “a combination of symbols related to white seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ When the process of shifting to the “2nd BB state during ART” is performed and the “combination of symbols related to different color black seven BB” is displayed on the active line, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed to “ The process of shifting to the “1BB state” is performed. Then, when the process of step S119-17-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S119-17-6.

(Step S119-17-3)
In step S119-17-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not “bonus” is won in the game based on the value stored in the winning combination storing area provided in the main RAM 303. If it is determined that the “bonus” is won (step S119-17-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-17-4, and it is determined that the “bonus” is not won. In that case (step S119-17-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-17-5.

(Step S119-17-4)
In step S119-17-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “second bonus preparation state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a “second bonus preparation state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-17-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-17-6.

(Step S119-17-5)
In step S119-17-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the state managed by the main control board 300 to the “ART state”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an “ART state” in a state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-17-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-17-6.

(Step S119-17-6)
In step S119-17-6, the main CPU 301 performs the game clear process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing a part of the storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S119-17-6 is completed, the subroutine for the display-time ART game number notification state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving various signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, and the power supply board 200. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs timer measurement processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets “3” corresponding to the right reel 20 as the initial value of the reel number, and drives the right stepping motor 153 corresponding to the reel number “3”, thereby Rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. are performed. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number, and drives the intermediate stepping motor 152 corresponding to the reel number “2”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the intermediate reel 19. Etc. Next, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number and drives the left stepping motor 151 corresponding to the reel number “1”, thereby controlling the acceleration, constant speed, and deceleration of the rotation of the left reel 18. Etc. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs external signal output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 30 and the like. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs LED display processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for creating display data of the stored number display unit 15 and the payout number display unit 16, and based on the generated display data, the stored number display unit 15 and the payout number display unit. 16 control is performed. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting a command set in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing of transmitting various signals to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S208 ends, the process proceeds to step S209.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the MAXBET button 8 is being operated. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a MAXBET switch input signal has been received from the status board 100. If it is determined that the MAXBET button 8 is being operated (step S209 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S210, and if it is determined that the MAXBET button 8 is not being operated (step S209). = No), the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game cancel timer subtraction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first determines whether or not the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more, and the pseudo game provided in the main RAM 303. When the value of the cancel timer is “1” or more, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the process proceeds to step S211.

(Step S211)
In step S <b> 211, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo game cancel timer is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the pseudo game cancel timer is “0” (step S211 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S212, and it is determined that the value of the pseudo game cancel timer is not “0”. If it is determined (step S211 = No), the process proceeds to step S215.

(Step S212)
In step S212, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game cancel flag inversion process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of inverting the pseudo game cancel flag in the pseudo game cancel flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Here, when the pseudo game cancel flag is ON, the value stored in the pseudo game cancel flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “11111111B”. When the pseudo game cancel flag inversion process is performed, the value stored in the pseudo game cancel flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “00000000B”. On the other hand, when the pseudo game cancel flag is OFF, the value stored in the pseudo game cancel flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “00000000B”. When the pseudo game cancel flag inversion process is performed, the value stored in the pseudo game cancel flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is “11111111B”. Then, when the process of step S212 ends, the process proceeds to step S213.

(Step S213)
In step S213, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a pseudo game cancel command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 transmits the pseudo-game cancel command to the sub-control board 400 for transmitting the pseudo-game cancel command having information indicating that the pseudo-game cancel flag has been switched. Performs processing to set in the data storage area. Then, when the process of step S213 ends, the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S214)
In step S214, the main CPU 301 performs a pseudo game cancel timer setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in a pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303. Here, the value set in the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 can be set as appropriate. Then, when the process of step S214 ends, the process proceeds to step S215.

(Step S215)
In step S215, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S215 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for checking an error in the sub RAM 403 and the like. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main control board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command received from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of outputting sound from the speaker 33 based on the sound data determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-3 described later. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs LED control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the LED 32 based on the LED data determined by the LED data determination process in step S302-3-2 described later. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 31 based on the image data determined by the image data determination process in step S302-3-4 described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button sensor 21s detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key sensor 22s detects an operation of the cross key 22. Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main control board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 118, the main control board communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 117 will be described. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main control board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command received last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). -1 = No), the main control board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main control board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 119, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 118 will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 specifies the state managed by the main control board 300 based on the command received by the main control board 300, and uses the effect determination table (see FIG. 32) provided in the sub ROM 402. Perform processing to select. Then, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining an effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 31 or the like based on the selected effect determination table. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs LED data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the LED data corresponding to the production | presentation determined by the sub production | presentation determination process of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining sound data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Conceptual diagram of execution start timing and end timing of pseudo game)
Next, a conceptual diagram of execution start timing and end timing of the pseudo game will be described based on FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 120, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “normal state”, the main control board 300 is displayed when “the combination of symbols related to the red seven BB” is displayed on the active line. The state managed by the process shifts from the “normal state” to the “second BB state”.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state”, “Watermelon”, “Weak cherry”, “Strong cherry”, “Weak chance role”, When a “medium chance combination” or “strong chance combination” is determined, a bonus state ART game number determination preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 20A) stored in the main ROM 302 is used. A lottery of whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” is performed. Here, when it is determined that the lottery is performed and the state is determined to shift to the “ART game number determination ready state”, “RB in operation bell” is selected as a winning combination by an internal lottery process in the subsequent game. In this case, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will cause the pseudo game to be executed is notified. The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 to be notified here is displayed in such a manner that “the symbol related to BAR” is aligned with the “lower right line” or the “up right line”. This is an operation order for setting a pseudo game to be played.

  On the other hand, even if it is decided not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, When the “RB in operation bell” is won as a winning combination in the internal lottery process, the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will execute the pseudo game is notified. It becomes. However, the operation order of the left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13 that will be notified here is aligned with the “symbol relating to BAR” to the “lower right line” or the “up right line”. There is no operation sequence for setting up a pseudo game.

  Then, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are “2” times in accordance with the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game is executed. When operated, the pseudo game is set by the RB game state pseudo game setting process of step S118-15-13, and then the set pseudo game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry” are selected as the winning combination by the internal lottery process. When a “weak chance role”, “medium chance role”, or “strong chance role” is determined, the “pattern related to BAR” is displayed in line with the “lower right line” or “right upward line”. The order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, or “the symbol related to the BAR” is aligned with the “right downward line” or the “right upward line”. The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will cause a non-pseudo game to be executed is notified, but is not limited to this. For example, if it is determined not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state” as a result of the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, “the symbol related to the BAR” May not be notified of the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which a pseudo game that does not align with the “right downward line” or the “right upward line” is executed.

  In addition, even if it is determined that the transition to the “ART game number determination preparation state” is made as a result of the lottery of whether or not to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, the “second BB state” If the number of games that can be stayed in “” is a number of games in which “symbols related to BAR” cannot be set for the pseudo-games that are displayed along with the “right-down line” or “right-up line”, The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game in which the symbols related to the BAR are displayed together with the "right downward line" or the "right upward line" is executed. May not be notified.

  Further, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second BB state”, the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is a value just before the end of “BB”. If a “common bell” is determined as a winning combination, it may not be possible to set a pseudo game. Therefore, it is determined whether the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is a value just before the end of “BB”, and is a value just before the end of “BB”. If it is determined, even if “common bell” is determined as the winning combination, the process related to the setting of the pseudo game is performed, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 The operation order may be notified.

  Here, “the value just before the end of BB” can be set as appropriate. For example, the determination may be made based on the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303, or the number of games in the “second BB state” may be counted and determined based on the counted number of games. Good.

  If the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is a value just before the end of “BB”, if “common bell” is determined as the winning combination, It is good also as notifying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 while performing the process which concerns on the setting of a game. This eliminates the need for processing for determining whether or not the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303 is a value just before the end of “BB” as compared with the above case. Capacity can be reduced.

  Then, based on the value of the payout number counter provided in the main RAM 303, when it is determined that the “second BB state” is ended, it is determined to shift to the “ART game number determination preparation state”. If so, the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts from the “second BB state” to the “ART game number determination preparation state”.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination preparation state” and the pseudo game is set, the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination preparation state”. The state shifts from “state” to “ART game number determination state”. Therefore, the “ART game number determination preparation state” is a state for setting a pseudo game to be executed in the “ART game number determination state”.

  In the “ART game number determination state”, the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game is continued. Is performed, the pseudo game is continued, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 11 in the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at which the pseudo game ends. When the stop button 13 is operated, the pseudo game is ended, and the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts from the “ART game number determination state” to the “ART game number notification state”. Will be. Therefore, the “ART game number determination state” stays from the start of the pseudo game to the end of the pseudo game.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number notification state”, when the “1” game is ended, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number notification state”. ”To“ ART state ”.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART state”, the state managed by the main control board 300 is changed from the “ART state” to the “ART state” when the end condition of the “ART state” is satisfied. It will shift to “normal state”.

(Display areas displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 in the ART game number determination preparation state)
Next, each display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 in the ART game number determination preparation state will be described with reference to FIG.

(First icon display area 601a)
The first icon display area 601a is provided to display the first icon 605a acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “art game number determination state”, when the first icon 605a is acquired, the first icon display area 601a which is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of the first icons 605a are acquired. The number of acquired first icons 605a is displayed in the vicinity of the lit first icon display area 601a.

(Second icon display area 601b)
The second icon display area 601b is provided to display the second icon 605b acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “art game number determination state”, when the second icon 605b is acquired, the second icon display area 601b which is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of second icons 605b are acquired. The number of acquired second icons 605b is displayed in the vicinity of the lit second icon display area 601b.

(Third icon display area 601c)
The third icon display area 601c is provided to display the third icon 605c acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the third icon 605c is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the third icon display area 601c that is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of third icons 605c are acquired. The number of acquired third icons 605c is displayed in the vicinity of the lit third icon display area 601c.

(Fourth icon display area 601d)
The fourth icon display area 601d is provided to display the fourth icon 605d acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the fourth icon 605d is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the unlit fourth icon display area 601d is turned on, and a plurality of fourth icons 605d are acquired. The number of acquired fourth icons 605d is displayed in the vicinity of the lit fourth icon display area 601d.

(Fifth icon display area 601e)
The fifth icon display area 601e is provided to display the fifth icon 605e acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the fifth icon 605e is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the unlit fifth icon display area 601e is turned on, and a plurality of fifth icons 605e are acquired. The number of acquired fifth icons 605e is displayed in the vicinity of the lit fifth icon display area 601e.

(Sixth icon display area 601f)
The sixth icon display area 601f is provided to display the sixth icon 605f acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the sixth icon 605f is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the sixth icon display area 601f that is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of sixth icons 605f are acquired. The number of acquired sixth icons 605f is displayed in the vicinity of the lit sixth icon display area 601f.

(Seventh icon display area 601g)
The seventh icon display area 601g is provided to display the seventh icon 605g acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the seventh icon 605g is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the unlit seventh icon display area 601g is turned on, and a plurality of seventh icons 605g are acquired. The number of acquired seventh icons 605g is displayed in the vicinity of the lit seventh icon display area 601g.

(8th icon display area 601h)
The eighth icon display area 601h is provided to display the eighth icon 605h acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “art game number determination state”, when the eighth icon 605h is acquired, the eighth icon display area 601h which is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of the eighth icons 605h are acquired. The number of acquired eighth icons 605h is displayed in the vicinity of the lit eighth icon display area 601h.

(9th icon display area 601i)
The ninth icon display area 601i is provided to display the ninth icon 605i acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “art game number determination state”, when the ninth icon 605i is acquired, the ninth icon display area 601i which is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of ninth icons 605i are acquired. The number of acquired ninth icons 605i is displayed in the vicinity of the lit ninth icon display area 601i.

(10th icon display area 601j)
The tenth icon display area 601j is provided to display the tenth icon acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the tenth icon 605j is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the unlit tenth icon display area 601j is turned on, and a plurality of tenth icons 605j are acquired. The number of acquired tenth icons 605j is displayed in the vicinity of the lit tenth icon display area 601j.

(11th icon display area 601k)
The eleventh icon display area 601k is provided to display the eleventh icon 605k acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the eleventh icon 605k is acquired in the “art game number determination state”, the unlit eleventh icon display area 601k is turned on, and a plurality of eleventh icons 605k are acquired. The number of acquired eleventh icons 605k is displayed near the lit eleventh icon display area 601k.

(Twelfth icon display area 601l)
The twelfth icon display area 601l is provided to display the twelfth icon 605l acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “art game number determination state”, when the 12th icon 605l is acquired, the 12th icon display area 601l that is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of 12th icons 605l are acquired. The number of acquired 12th icons 605l is displayed in the vicinity of the lit 12th icon display area 601l.

(13th icon display area 601m)
The thirteenth icon display area 601m is provided to display the thirteenth icon 605m acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the thirteenth icon 605m is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the unlit thirteenth icon display area 601m is lit, and a plurality of thirteenth icons 605m are acquired. The number of acquired thirteenth icons 605m is displayed in the vicinity of the lit thirteenth icon display area 601m.

(14th icon display area 601n)
The fourteenth icon display area 601n is provided to display the fourteenth icon 605n acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “ART game number determination state”, when the 14th icon 605n is acquired, the 14th icon display area 601n which is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of 14th icons 605n are acquired. The number of acquired 14th icons 605n is displayed in the vicinity of the lit 14th icon display area 601n.

(15th icon display area 601o)
The fifteenth icon display area 601o is provided to display the fifteenth icon 605o acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the 15th icon 605o is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the 15th icon display area 601o that is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of 15th icons 605o are acquired. The number of acquired 15th icons 605o is displayed in the vicinity of the 15th icon display area 601o that is lit.

(16th icon display area 601p)
The sixteenth icon display area 601p is provided to display the sixteenth icon 605p acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, when the 16th icon 605p is acquired in the “ART game number determination state”, the 16th icon display area 601p which is turned off is turned on, and a plurality of 16th icons 605p are acquired. The number of acquired 16th icons 605p is displayed in the vicinity of the lit 16th icon display area 601p.

(Special icon display area 602)
The special icon display area 602 is provided to display a special icon 605q acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”. Specifically, in the “ART game number determination state”, when the special icon 605q is acquired, the special icon display area 602 which is turned off is turned on, and when a plurality of special icons 605q are acquired, The number of acquired special icons 605q is displayed in the vicinity of the illuminated special icon display area 602.

(Stop operation order display area 603)
The stop operation order display area 603 is provided to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Specifically, the stop operation order display area 603 includes a left stop button 11 for promoting the pseudo game mode when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination ready state”, The operation order of the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 and the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 for maintaining the pseudo game mode will be notified.

(Game number display area 604)
The number-of-games display area 604 is provided to display the number of games played when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination preparation state”. Specifically, the game number display area 604 displays “48” at the timing when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state”. Each time one game is played with the state managed by the main control board 300 being the “ART game number determination preparation state”, “1” is subtracted.

  Here, in this embodiment, the number of games displayed in the game number display area 604 is from “48” to “33”, from “32” to “17”, and from “16”. Different background colors are displayed when “1” and when a specific image indicating that “1” has been added to the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is displayed. Yes. Specifically, when the number of games displayed in the game number display area 604 is “48” to “33”, the background color is displayed in gray and the game displayed in the game number display area 604 is displayed. When the number is “32” to “17”, blue is displayed as the background color, and when the number of games displayed in the game number display area 604 is “16” to “1”, the background When yellow is displayed as the color and a specific image is displayed in the game number display area 604, red is displayed as the background color. The background color displayed in the game number display area 604 is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  In the following, the first icon display area 601a, the second icon display area 601b, the third icon display area 601c, the fourth icon display area 601d, the fifth icon display area 601e, the sixth icon display area 601f, and the seventh icon Display area 601g, 8th icon display area 601h, 9th icon display area 601i, 10th icon display area 601j, 11th icon display area 601k, 12th icon display area 601l, 13th icon display area 601m, 14th icon display The region 601n, the fifteenth icon display region 601o, the sixteenth icon display region 601p, and the special icon display region 602 are collectively referred to as “icon display region”. Hereinafter, the first icon 605a to the sixteenth icon 605p and the special icon 605q are collectively referred to simply as “icons”.

(Animation in the ART game number determination preparation state)
Next, the animation in the ART game number determination preparation state will be described based on FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 122 (A), when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, “48” is displayed in the game number display area 604. Become. Note that the “icon” is acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, so that the “icon display area” remains unlit.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state” and the game of “16” game is performed, the number of games is displayed. The number of games displayed in the area 604 is “32”. At this timing, the lottery by the first security lottery process of step S111-8-2-12, step S111-8-4-12, and step S111-8-5-12 is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state” and the “32” game is played, the number of games is displayed. The number of games displayed in the area 604 is “16”. Also at this timing, the lottery by the first guaranteed lottery process of step S111-8-2-12, step S111-8-4-12, and step S111-8-5-12 is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 122 (D), when the game managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination ready state” and the “48” game is played, the number of games is displayed. A specific image is displayed in the area 604.

  In addition, after the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state” and the game of “48” game is performed, the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ Until the state shifts to “ART game number determination state”, a specific image is displayed in the game number display area 604. After a specific image is displayed in the game number display area 604, the number of games after the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state” has become a specific value. At the timing, the lottery by the second guaranteed lottery process of step S111-8-2-11, step S111-8-4-11, and step S111-8-5-11 is performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state” and the “48” game is played, it is provided in the main RAM 303. The process of adding “1” to the value of the Navistock counter is performed. Then, after the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, it shifts to the “ART game number determination state” before the “48” game is played. Even after the transition to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, when the “32” game is played, and after the transition to the “ART game number determination preparation state”, the “16” game Since the first security lottery process is performed when a game is performed, the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, the “second ART game number determination preparation state”, and the “third ART game determination state”. The capacity of the main ROM 302 is reduced by sharing the first guaranteed lottery table in the case of the “number determination ready state”, but is not limited to this. For example, the first controlled lot determination table for the first ART game number determination preparation state used when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART game number determination preparation state”, and the main control board 300 manage the state. The second ART game number determination preparation state first security lottery table used when the state is the “second ART game number determination preparation state” and the state managed by the main control board 300 are “third ART game number determination preparation state” The first guaranteed lottery table for the third ART game number determination preparation state may be provided. Thereby, the lottery according to the state managed by the main control board 300 can be performed. In this case, the lottery value stipulated in the third ART game number determination preparation state first guaranteed lottery table used in the “third ART game number determination preparation state” that is most advantageous for the player is the first ART game. It is desirable that a lottery value that is advantageous to the player is defined in comparison with the first security lottery table for number determination preparation state and the first security lottery table for second ART game number determination preparation state.

(Animation when canceling pseudo game)
Next, based on FIG. 123, the animation in the case of canceling a pseudo game will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 123A, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination preparation state” and the setting of the pseudo game is completed, the “ART game number determination preparation state” starts. Control to shift to the “ART game number determination state” is performed. At this time, a character image “START!” Indicating that the “ART game number determination state” starts is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. At this time, if it is determined in step S103 that the detection of the operation of the MAXBET button 8 has been started, the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is set in the pseudo game cancel timer setting process in step S104. A predetermined value is set, and the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is subtracted by “1” by the pseudo game cancel timer subtraction process in step S210.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is subtracted by “1” by the pseudo game cancel timer subtraction process in step S210, and as a result, provided in the main RAM 303. When the value of the pseudo game cancel timer is “0” (step S211 = Yes), the pseudo game cancel flag is turned ON by the pseudo game cancel flag inversion process in step S212. Then, the pseudo game cancel command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 by the process of step S213, and the process of setting the pseudo game cancel timer is performed by the pseudo game cancel timer setting process of step S214. Then, when the sub control board 400 receives the pseudo game cancel command from the main control board 300 (step S302-1 = Yes), the set sub game is determined by the sub effect determining process in step S302-3-1. The effect data notifying that the cancellation has been made is determined. Then, a cancel sound for notifying that the pseudo game cancel flag is turned on is determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-3, and the pseudo game cancel is performed by the sound control process in step S303. A cancel sound for notifying that the flag has been turned on is output from the speaker 33.

  If the pseudo lever cancel flag is ON and the start lever 10 is operated, it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is ON by the process of step S110-5 (step S110-5 = Yes). The pseudo game set by the pseudo game cancel process in step S110-6 is cancelled.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (C), when it is determined that the detection of the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is started after the pseudo game cancel flag is turned ON at the timing of FIG. 123 (B) (step S209 = Yes), the value of the pseudo game cancel timer set by the pseudo game cancel timer setting process of step S214 is subtracted by “1” by the pseudo game cancel timer subtraction process of step S210.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the value of the pseudo game cancel timer provided in the main RAM 303 is subtracted by “1” by the pseudo game cancel timer subtraction process in step S210. When the value of the pseudo game cancel timer is “0” (step S211 = Yes), the pseudo game cancel flag is turned OFF by the pseudo game cancel flag inversion process in step S212. Then, a pseudo game cancel command is transmitted to the sub-control board 400 by the process of step S213. Then, when the sub control board 400 receives a pseudo game cancel command from the main control board 300 (step S302-1 = Yes), the sub game cancel flag is turned OFF by the sub effect determination process in step S302-3-1. The effect data for notifying that the event has been made is determined. Then, the cancel sound for notifying that the pseudo game cancel flag has been turned off is determined by the sound data determination process in step S302-3-3, and the cancel sound is determined by the sound control process in step S303. It is output from the speaker 33.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the pseudo game can be canceled, so that it is possible to shift to the “ART state” without performing the pseudo game. Therefore, for example, when there is no time such as when a game store is closed, it is possible to shift to an “ART state” in which an increase in medals can be expected without performing a pseudo game in which medals are not paid out.

  In the present embodiment, when the pseudo game is canceled, the first ART game number determination state alternative lottery process in step S110-7-2-1 and the second ART in step S110-7-4-1 are performed. By the alternative lottery process for the game number determination state and the alternative lottery process for the third ART game number determination state in step S110-7-6-1, a process of substituting the bonus that can be acquired by the player is performed. For this reason, even if the pseudo game is canceled, a privilege is given to the player, so that the bonus is not given to the player by canceling the pseudo game. Can be prevented.

  Note that a canceling sound for notifying that the set pseudo game cancel flag is turned on and a canceling sound for notifying that the pseudo game cancel flag is turned off can be set as appropriate. For example, the canceling sound and the canceling sound may be the same sound or different sounds.

  In the present embodiment, the fact that the pseudo game cancel flag is turned on is notified by sound, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified by displaying an image. Or you may alert | report by making LED32 light-emit. Moreover, it is good also as alert | reporting combining these.

  In the present embodiment, the fact that the pseudo game cancel flag is turned off is notified by sound. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified by displaying an image. Or you may alert | report by making LED32 light-emit. Moreover, it is good also as alert | reporting combining these.

(Animation to be acquired in the ART game number determination state)
Next, icons to be acquired in the ART game number determination state will be described with reference to FIG.

  Hereinafter, each icon to be acquired when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state” will be described.

(First icon 605a)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the first icon 605a is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. Is obtained when “20” game, “30” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, “300” game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played Icon. Therefore, the player is notified that the first icon display area 601a acquires the first icon 605a, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “20” games. It can be recognized that the above number of games has been determined.

(Second icon 605b)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the second icon 605b is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. Is obtained when “20” game, “30” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, “300” game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played Icon. Accordingly, when the player is notified that the second icon display area 601b acquires the second icon 605b, the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “20” games. It can be recognized that the above number of games has been determined.

(Third icon 605c)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the third icon 605c is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo game extra lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-14. "", "30" game, "50" game, "100" game, "200" game, "300" game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played, or It is an icon that can be acquired when the “first ART added state” is acquired. Therefore, the player is notified that the third icon 605c is acquired from the third icon display area 601c, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “20” games. It can be recognized that the above number of games has been determined or that the “first ART added state” has been acquired.

(Fourth icon 605d)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the fourth icon 605d is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. Is obtained when “20” game, “30” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, “300” game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played Icon. Therefore, the player is notified that the fourth icon 605d is acquired by the fourth icon display area 601d, and the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “20” games. It can be recognized that the above number of games has been determined.

(5th icon 605e)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the fifth icon 605e is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. ”Is an icon that can be acquired when“ 10 ”game,“ 50 ”game,“ 100 ”game,“ 200 ”game, and“ 300 ”game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. . Therefore, the player is notified that the fifth icon 605e is acquired from the fifth icon display area 601e, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “20” games. , It can be recognized that the number of games other than the “30” game has been determined.

(6th icon 605f)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the sixth icon 605f is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. ”Is an icon that can be acquired when“ 10 ”game,“ 20 ”game,“ 100 ”game,“ 200 ”game,“ 300 ”game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. . Here, the sixth icon 605f is an icon that can be acquired when the “10” game, the “100” game, the “200” game, and the “300” game are determined when the “1” line is aligned. In the case of “2” lines, the icons can be acquired when the “20” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined. The sixth icon 605f is determined to be “100” as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. In this case, it is easier to obtain than other icons. Accordingly, the player is notified that the sixth icon display area 601f acquires the sixth icon 605f, and as a result, the player adds “1” line as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. In the case of a match, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “20” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined. When the “2” lines are aligned, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “10” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined.

(7th icon 605g)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the seventh icon 605g is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo game extra lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-14. ”Is an icon that can be acquired when“ 10 ”game,“ 20 ”game,“ 100 ”game,“ 200 ”game,“ 300 ”game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. . Here, the seventh icon 605g is an icon that can be acquired when the “10” game, the “100” game, the “200” game, and the “300” game are determined when the “1” line is aligned. In the case of “2” lines, the icons can be acquired when the “20” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined. The seventh icon 605g is determined as “100” games as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. In this case, it is easier to obtain than other icons. Accordingly, when the player is notified that the seventh icon 605g is acquired by the seventh icon display area 601g, the “1” line is added as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. In the case of a match, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “20” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined. When the “2” lines are aligned, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “10” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined.

(8th icon 605h)
In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the eighth icon 605h is displayed in the “ART state” through the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. ”Is an icon that can be acquired when“ 10 ”game,“ 20 ”game,“ 100 ”game,“ 200 ”game,“ 300 ”game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. . Here, the seventh icon 605g is an icon that can be acquired when the “10” game, the “100” game, the “200” game, and the “300” game are determined when the “1” line is aligned. In the case of “2” lines, the icons can be acquired when the “20” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined. The eighth icon 605h is determined to be “100” as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. In this case, it is easier to obtain than other icons. Therefore, the player is notified that the eighth icon display area 601h acquires the eighth icon 605h, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “1” line. In the case of a match, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “20” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined. When the “2” lines are aligned, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “10” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined.

(9th icon 605i)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the ninth icon 605i is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. "10" game, "20" game, "30" game, "50" game, "100" game, "200" game, "300" game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played This is an icon that can be acquired if the “second ART added state” is acquired. Therefore, the player is notified that the ninth icon 605i is acquired from the ninth icon display area 601i, so that it is determined that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added, It can be recognized that the “2ART added state” has been acquired.

(10th icon 605j)
In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the tenth icon 605j is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. "10" game, "20" game, "30" game, "50" game, "100" game, "200" game, "300" game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played It is an icon that can be acquired if it is done. Therefore, the player is notified that the tenth icon display area 601j has acquired the tenth icon 605j, thereby recognizing that it is determined to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. can do.

(11th icon 605k)
In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the eleventh icon 605k is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. ”Is an icon that can be acquired when“ 10 ”game,“ 20 ”game,“ 100 ”game,“ 200 ”game,“ 300 ”game is determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. . Here, the eleventh icon 605k is an icon that can be acquired when the “10” game, the “100” game, the “200” game, and the “300” game are determined when the “1” line is aligned. In the case of “2” lines, the icons can be acquired when the “20” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined. The eleventh icon 605k is determined to be “100” as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. In this case, it is easier to obtain than other icons. Accordingly, when the player is notified that the eleventh icon 605k is acquired by the eleventh icon display area 601k, the “1” line is added as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. In the case of a match, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “20” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined. When the “2” lines are aligned, it can be recognized that the number of games other than the “10” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined.

(12th icon 605l)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the twelfth icon 605l is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. ”Is an icon that can be acquired when“ 10 ”game,“ 50 ”game,“ 100 ”game,“ 200 ”game, and“ 300 ”game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played. . Accordingly, the player is notified that the twelfth icon display area 601l has acquired the twelfth icon 605l, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “20” games. , It can be recognized that the number of games other than the “30” game has been determined.

(13th icon 605m)
In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the thirteenth icon 605m is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. "10" game, "20" game, "30" game, "50" game, "100" game, "200" game, "300" game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played It is an icon that can be acquired if it is done. Therefore, the player is informed that the thirteenth icon display area 601m has acquired the thirteenth icon 605m, thereby recognizing that it is determined to add the number of games that can be played in the “ART state”. can do.

(14th icon 605n)
In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is “ART game number determination state”, the 14th icon 605n is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. , “10” game, “20” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined, It is an icon that can be acquired when the “first ART added state” is acquired or when the “second ART added state” is acquired. Here, the 14th icon 605n is acquired when the “10” game, the “50” game, the “100” game, the “200” game, and the “300” game are determined when the “1” line is aligned. If the “2” line is aligned, the icons that can be acquired when the “20” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined. It is. Therefore, the player is notified that the fourteenth icon display area 601n acquires the fourteenth icon 605n, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “1” line. In the case of a match, it is recognized whether the number of games other than the “20” game and the “30” game has been determined, the “first ART added state” has been acquired, or the “second ART added state” has been acquired. Can do. In the case of “2” lines, the number of games other than “10” game and “30” game is determined, “1st ART added state” is acquired, or “2nd ART added state” is acquired. You can recognize what happened.

(15th icon 605o)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the fifteenth icon 605o is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. "10" game, "20" game, "30" game, "50" game, "100" game, "200" game, "300" game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played This is an icon that can be acquired when the “first ART added state” is acquired. Accordingly, the player is notified that the fifteenth icon 605o is acquired from the fifteenth icon display area 601o, so that it is determined that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added or “ It can be recognized that the “1 ART added state” has been acquired.

(16th icon 605p)
In the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the sixteenth icon 605p is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14. , “10” game, “20” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined, It is an icon that can be acquired when the “first ART added state” is acquired. Here, the 16th icon 605p is acquired when the “10” game, the “50” game, the “100” game, the “200” game, and the “300” game are determined when the “1” line is aligned. If the “2” line is aligned, the icons that can be acquired when the “20” game, “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined. It is. Accordingly, the player is notified that the sixteenth icon 605p is acquired from the sixteenth icon display area 601p, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “1” line. In the case of a match, it is recognized whether the number of games other than the “20” game and the “30” game has been determined, the “first ART added state” has been acquired, or the “second ART added state” has been acquired. Can do. In the case of “2” lines, the number of games other than “10” game and “30” game is determined, “1st ART added state” is acquired, or “2nd ART added state” is acquired. You can recognize what happened.

(Special icon 605q)
When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the special icon 605q is displayed in the “ART state” by the pseudo game extra lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-14. When “100” game, “200” game, and “300” game are determined as the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the game, when “first ART added state” is obtained, or “second ART added state” "Is an icon that can be acquired when" Accordingly, the player is notified that the special icon display area 602 acquires the special icon 605q, so that the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “10” games, “ It can be recognized that the number of games other than the “20” game, the “30” game, and the “50” game has been determined, the “first ART added state” has been acquired, or the “second ART added state” has been acquired.

  Here, the first icon 605a to the sixteenth icon 605p described above have the regularity as described above in principle, except that the icon corresponding to the character selected by the player is determined by the main control board 300. When the managed state is the “ART game number determination state”, the game to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the pseudo game extra lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-14 As a number, when “50” game, “100” game, “200” game, “300” game is determined, when “first ART added state” is acquired, when “second ART added state” is acquired It is an icon that can be acquired. Therefore, the player can play the game in the “ART state” by being notified by any one of the first icon 605a to the sixteenth icon 605p that the icon corresponding to the character selected by the player is acquired. As the number of games to be added to the number of games, the number of games other than the “10” game, “20” game, and “30” game has been determined, the “first ART added state” has been acquired, or the “second ART added state” Can be recognized.

  Here, in step S112, the main CPU 301 sends, to the sub-control board 400, a reel rotation start command having information on the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the acquired “ART added state”. Do send. Further, when the sub-control board 400 receives a reel rotation start command from the main control board 300, the sub-control board 400 adds to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” by the sub-effect determining process in step S302-3-1. Based on the number and the acquired “ART add-on state”, a process of selecting the 16th icon 605p or the special icon 605q from the first icon 605a is performed, and the selected icon is displayed on the liquid crystal by the image control process of step S305. Processing to be displayed on the device 31 is performed. The process of selecting the 16th icon 605p or the special icon 605q from the first icon 605a is selected based on the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” or the acquired “ART added state”. Alternatively, the process of selecting the 16th icon 605p from the first icon 605a or the special icon 605q may be performed by adding the number of games to be added to the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” and the acquired “ART added state”. You may choose based on.

(Mode of effect performed by light guide plate in ART game number determination state)
Next, based on FIG. 125, the effect mode performed by the light guide plate 34 in the ART game number determination state will be described.

  In the description of FIG. 125, it is assumed that the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state” and that “the symbol related to BAR” has the “2” line alignment.

  First, at the timing of FIG. 125 (A), the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, and the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw, and the left reel 18 is temporarily stopped. Further, the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw, and the middle reel 19 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the “design related to BAR” is temporarily stopped at the upper and middle stages of the left reel 18, or the middle and lower stages, and the “design related to BAR” is temporarily stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 19.

  Then, the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw, and the right reel 20 is temporarily stopped. At this time, the “symbols related to BAR” are temporarily stopped at the middle and lower stages of the right reel 20 or at the upper and middle stages. Assume that the right stop switch 13sw continues to detect the operation of the right stop button 13.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 125 (B), when the time when the right stop switch 13sw continues to detect the operation of the right stop button 13 is the first time, it is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 31. Control for emitting light from the first region of the light guide plate 34 is performed.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 125C, when the time during which the right stop switch 13sw continues to detect the operation of the right stop button 13 is the second time that is longer than the first time, Control is performed so that the first region and the second region of the light guide plate 34 provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 31 emit light.

  Next, at the timing of FIG. 125D, when the time during which the right stop switch 13sw continues to detect the operation of the right stop button 13 is the third time that is longer than the second time, Control is performed so that the first region, the second region, and the third region of the light guide plate 34 provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 31 emit light.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is suggested whether or not it is decided to execute the spinning effect by performing the light emission control on the first region, the second region, and the third region of the light guide plate 34. We are going to perform the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the effects suggesting the possibility of executing the turning effect are the first torso effect suggestion effect, the second torso effect suggestion effect, and the third torso effect suggestion effect. , And a fourth drum effect suggestion effect of “4” pattern is provided. In the following description, the first torso effect suggestion effect, the second torso effect suggestion effect, the third torso effect suggestion effect, and the fourth torso effect suggestion effect are collectively referred to as a “rotor effect suggestion effect”.

(1st body production suggesting production)
The first inductive effect suggestion effect is an effect in which it is least expected to execute the involute effect among the inductive effect suggestion effects provided with the “4” pattern. Specifically, the first trunk effect suggesting effect is an effect of causing the first region of the light guide plate 34 to emit blue light, then causing the second region to emit blue light, and causing the third region to emit blue light.

(2nd body effect suggestion effect)
The second torso effect suggestion effect is an effect that cannot be expected next to the first torso effect suggestion effect from among the torso effect suggestion effects provided with the “4” pattern. Specifically, the second torso effect suggestion effect performs the first torso effect suggestion effect, then causes the first region of the light guide plate 34 to emit yellow light, and then causes the second region to emit yellow light. This is an effect of causing the third region to emit yellow light.

(3rd body effect suggestion effect)
The third torso effect suggestion effect is an effect that can be expected next to the fourth torso effect suggestion effect from among the torso effect suggestion effects provided with the “4” pattern. Specifically, in the third torso effect suggestion effect, after executing the second torso effect suggestion effect, the first region of the light guide plate 34 is caused to emit red light, and then the second region is caused to emit red light. This is an effect of causing the third region to emit red light.

(4th body production suggestion production)
The fourth torso effect suggestion effect is an effect that can be most expected to be performed from among the torso effect suggestion effects provided with the “4” pattern. Specifically, in the fourth torso effect suggestion effect, after executing the third torso effect suggestion effect, the first region of the light guide plate 34 is caused to emit rainbow color, the second region is caused to emit rainbow color, This is an effect of causing the third region to emit rainbow colors. The fourth drum effect suggestion effect may be a reel effect suggestion effect that is selected only when it is determined to execute the reel effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first region effect suggestion effect, the second case effect suggestion effect, and the third case effect suggestion using the first region, the second region, and the third region of the light guide plate 34. By performing the production and the 4th torso effect suggestion effect, the possibility that the torso effect will be executed will be notified to the player step by step, so that the expectation for the player will be maintained. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the first, second, and third regions of the light guide plate 34 are used to provide a first torso effect suggestion effect, a second torso effect suggestion effect, a third torso effect suggestion effect, By executing the 4th torso effect suggestion effect, the player is notified in a stepwise manner of the possibility that the torso effect is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the first torso effect suggestion effect, the second torso effect suggestion effect, the third torso effect suggestion effect, and the fourth torso effect suggestion effect, the fifth torso effect suggestion effect that causes the first region to emit light. And the sixth region effect suggestion effect that causes the first region and the second region to emit light, and the seventh region effect suggestion effect that causes the first region, the second region, and the third region to emit light. The player may be notified step by step of the possibility that the spinning effect will be executed. In addition to the first torso effect suggestion effect, the second torso effect suggestion effect, the third torso effect suggestion effect, the fourth torso effect suggestion effect, the fifth torso effect suggestion effect, and the sixth torso effect An effect suggestion effect and a seventh trunk effect suggestion effect may be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the third stop, after the operation of the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw and the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop switch 13sw is used to detect the right stop button. When thirteen operations continue to be detected for a predetermined time, the spinning effect suggesting effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the operation of the lever member 7 continues to be detected for a predetermined time by the lever member switch 7sw, the spinning effect suggestion effect may be executed, or the operation of the MAXBET button 8 by the MAXBET switch 8sw is performed for the predetermined time. When the detection is continued to be detected, the rotation effect suggestion effect may be executed. When the operation of the adjustment button 9 is continuously detected by the adjustment switch 9sw for a predetermined time, the rotation effect suggestion effect is executed. Alternatively, when the operation of the start lever 10 is continuously detected by the start switch 10sw for a predetermined period of time, a rotation effect suggestion effect may be executed, and the effect button 21 may be operated by the effect button sensor 21s. When the detection is continued for a predetermined time, it is possible to execute the spinning effect suggesting effect, or the cross key When the operation of the cross key 22 is continued to be detected for a predetermined time by capacitors 22s, it may execute the reel-effect suggested effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at the time of the third stop, after the operation of the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw and the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop switch 13sw is used to detect the right stop button. When 13 operations are continuously detected for a predetermined time, the spinning effect suggesting effect is executed step by step, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, at the time of the first stop, the first region of the light guide plate 34 is caused to emit light based on the detection of any operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. The second region of the light guide plate 34 is caused to emit light based on the detection of the operation of any one of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at the second stop next to the second stop. By causing the third region of the light guide plate 34 to emit light based on the detection of any operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at the third stop after the stop. It is good also as performing a step effect production suggestion in steps.

  It should be noted that when the operation of the right stop button 13 continues to be detected for a “predetermined time”, the control for executing the spinning effect suggestion effect is performed. However, the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected for a “predetermined number of times”. It is good also as performing control which performs a rotation effect suggestion effect in the case. Further, the present invention is not limited to the right stop button 13, and as described above, when the operation of the lever member 7 is detected "predetermined number of times", it is possible to perform control for executing the turning effect suggesting effect, or MAXBET When the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected “predetermined number of times” by the switch 8sw, it is possible to execute a turning effect suggestion effect, or the operation of the checkout button 9 is detected “predetermined number of times” by the adjustment switch 9sw. In this case, the spinning effect suggesting effect may be executed, or when the operation of the start lever 10 is detected “predetermined number” by the start switch 10sw, the rotating effect suggesting effect is executed. Alternatively, when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected “predetermined number of times” by the effect button sensor 21s, the rotation effect suggesting effect is executed. May, when the operation of the cross key 22 is detected, "a predetermined number" by the cross key sensors 22s, may execute the reel-effect suggested effect.

  In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 34 is used to perform the spinning effect suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rotating effect suggestion effect may be performed using the liquid crystal display device 31, a rotating effect suggestion effect may be performed using the LED 32, and a rotating effect suggestion effect may be performed using the speaker 33. It may be done. Further, the liquid crystal display device 31, the LED 32, and the speaker 33 may be combined to perform a spinning effect suggestion effect.

  Moreover, the aspect of a rotation effect suggestion effect is not limited to this. For example, the first region of the light guide plate 34 is made to emit yellow light without executing the first body effect suggesting effect, and then the second region is made to emit yellow light, and the third region is made to emit yellow light. A body effect suggesting effect may be provided. Note that the fifth drum effect suggestion effect may be a reel effect suggestion effect that is selected only when it is determined to execute the drum effect, similarly to the fourth drum effect suggestion effect.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the third stop, after the operation of the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw and the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop switch 13sw is used to detect the right stop button. When the operation of 13 is continued to be detected for a predetermined time, the turning effect suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, when the operation of the right stop button 13 is not continuously detected for a predetermined time at the third stop, The body effect suggesting effect is not executed.

  In this embodiment, it is decided to execute the spinning effect suggestion effect, and at the time of the third stop, the operation of the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw and the middle stop switch 12sw. If the detection of the operation of the right stop switch 13sw is interrupted halfway before the operation of the right stop button 13 continues to be detected for a predetermined time by the right stop switch 13sw, Will be executed. For example, when it is decided to execute the second trunk effect suggesting effect, when the detection of the operation of the right stop button 13 is interrupted at the timing when the second region of the light guide plate 34 is caused to emit blue light. Performs the second drum effect suggestion effect until the second region of the light guide plate 34 emits blue light, the effect of causing the third region thereafter to emit light blue, and the effect of causing the first region of the light guide plate 34 to emit light yellow. The effect of causing the second region to emit light in yellow and the effect of causing the third region to emit light in yellow are not performed.

(Indication mode when pushing forward in pseudo game D or pseudo game E)
Next, based on FIG. 126, the effect aspect in the case of pushing forward in the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E will be described.

  In this embodiment, when the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating, the first operation of the left stop button 11 is referred to as “forward press”, and the middle stop button 12 is first The operation of the right stop button 13 is called “reverse pressing”.

  First, as shown in FIG. 126 (A), when it is decided to execute the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E, it is instructed to aim for the character image “CHANCE!” And “the symbol related to BAR”. The character image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In addition, “?” Is displayed in the area corresponding to the left stop button 11 and the area corresponding to the right stop button 13 in the stop operation order display area 603 and the middle stop button in the stop operation order display area 603. “X” is displayed in the area corresponding to 12. As a result, a special notification that prompts the player to operate the left stop button 11 or the right stop button 13 first is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), based on the fact that the operation of the left stop button 11 was first performed, the operation of the middle stop button 12 was performed after the left reel 18 temporarily stopped. Based on this, the middle reel 19 is temporarily stopped. At this timing, it cannot be determined whether the “1” line is aligned or the “2” line is aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), when the left stop button 11 is first operated in the pseudo game D, the “1” line is aligned. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified that the seventh icon 605g has been acquired. In the pseudo game E, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, the “1” line is also aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 126 (D), in the pseudo game E, when the left stop button 11 is first operated, the “2” line is aligned. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified that the seventh icon 605g has been acquired. In the pseudo game D, when the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “2” line is also aligned. Then, in the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E, when the “2” line is aligned, the second body effect is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the pseudo game D, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, or when it is determined to execute the pseudo game E, When the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, the “2” line is aligned, and the second trunk effect is executed. When the second body effect is executed, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added by the ART state game number counter addition process in step S110-7-2-7-10. It will be. Therefore, since the player considers whether to operate the left stop button 11 first or the right stop button 13 first, the interest in the game is improved.

(In the case of pseudo-game D or pseudo-game E, when the middle press is performed)
Next, based on FIG. 127, the effect aspect in the case of carrying out middle press in the pseudo | simulation game D or the pseudo | simulation game E is demonstrated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 127 (A), when it is decided to execute the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E, it is instructed to aim for the character image “CHANCE!” And “the symbol related to BAR”. The character image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In addition, “?” Is displayed in the area corresponding to the left stop button 11 and the area corresponding to the right stop button 13 in the stop operation order display area 603 and the middle stop button in the stop operation order display area 603. “X” is displayed in the area corresponding to 12. As a result, a special notification that prompts the player to operate the left stop button 11 or the right stop button 13 first is executed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the intermediate reel 19 is temporarily stopped based on the first operation of the intermediate stop button 12 being performed. At this timing, it cannot be determined whether the “1” line is aligned or the “2” line is aligned.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), when the middle stop button 12 is first operated in the pseudo game D, the “1” line is aligned. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified that the seventh icon 605g has been acquired.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 127 (D), when the middle stop button 12 is first operated in the pseudo game E, the “2” line is aligned. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified that the seventh icon 605g has been acquired. Then, in the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E, when the “2” line is aligned, the second body effect is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined to execute the pseudo game E, when the middle stop button 12 is operated for the first time, the “2” line is aligned, and the second body effect is performed. Will be executed. When the second body effect is executed, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added by the ART state game number counter addition process in step S110-7-2-7-10. It will be. Therefore, if the player cannot select whether to operate the left stop button 11 first or the right stop button 13 first, the player can operate the middle stop button 12 first to stop left. Since there is no need to select whether to operate the button 11 first or the right stop button 13 first, it is time to consider whether to operate the left stop button 11 first or the right stop button 13 first. Can be shortened.

(Production mode in the ART game number determination state)
Next, based on FIG. 128, the effect mode in the ART game number determination state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 128, in the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, an image that suggests aiming for “the symbol related to BAR”, and the seventh A “cut-in effect” for displaying the image of the icon 605g on the liquid crystal display device 31 is performed. In the stop operation order display area 603, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified. Although specifically described later, a plurality of “cut-in effects” are provided.

  Here, when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number determination state”, the process of step S111-2-3-8 or the process of step S111-4-3-2-7 is performed. After the processing, “3” is added to the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303. Therefore, at the time of shifting to the “ART game number determination state”, the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 stores at least “3” or more. Here, the description will be made on the assumption that the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “3”.

  In the continuation rate management process, if the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E is not determined (step S110-7-2-5-1 = No), it is determined whether or not the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF. A determination process is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6). Next, since the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF (step S110-7-2-5-6 = Yes), the continuation rate erasure process of step S110-7-2-5-7 is performed.

  Since the value of the navigation stock counter is “3”, it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is “1” or more (step S110-7-2-5-8 = Yes), and step S110-7. A continuation rate lottery process of -2-5-9 will be performed. Next, by the process of step S110-7-2-5-10, “1” is subtracted from the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is subtracted. The value is “2”. Next, the pseudo game continuation lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-11 is performed.

  Next, it is provided in the main RAM 303 based on the lottery result in the pseudo game continuation lottery process of step S110-7-2-5-11 by the pseudo game continuation flag update process of step S110-7-2-5-12. The process of turning on the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area, or the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, it is assumed that the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, in the pseudo game, the stop operation sequence display area 603 of the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified of the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will continue the pseudo game. The Rukoto.

  In the continuation rate management process in the next pseudo game, when the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E is not determined (step S110-7-2-5-1 = NO), the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF. Processing for determining whether or not there is is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6). Here, the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the pseudo game continuation flag update process in step S110-7-2-5-12 in the previous pseudo game. Is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6 = Yes), the continuation rate erasing process of step S110-7-2-5-7 is performed.

  Then, since the value of the navigation stock counter is “2”, it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is “1” or more (step S110-7-2-5-8 = Yes), and step S110-7. A continuation rate lottery process of -2-5-9 will be performed. Next, by the process of step S110-7-2-5-10, “1” is subtracted from the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303, and the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is subtracted. The value is “1”. Next, the pseudo game continuation lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-11 is performed.

  Next, it is provided in the main RAM 303 based on the lottery result in the pseudo game continuation lottery process of step S110-7-2-5-11 by the pseudo game continuation flag update process of step S110-7-2-5-12. The process of turning on the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area, or the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, it is assumed that the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, in the pseudo game, the stop operation sequence display area 603 of the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified of the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will continue the pseudo game. The Rukoto.

  In the continuation rate management process in the next pseudo game, when the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E is not determined (step S110-7-2-5-1 = NO), the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF. Processing for determining whether or not there is is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6). Here, the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the pseudo game continuation flag update process in step S110-7-2-5-12 in the previous pseudo game. Is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6 = Yes), the continuation rate erasing process of step S110-7-2-5-7 is performed.

  Then, since the value of the navigation stock counter is “1”, it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is “1” or more (step S110-7-2-5-8 = Yes), and step S110-7. A continuation rate lottery process of -2-5-9 will be performed. Next, in the process of step S110-7-2-5-10, “1” is subtracted from the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303, so the navigation stock provided in the main RAM 303 is also subtracted. The counter value is “0”. Next, the pseudo game continuation lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-11 is performed.

  Next, it is provided in the main RAM 303 based on the lottery result in the pseudo game continuation lottery process of step S110-7-2-5-11 by the pseudo game continuation flag update process of step S110-7-2-5-12. The process of turning on the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area, or the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, it is assumed that the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, in the pseudo game, the stop operation sequence display area 603 of the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified of the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will continue the pseudo game. The Rukoto.

  In the continuation rate management process in the next pseudo game, when the pseudo game D or the pseudo game E is not determined (step S110-7-2-5-1 = NO), the pseudo game continuation flag is OFF. Processing for determining whether or not there is is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6). Here, the process of turning off the pseudo game continuation flag in the pseudo game continuation flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 by the pseudo game continuation flag update process in step S110-7-2-5-12 in the previous pseudo game. Is performed (step S110-7-2-5-6 = Yes), the continuation rate erasing process of step S110-7-2-5-7 is performed.

  Since the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, it is determined that the value of the navigation stock counter is not “1” or more (step S110-7-2-5-8 = No), the continuation rate management process ends. Here, in the pseudo game, the stop operation sequence display area 603 of the liquid crystal display device 31 is notified of the operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 that will end the pseudo game. The Rukoto.

  Therefore, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is shifted to the “ART game number determination state”, the left stop button for aligning “the symbols related to BAR” during at least “3” times of the pseudo game. 11. The operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is notified to the stop operation order display area 603. Hereinafter, this period is referred to as a “guarantee period”.

  During the guarantee period, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for aligning the “designs related to BAR” is notified to the stop operation order display area 603. The player can align the “patterns related to BAR” by operating the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 based on the information notified to the stop operation order display area 603. We know that we can do it and that the pseudo game will continue.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, during the guarantee period, the above-described “cut-in effect” suggests the possibility of executing the spinning effect. On the other hand, outside the warranty period, by performing the operation in the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the above-mentioned “cut-in effect”, the “design related to the BAR” At the same time, control that suggests the possibility of continuing the pseudo game is performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 128, “cut-in effect” for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31 an image that suggests aiming at the “design related to BAR” and an image of the seventh icon 605g during the guarantee period. Is executed, it is suggested that the possibility that the spinning effect is executed is a predetermined probability. In addition, during the warranty period, an image that suggests aiming for the “design related to BAR” and an image of a character other than the seventh icon 605 g are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In this case, it is suggested that the possibility that the spinning effect is executed is higher or lower than a predetermined probability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, “cut-in effect” for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31 an image that suggests aiming at the “design related to BAR” and an image of the seventh icon 605 g in the guarantee period. Is executed, it may be suggested that there is a predetermined probability that “2” lines will be aligned. In addition, during the warranty period, an image that suggests aiming for the “design related to BAR” and an image of a character other than the seventh icon 605 g are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In such a case, it may be suggested that the possibility that the “2” line is aligned is higher or lower than a predetermined probability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, “cut-in effect” for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31 an image that suggests aiming at the “design related to BAR” and an image of the seventh icon 605 g in the guarantee period. May be suggested that the continuation rate has a predetermined probability. In addition, during the warranty period, an image that suggests aiming for the “design related to BAR” and an image of a character other than the seventh icon 605 g are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In such a case, it may be suggested that the continuation rate is higher or lower than a predetermined probability.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, “cut-in effect” for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31 an image that suggests aiming at the “design related to BAR” and an image of the seventh icon 605 g in the guarantee period. Is executed, it may be suggested that the probability of acquiring the “ART added state” is a predetermined probability. In addition, during the warranty period, an image that suggests aiming for the “design related to BAR” and an image of a character other than the seventh icon 605 g are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31. In such a case, it may be suggested that the probability of acquiring the “ART added state” is higher or lower than a predetermined probability.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128, the “cut-in” that displays an image that suggests aiming at the “design related to BAR” and the image of the seventh icon 605g on the liquid crystal display device 31 outside the warranty period. When the “production” is executed, it is suggested that the possibility that the pseudo game will continue is a predetermined probability. Also, outside the warranty period, a “cut-in effect” for displaying on the liquid crystal display 31 an image that suggests aiming for “designs related to BAR” and an image of a character other than the seventh icon 605g is executed. If it is, it is suggested that the possibility that the pseudo game will continue is higher or lower than a predetermined probability.

  In this way, an image that suggests aiming for the “design related to BAR” and an image of the seventh icon 605g are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, and “design related to BAR” is displayed. The “cut-in effect” for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 31 an image suggesting that the player is aiming for the image and a character image other than the seventh icon 605g is executed during the guarantee period and outside the guarantee period. However, the content suggested to the player will be different. Thereby, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect for the player during the guarantee period and outside the guarantee period, while reducing the capacity of the effect data.

(Production mode in the first ART addition state)
Next, based on FIG. 129, the effect aspect in a 1st ART addition state is demonstrated.

  First, each display area displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state” will be described.

(Acquired game number display area 606)
The acquired number-of-games display area 606 displays the total number of games added as the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state”. It is provided for. In FIG. 129, it is notified that the total number of games added as the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is “0”.

(Remaining game number display area 607)
The remaining game number display area 607 is provided for displaying the number of games that can be played in the “first ART added state”. In FIG. 129, it is notified that the number of remaining games is “4” games.

  Here, in the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state”, when “replay during RT2” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process, the “ART state” If the number of games that can be played is added or not, a lottery is performed and if “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “Chance” or “Bonus” is determined as the winning combination, the “ART state” The process of adding up the number of games that can be played is performed. On the other hand, when “push order bell” or “common bell” is determined as the winning combination, in principle, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not added.

  In addition, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “first ART added state”, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is, in principle, the “second RT gaming state”. For this reason, the probability that “replay” is determined as the winning combination is higher than in other gaming states. In this case, when “push order bell” or “common bell” is determined as the winning combination, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not added, so the main control board 300 It is not desirable for the player to determine “push order bell” or “common bell” as the winning combination in the case where the state managed by is “first ART added state”.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “replay A during second RT” is determined as the winning combination, when “first push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and “second pressing order” is determined as the winning combination. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same when the “bell” is determined, when the “third push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and when the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination. It is an aspect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “Replay B during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “4th pressing order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and the “5th pressing order” are determined as the winning combination. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is set to the same display mode when the “bell” is determined and when the “sixth push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “replay C during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “seventh pressing order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and “8th pressing order” as the winning combination are determined. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same display mode when the “bell” is determined and when the “9th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “replay D during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “10th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and the “11th push order” as the winning combination are determined. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same display mode when “Bell” is determined and when “12th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “Replay E during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “13th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and the “14th push order” as the winning combination are determined. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is set to the same display mode when “Bell” is determined and when “15th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  As a result, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 becomes the same display mode when “replay during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination and when “push order bell” is determined. The player's expectation will not be noticed that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” will not be added before operating the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A feeling can be maintained.

  In addition, although the state managed by the main control board 300 has been described in the case of the “first ART added state”, the present invention can also be applied to the “second ART added state”.

  Here, in the case where the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART added state”, “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “Chance”, Alternatively, when “bonus” is determined, processing for adding the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is performed. On the other hand, when “2nd replay during RT” is determined as the winning combination, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not added.

  When the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “second ART added state”, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is in principle the “second RT gaming state”. For this reason, the probability that “replay” is determined as the winning combination is higher than in other gaming states. When the “replay during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is not added, so in the case of the “second ART added state”, It is not desirable for the player to determine “replay during second RT” as the winning combination.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when “replay A during second RT” is determined as the winning combination, when “first push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and “second pressing order” is determined as the winning combination. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same when the “bell” is determined, when the “third push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and when the “common bell” is determined as the winning combination. It is an aspect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “Replay B during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “4th pressing order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and the “5th pressing order” are determined as the winning combination. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is set to the same display mode when the “bell” is determined and when the “sixth push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “replay C during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “seventh pressing order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and “8th pressing order” as the winning combination are determined. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same display mode when the “bell” is determined and when the “9th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “replay D during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “10th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and the “11th push order” as the winning combination are determined. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is the same display mode when “Bell” is determined and when “12th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where “Replay E during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination, the case where “13th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination, and the “14th push order” as the winning combination are determined. The display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 is set to the same display mode when “Bell” is determined and when “15th push order bell” is determined as the winning combination.

  As a result, the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 31 becomes the same display mode when “replay during 2nd RT” is determined as the winning combination and when “push order bell” is determined. The player's expectation will not be noticed that the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” will not be added before operating the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. A feeling can be maintained.

(Production mode when the production button is operated in the ART game number notification state)
Next, based on FIG. 130, the effect mode when the effect button is operated in the ART game number notification state will be described.

  First, when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the “ART game number notification state”, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” added in the “ART game number determination state” and the acquisition The “first ART added state” and the acquired “second ART added state” are notified.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 130 (A), when the transition to the “ART game number notification state” is performed, if the effect button 21 is operated, a notification is displayed for each acquired icon, and the lever member 7 is displayed. When the is operated, in the “ART game number determination state”, the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state”, the acquired “first ART additional state”, and the acquired “second ART additional state” are notified collectively. Will be displayed. These images are collectively referred to as “description images”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (B), when the “description image” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected by the effect button sensor 21s, the added “ART” The number of games that can be played in the “state” will be notified. In FIG. 130 (B), when the ninth icon 605i is acquired, it is notified that “50” games have been determined as the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state”.

  Next, as illustrated in FIG. 130C, after the notification illustrated in FIG. 130B is performed, the “description image” is displayed again. Here, when the display mode illustrated in FIG. 130A is compared with the display mode illustrated in FIG. 130C, the ninth icon display region 601i is different. Specifically, FIG. 130 (A) shows that “2” nine icons 605i have been acquired by the ninth icon display area 601i, whereas FIG. 130 (C) shows that FIG. FIG. 130 (B) indicates that when the ninth icon 605i is acquired, it is notified that “50” games are determined as the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state”. The icon display area 601i differs in that “1” of the ninth icon 605i is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 130D, when the “description image” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31, when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected by the effect button sensor 21s, the acquired “ART” The “additional state” will be notified. In FIG. 130D, when the ninth icon 605i is acquired, it is notified that the “second ART added state” has been acquired.

  In this way, when the state managed by the main control board 300 becomes the “ART game number notification state”, the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state” and the acquired “first ART additional state” The acquired “second ART added state” will be notified. Here, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 21 is detected, the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state” corresponding to the acquired icons in the order in which the icons were acquired, and the acquisition The “first ART added state” and the acquired “second ART added state” are notified.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the ninth icon 605i is selected when notifying the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state” and when notifying the acquired “ART added state”. For this reason, when the state managed by the main control board 300 is the “ART game number determination state”, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added at the timing when the icon is acquired, or the “ART additional state” It will not be understood whether is acquired. Therefore, the expectation can be maintained until the state managed by the main control board 300 becomes the “ART game number notification state”.

  In the present embodiment, the order in which icons are acquired refers to the order of icons acquired last from the first acquired icon, but may be the order of icons acquired first from the last acquired icon. . Further, the notification order corresponding to the icons may be notified first from the icon corresponding to the acquired “ART added state” rather than the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state”, for example. The notification may be made in advance from the icon corresponding to the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state” rather than the acquired “ART added state”.

  Also, notification may be made in order from the icon that was acquired when the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state” is determined, or games can be played in the “ART state” Notification may be performed in order from the icon acquired when the small number of games is determined as the number of games.

(Production mode when the lever member is operated in the ART game number notification state)
Next, based on FIG. 131, an effect mode when the lever member is operated in the ART game number notification state will be described.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 131 (A), when the state shifts to the “ART game number notification state”, an explanation image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (B), when the “description image” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 31 and the operation of the lever member 7 is detected by the lever member switch 7sw, the “art game number determination” is determined. In the “state”, the number of games that can be played in the added “ART state”, the acquired “first ART added state”, and the acquired “second ART added state” are collectively notified. In FIG. 131 (B), the third icon 605c, the seventh icon 605g, the ninth icon 605i, the tenth icon 605j, the twelfth icon 605l, and the fourteenth icon 605n are acquired, and the added “ART The total number of games that can be played in the “state” is “200” games, and “2” is acquired for the “first ART added state” and “1” is acquired for the “second ART added state”. ing.

(Circular effect, pseudo game, left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, right stop button 13)
Next, based on FIG. 132, the relationship between the spinning effect, the pseudo game, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 will be described.

  First, FIG. 132 (A) shows a spinning effect, a pseudo game, and a left when the winning combination is “losing” and the lottery is performed by the lottery process for shifting to the simulated gaming state at the time of losing in step S110-2-8. The relationship among the stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is shown.

  Specifically, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is the remainder of the result of dividing by “6”. When the value obtained by adding “1” is “1”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. If it is, the pseudo game mode will be promoted. On the other hand, when the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order other than the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the pseudo game mode is maintained. It will be.

  Next, FIG. 132 (B) shows the spinning effect when the winning combination is “losing” and the lottery in the lost game state transition lottery process in step S110-2-8 is not won. The relationship between the pseudo game, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is shown.

  Specifically, if the lottery in the lost game state transition lottery process in step S110-2-8 is not won (step S110-2-9 = No), the pseudo-game push-in lottery process subroutine Therefore, the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18 is not performed. Therefore, since the pseudo game mode is not promoted, the pseudo game mode is maintained regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated.

  Here, when the lottery by the lost game state transition lottery process at step S110-2-8 is not won (step S110-2-9 = No), the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, By displaying the operation order of the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 31, it is difficult to determine whether or not the pseudo game mode has been promoted. In this case, the sub CPU 401 draws the “6” operation sequence of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 with a probability of “1/6”, thereby allowing the liquid crystal display device 31 to The operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 to be displayed is determined.

  Next, FIG. 132 (C) shows the relationship between the spinning effect when the winning combination is “replay”, the pseudo game, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13.

  Specifically, when “Replay” is determined as the winning combination, the pseudo game mode is promoted in principle. Therefore, the pseudo game mode is promoted regardless of the order in which the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated. However, when the pseudo game mode is “3” and the “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination, the pseudo game mode is maintained.

  Next, FIG. 132 (D) shows the rotation effect when the winning combination is “RB in operation bell” and the relationship between the pseudo game and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Yes.

  Specifically, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is the remainder of the result of dividing by “6”. When the value obtained by adding “1” is “1”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. In this case, the reservation number “0” is set, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. The reservation number “1” is set, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. In this case, the reservation number “2” is set, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11. Is set with the reservation number “3” and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12. When the reservation number “6” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11, The reservation number “7” is set.

  In addition, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is further “1” as a result of dividing by “6”. When the added value is “2”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Is set with the reservation number “7” and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. When the reservation number “0” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. When the reservation number “1” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11, When the reservation number “2” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12, When the reservation number “3” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11, a reservation is made. The number “6” will be set.

  In addition, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is further “1” as a result of dividing by “6”. When the added value is “3”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Is set to the reservation number “6” and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. When the reservation number “7” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. When the reservation number “0” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11, When the reservation number “1” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12, When the reservation number “2” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11, a reservation is made. The number “3” is set.

  In addition, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is further “1” as a result of dividing by “6”. When the added value is “4”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Is set to the reservation number “3” and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. When the reservation number “6” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. When the reservation number “7” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11, When the reservation number “0” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12, When the reservation number “1” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11, a reservation is made. The number “2” is set.

  In addition, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is further “1” as a result of dividing by “6”. When the added value is “5”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Is set to the reservation number “2” and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. When the reservation number “3” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. When the reservation number “6” is set, and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11, When the reservation number “7” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12, When the reservation number “0” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11, a reservation is made. The number “1” is set.

  In addition, by the pseudo game push order setting process in step S110-2-18, the random number value set in the register in the hard random number acquisition process in step S110-2-17 is further “1” as a result of dividing by “6”. When the added value is “6”, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Is set with the reservation number “1” and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the left stop button 11, the right stop button 13, and the middle stop button 12. When the reservation number “2” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the left stop button 11, and the right stop button 13. When the reservation number “3” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the middle stop button 12, the right stop button 13, and the left stop button 11, When the reservation number “6” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button 12, When the reservation number “7” is set and the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated in the order of the right stop button 13, the middle stop button 12, and the left stop button 11, the reservation is made. The number “0” is set.

  In the present embodiment, when the same reservation number is set “2” times in succession, a corresponding pseudo game or a spinning effect is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, When the reservation number is set “1” times, the corresponding pseudo game or spinning effect may be performed. Further, when the same reservation number is set “3” times or more in succession, a corresponding pseudo game or spinning effect may be performed.

(Rotation effect suggestion effect decision table)
Next, based on FIG. 133, the spinning effect suggestion effect determination table will be described.

  The spinning effect suggestion effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for determining whether or not to execute the spinning effect suggestion effect. Specifically, in the spinning effect suggestion effect determination table, the lottery value corresponding to the spinning effect suggestion effect is defined corresponding to the spinning effect that is to be executed and the spinning effect that is to be executed. ing. For example, when it is determined to execute the first torso effect, “no effect” is determined with a probability of “32768/65536”, and “the first torso effect is determined with a probability of“ 16384/65536 ”. The “second suggestion effect” is determined with the probability of “8192/65536”, the “third suggestion effect” with the probability of “8192/65536”, The “fourth body effect suggestion effect” is not determined.

  The “third torso effect suggestion effect” is executed only when it is determined to execute the “first torso effect” or when it is determined to execute the “second torso effect”. It can be done. Therefore, when the “third body effect suggesting effect” is executed, the player is determined to execute the “first body effect” or “the second body effect”. I can recognize that.

  The “fourth torso effect suggestion effect” is an effect that can be executed only when it is determined to execute the “second torso effect”. Therefore, when the “fourth torso effect suggestion effect” is executed, the player can recognize that it has been decided to execute the “second torso effect”.

  Thus, according to the present invention, in the “ART game number determination state”, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is added. Here, in the “ART game number determination state”, when the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more, the left stop button 11 for continuing the “ART game number determination state”; When the operation order of the middle stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is notified and the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “0”, the left stop for continuing the “ART game number determination state” The operation order of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified, or the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for ending the “ART game number determination state” is notified. To decide. Then, when the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more, the sub control board 400 performs an effect suggesting a privilege to be given to the player, and in the main RAM 303. When the value of the provided navigation stock counter is “0”, the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for continuing the “ART game number determination state” is notified. The production suggests the possibility of being. As a result, it is possible to produce a meaningful effect for the player both when the value of the navigation stock counter provided in the main RAM 303 is “1” or more and when it is “0”.

  In the present embodiment, the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 constitute a reel of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the start lever 10 and the start switch 10sw constitute the start operation detection means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the internal lottery process in step S109 constitutes the winning combination determining means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 constitute reel rotation control means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the left stop button 11, the left stop switch 11sw, the middle stop button 12, the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop button 13, and the right stop switch 13sw constitute stop operation detection means of the present invention.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the process during reel rotation in step S114 constitutes the stop control means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the pseudo game process of step S110-9 constitutes a special effect execution means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that determines to execute “pseudo game A”, “pseudo game B”, and “pseudo game C” constitutes stop operation order data determination means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that performs the process of adding “3” to the navigation stock counter constitutes the guaranteed number setting means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that performs the pseudo game continuation lottery process in step S110-7-2-5-11 constitutes a special effect continuation determination unit of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the sub control board 400 that notifies the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in which the pseudo game is continued, and the liquid crystal display device 31 are the continuous notification means of the present invention. Configure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control board 400 that notifies the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 at which the pseudo game ends, and the liquid crystal display device 31 are the end notification means of the present invention. Configure.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 300 that executes the pseudo lottery process for pseudo game in step S110-7-2-5-14 constitutes a privilege granting unit of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 400 that executes the “cut-in effect” and the liquid crystal display device 31 constitute the privilege suggestion effect executing means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 400 that executes the “cut-in effect” and the liquid crystal display device 31 constitute continuation suggestion effect execution means of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the “special effect” has been described by exemplifying a pseudo game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a spinning effect, for example.

  The “continuation operation order” can be appropriately set as long as it is an operation order for continuing the special effect.

  The “end operation order” is an operation order different from the continuous operation order, and can be appropriately set as long as it is an operation order for ending the special effect.

  In this embodiment, “pseudo game A”, “pseudo game B”, and “pseudo game C” are described as “stop operation order data”, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  In the present embodiment, the “navigation stock counter” is exemplified as the “guarantee count”, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the “privilege”, the number of games that can be played in the “ART state” is exemplified and the case where the “ART added state” is acquired is described as an example, but the present invention is limited to this. There is no such thing as long as it is beneficial to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is exemplified and described as the “privilege suggestion effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any effect may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is exemplified and described as the “continuation suggestion effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any effect may be used.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the sub ROM 402 is reduced by performing the same effect in the “privilege suggestion effect” and the “continuation suggestion effect”, but the present invention is not limited to this. Different productions may be performed for the “privilege suggestion effect” and the “continuation suggestion effect”. Thereby, various productions can be performed.

  In addition, the matter shown by this embodiment is only an example to the last, and can be suitably changed in the range which does not deviate from the scope of the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal insertion slot 7 lever member 7sw lever member switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10sw start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Selector 14s Selector sensor 15 Stored number indicator 16 Discharged number indicator 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Effect button 21s Effect button Sensor 22 Cross key 22s Cross key sensor 23 Display window 24 Receptacle unit 25 Medal payout port 30 External concentration terminal plate 31 Liquid crystal display device 32 Lamp 33 Speaker 34 Light guide plate 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 Power board 201 Power button 201sw Power switch 202 Hopper 202s Hopper sensor 300 Main control board 301 Main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 500 Production control board 501 Production control CPU
502 Production control ROM
503 Production control RAM
504 CGROM
505 Sound source IC
506 Sound source ROM
507 VDP
601a 1st icon display area 601b 2nd icon display area 601c 3rd icon display area 601d 4th icon display area 601e 5th icon display area 601f 6th icon display area 601g 7th icon display area 601h 8th icon display area 601i 8th 9 icon display area 601j 10th icon display area 601k 11th icon display area 601l 12th icon display area 601m 13th icon display area 601n 14th icon display area 601o 15th icon display area 601p 16th icon display area 602 Special icon display Area 603 Stop operation order display area 604 Number of games display area 605a First icon 605b Second icon 605c Third icon 605d Fourth icon 605e Fifth icon 605f Sixth eye 605g 7th icon 605h 8th icon 605i 9th icon 605j 10th icon 605k 11th icon 605l 12th icon 605m 13th icon 605n 14th icon 605o 15th icon 605p 16th icon 605q Special icon 606 Acquired game number display area 607 Remaining game number display area

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detection means, and the reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Reel rotation control means for performing rotation control, stop operation detection means provided for each of the plurality of reels to detect a stop operation by a player, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means And a stop control means for stopping the reel rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, , A special effect executing means for executing a special effect using the stop operation detecting means, a continuation operation order in which the special effect is continued, and a stop operation order in which an end operation order in which the special effect ends is defined Stop operation order data determining means for determining data, guaranteed number setting means for setting a guaranteed number of times that the continuous operation order is notified when the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and the special effect In a case where the special effect for the number of times of guarantee is executed, the special effect is determined to be continued, and the special effect for the number of times of guarantee is executed, When it is decided to continue the special effect by the special effect continuation determining unit that determines whether or not to continue the special effect and the special effect continuation determining unit , A continuation informing means for informing the continuation operation order, an end informing means for informing the ending operation order when the special effect continuation determining means decides to end the special effect, and the special effect continuation. When it is decided by the deciding means to continue the special effect, the privilege granting means for giving a privilege to the player, and until the execution of the special effect for the number of guarantees is completed, Privilege suggestion effect execution means for executing the privilege suggestion effect that suggests the privilege given by the privilege grant means after the stop operation of all of the plurality of reels is performed, and the special effect for the number of guarantee times is executed. And a continuation suggestion effect executing means for executing a continuation suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the special effect will continue before the stop operation is performed .

Claims (1)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Reel rotation control means for performing control to rotate the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detection means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for stopping the reel being rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. When,
Special effect executing means for executing a special effect using the reel and the stop operation detecting means;
A stop operation order data determining means for determining stop operation order data in which a continuation operation order in which the special effect is continued and an end operation order in which the special effect ends is defined;
In the case where the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, a guaranteed number setting means for setting a guaranteed number of times that the continuous operation order is notified;
When executing the special effect, it is determined to continue the special effect until the special effect corresponding to the guaranteed number of times is executed, and the special effect corresponding to the guaranteed number of times is executed. After that, special effect continuation determining means for determining whether or not to continue the special effect;
When it is determined by the special effect continuation determining unit that the special effect is to be continued, a continuation notification unit that notifies the continuation operation order;
An end notifying means for notifying the end operation sequence when it is determined by the special effect continuation determining means to end the special effect;
When it is determined by the special effect continuation determining unit that the special effect is to be continued, a privilege granting unit that gives a privilege to the player;
Until the execution of the special effect corresponding to the number of guarantees is completed, a privilege suggestion effect executing unit that executes a privilege suggestion effect that suggests the privilege granted by the privilege grant unit;
A continuation suggestion effect executing means for executing a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the special effect continuation determination means is determined to continue the special effect after the special effect for the guaranteed number of times is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: